JP6803091B2 - Game table - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a rotating body game machine (slot machine).

In pachinko machines and other game consoles, obstacles that change the direction in which the game ball falls, and a winning opening, starting opening, and variable winning opening where the game ball can win are provided in the game area of the game board. It is common. When a game ball wins a prize, the player is given a privilege such as paying out the prize ball (see, for example, Patent Document 1 and the like).

Further, such a game table is known to be equipped with a light emitting means.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-20302

However, in the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the light emitting means.

In view of the above circumstances, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game table having a characteristic light emitting means.

The game console of the present invention that solves the above object is
The first symbol display means capable of executing the first symbol variation display,
A second symbol display means capable of executing a second symbol variation display,
A game control means that can control any one of a plurality of game states,
The first starting prize means that the game ball can enter,
A certain gate where a game ball can enter,
Display means that can display multiple displays and
A light emitting means capable of emitting light with multiple types of light emitting patterns,
It is a game table equipped with
The gate is provided at a position where the game ball can enter when hitting to the right.
The first starting winning means is a winning means corresponding to the first symbol display means.
In some cases, both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display are being executed at the same time.
One of the plurality of gaming states is the first gaming state.
One of the plurality of gaming states is the second gaming state.
The second gaming state is a gaming state different from the first gaming state.
One of the plurality of displays is a symbol variation effect display.
The display of one of the plurality of displays is the first standby effect display.
The display of one of the plurality of displays is the second standby effect display.
One of the plurality of displays is a setting screen display.
The certain symbol variation effect display is a display including a display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are variablely displayed.
The first standby effect display is a display including a display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.
The second standby effect display is a display that does not include a display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.
The display mode of the second standby effect display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first standby effect display.
In the first gaming state, the certain symbol variation effect display is started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display.
In the first gaming state, the certain symbol variation effect display corresponding to the start of the second symbol variation display is not started.
The first standby effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed.
The second standby effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed in the first game state.
A certain period of time is started after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means.
When the game ball enters the gate during the certain period, the big hit game is started.
The display of one of the plurality of displays is the first display.
The display of one of the plurality of displays is the second display.
The display of one of the plurality of displays is the fourth display.
The first display is a display that encourages right-handed striking.
The second display is a display that may be displayed during the certain period.
In the first gaming state, the first display is displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means.
In some cases, both the first display and the second display may be displayed.
In some cases, both the first display and the first standby effect display are displayed (hereinafter, referred to as "first state").
In some cases, both the first display and the second standby effect display are displayed (hereinafter, referred to as "second state").
Ri If there from the first state becomes the second state,
The fourth display is an effect display including a display for notifying a big hit.
When the first standby effect display is displayed in a state where the first symbol variation display is not executed and the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter, referred to as "third case"). .) There is
In the third case, when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, the display of the fourth display may be started.
Even in the first state, the display of the certain setting screen display can be started.
The light emitting pattern of one of the plurality of types of light emitting patterns is the first light emitting pattern.
The light emission pattern of one of the plurality of types of light emission patterns is the second light emission pattern.
When a game ball enters the first start winning means, light emission may be started in the first light emission pattern.
When a game ball enters the first start winning means, light emission may be started in the second light emission pattern.
The first light emission pattern is the default light emission pattern and
The second light emission pattern is a light emission pattern that may be started as a look-ahead notice.
When the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, light emission may be started in the first light emission pattern.
Even if the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the light emission does not start in the second light emission pattern.
There is no first symbol variation display whose start is suspended, there is no second symbol variation display whose start is suspended, and both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display are executed. In the state where the first standby effect display is displayed, the light emission may be started in the second light emission pattern.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game console of the present invention, it is possible to realize a game console characterized by light emitting means.

It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment as seen from the front side (player side). It is a rear view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. (A) is a schematic front view of the game board viewed from the front side (player side), and (b) is an enlarged view of various lamps mounted on the main control lamp board arranged on the game board. It is a representation figure. It is a figure explaining the structure of the variable winning apparatus. It is a functional block diagram of a pachinko machine. An example of a display symbol of a pachinko machine, (a) shows an example of a stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of a stop display symbol of special figure 2, and (c) is a decorative symbol. An example is shown, and FIG. 1D is a diagram showing an example of a stop display symbol of a normal figure. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the timer interrupt process of a main control part. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether or not the normal figure is correct, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether or not the special figures 1 and 2 are correct, and (c) is a diagram for determining the special figure. It is a figure which shows an example of the contents of the distribution table. It is a flowchart which shows the process flow in the 1st sub-control unit of a pachinko machine, (a) is the flowchart of the 1st sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 1st sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart, and (c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process flow in the 2nd sub-control unit of a pachinko machine, (a) is the flowchart of the 2nd sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 2nd sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart, (c) is a flowchart of a second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) is a flowchart of a second sub-control unit image control process. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the DIP switch board. (A) is a timing chart for explaining an example of the operation when the special figure 2 becomes a big hit during the special figure 1 fluctuation, and (b) shows that the special figure 2 is a small hit during the special figure 1 fluctuation. It is a timing chart explaining an example of the operation when it becomes. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which concerns on the decorative symbol variation display centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 14 step by step. It is a timing chart explaining an example of the process from the stop of a big hit symbol to the end of a big hit game. It is an example of an effect centering on a decorative symbol display device, and is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect performed before the jackpot game starts. An example of an effect centered on a decorative symbol display device, which is an example of an effect when the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started during the symbol variation of the special figure 2 which is a big hit during the production of the animation demo which is a standby effect. It is a figure which shows step by step. It is an example of an effect centering on a decorative symbol display device, and is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect when a big hit is made in Special Figure 2 during an effect of a symbol demo which is a standby effect. It is an example of an effect centering on a decorative symbol display device, and is a diagram stepwise showing another example of an effect when a big hit is made in Special Figure 2 during the effect of a symbol demo which is a standby effect. It is an example of an effect centering on a decorative pattern display device, and is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect when a big hit is made in Special Figure 2 during an animation demo production which is a standby effect. It is an example of an effect centered on a decorative symbol display device, and is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect in which the transition to the menu screen is possible and the transition is restricted during the execution of the standby effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the production centering on a decorative pattern display device step by step. It is an example of an effect centered on a decorative pattern display device, and is a diagram showing step by step another example of an effect performed before the jackpot game starts. It is an example of an effect centering on a decorative symbol display device, and is a diagram stepwise showing another example of an effect performed before the big hit game starts in a probabilistic state. It is an example of an effect centering on a decorative symbol display device, and is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect when a power failure / recovery occurs during execution of a gate entry standby effect. It is an example of an effect centering on a decorative pattern display device, and is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect when a small hit is made in Special Figure 2 during an animation demo production which is a standby effect. It is an example of the production centering on the decorative pattern display device, and is a diagram stepwise showing another production example when a small hit is made in Special Figure 2 during the production of an animation demo which is a standby production. It is an example of the production centering on the decorative symbol display device, and is a diagram stepwise showing an example of the production when a game ball wins a prize at the first special figure start port during the production of an animation demo which is a standby production. It is an example of a production centered on a decorative pattern display device, and is a diagram showing step by step another production example when a game ball wins a prize at the first special figure start port during the production of an animation demo which is a standby production. is there. It is an example of an effect centering on a decorative symbol display device, and is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect when a game ball wins a prize at the first special figure start port during the effect of a symbol demo which is a standby effect. It is an example of the production centering on the decorative pattern display device, and is the figure which shows the production example of the one-shot announcement notice effect step by step. It is an example of the production centered on the decorative symbol display device, and is a diagram showing step by step another production example when the game ball wins a prize at the first special figure start port during the production of the symbol demo which is the standby production. is there. An example of a production centered on a decorative pattern display device, which is a diagram showing step by step another production example when a game ball wins a prize at the start port of the first special figure during the production of an animation demo which is a standby production. Is. This is an example of a production centered on a decorative pattern display device, and a production example is shown step by step when a power failure or power recovery occurs after the gate entry standby state is entered during the production of an animation demo that is a standby production. It is a figure. It is an example of an effect centered on a decorative pattern display device, and is a diagram showing step by step how a pre-reading notice effect at the time of winning is being performed. It is an example of the effect centering on the decorative pattern display device, and is the figure which shows the effect example stepwise when it shifts to a power saving mode. It is an example of the effect centering on the decorative pattern display device, and is the figure explaining the example of the light emission pattern of a lamp according to the effect state. It is an example of the production centering on the decorative pattern display device, and is the figure which shows the production example of an increase animation and a moving animation step by step. It is a front view of the enclosed type pachinko machine to which this invention is applied. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine applicable to this invention as seen from the front side (player side). It is a figure which shows the game table by the modification of this invention, (a) shows the casino machine, (b) shows the mobile phone which has the storage part which stores the electronic data which realizes this invention, (c ) Indicates a portable game machine provided with a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and (d) is a home video game provided with a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention. The machine is shown, and (e) shows a data server that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention.

Hereinafter, the game console according to the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 and a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a game table on which a player can obtain profits when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and launches an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, and a door 108 with a ball storage plate. The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side) thereof.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertically rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island facility or the like) provided in a game machine installation shop.

The main body 104 is a door member provided inside the outer frame 102, having a locking function, and rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 as a base body of a vertically rectangular gaming machine. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk at a store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 has been opened is provided.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. The clerk of the game store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 for detecting that the front frame door 106 has been opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is divided between the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In this embodiment, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and to be opened and closed. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is opened by pushing an opening lever 1081 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. Further, a door sensor 1082 with a ball storage plate that detects that the door 108 with a ball storage plate has been opened is also provided. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is an upper plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. , The lower plate 128 that stores the game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, the ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, and the player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to the game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game board that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by the operation of the player. The ball launching handle 134 that launches into the game area 124, the effect button 136 that changes the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 2) by the operation of the player, and the effect button 136 that is built into the effect button 136. The chance button lamp 138 that emits light, the ball lending operation button 140 that instructs the card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store to lend the ball, and the card unit that instructs the card unit to return the balance of the player. It includes a return operation button 142 and a ball lending display unit 144 that displays the player's balance and the state of the card unit. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower plate full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full due to the game ball. Further, the operation key unit 190 is also provided.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. , Equipped with. While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously launched by the player, the launching device 110 launches the game ball into the gaming area 124 of the game board every predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds). It fires at the target and corresponds to an example of a firing means.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104. Note that the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown in FIG. 1, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 as viewed from the back side.

The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is located at the bottom of the ball tank 150, which is located below the ball tank 150 for temporarily storing the game balls. A tank rail 154 for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the payout device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is arranged.

The payout device 152 is composed of a tubular member, and includes a payout motor (not shown), a sprocket, and a payout sensor inside the payout device 152. The payout device 152 is removable and, when mounted at a predetermined position, connects to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. As a result, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that applies a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either a high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 5). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined value. Based on the condition being satisfied, the player is given (paid out) an amount of game value (game ball) according to the grant condition by this configuration.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 152, there is a main board case 158 for accommodating the main board 156 constituting the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 5) that performs control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control unit 300. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 and the first sub-control unit 400 that house the first sub-board 160 constituting the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 5) that performs control processing related to the effect based on the effect. A second sub-board case 166 that houses a second sub-board 164 that constitutes a second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 5) that performs control processing related to the effect, and a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls (see FIG. 5). (See FIG. 5), a payout board case 172 for accommodating a payout board 170 including an error release switch 168 for canceling an error by an operation of a game clerk, and a launch control unit 630 (FIG. 5) for performing control processing related to launching a game ball. A power switch that constitutes a launch board case 176 that houses the launch board 174 that constitutes (see), a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical game devices (see FIG. 5), and turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk. A power supply board case 184 for accommodating a power supply board 182 including a 178 and a RAM clear switch 180 for outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on, and a signal between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. The CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving the above is arranged.

Further, in the present embodiment, the setting change key 192, the setting change button 194, and the accessory ratio / setting display 196 are provided on the main board 156. In the present embodiment, when the setting change key 192 is operated on the condition that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, the setting change mode can be set to at least one of a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities. Can be migrated to. In the setting change mode, the current setting is displayed on the accessory ratio / setting display 196, and the clerk can change the setting by pressing the setting change button 194 while checking this. Even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed when the power is turned on, the setting may be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on.

The accessory ratio / setting display 196 is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156 and arranged inside the main board case 158, and is attached in a manner visible to the clerk. As shown in FIG. 12 (A), the accessory ratio / setting display 196 has two-digit 7-segment LEDs arranged one above the other and a one-digit seven-segment LED modularized on the right side. The accessory ratio monitor is an indicator for notifying the accessory ratio (YH) and the continuous accessory ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for confirming the current setting. The accessory ratio / setting display 196 is composed of, for example, a single-color LED of red, but may be capable of emitting light in three colors of red, green, and orange, or may be a full-color LED. It should be noted that at least a part of the accessory ratio / setting display 196 may be provided on the game board 200, for example, so that the player can see it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the DIP switch board 198 is arranged on the back surface of the first sub board case 162. Details of the DIP switch board 198 will be described later.

FIG. 3A is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. Here, the arrows d2 and d3 indicate the directions in which the pachinko machine 100 is fixed at the installation location. The arrow d2 indicates the width direction (sometimes referred to as the left-right direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the left hand may be referred to as the left and the right hand may be referred to as the right in front view. The arrow d3 indicates the height direction (sometimes referred to as the vertical direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the higher one may be referred to as upper and the lower one may be referred to as lower. Although not shown in FIG. 3, in the depth direction (sometimes referred to as the front-rear direction) of the pachinko machine 100, the front side may be referred to as the front side or the front side, and the back side may be referred to as the back side or the rear side.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

Various structures can be adopted for the mounting structure of the game board 200 to the main body 104. For example, the front left side portion 200a of the game board 200 is inserted into the front view left side (hinge portion 112 side) of the main body 104, and here. It is possible to adopt a structure in which the game board 200 is rotated around the center of rotation while the right side portion 200b of the game board 200 is pressed against the main body 104 and set. Such a structure can improve workability. In some cases.

The game board 200 is a unit in which various parts are attached to a plate-shaped main body 201. The main body 201 is made of resin, for example, and its surface (front surface) constitutes a decorative surface on which a character or the like of the pachinko machine 100 is displayed. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by pasting a sheet on which a character of the pachinko machine 100 or the like is printed. A vibration sensor SR3 is arranged at the lower right of the main body 201. When it is detected by the vibration sensor SR3, error processing (for example, notification by an image or sound, game stop that makes it impossible to continue the game, etc.) can be performed. The vibration sensor SR3 may be another fraud detection sensor such as a magnetic sensor.

The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll. A part of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that can be attached to and detached from the main body 104. Of the game area 124, the area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 forms a guide area 201a for guiding the launched game ball.

Areas other than the game area 124 of the game board 200 may be referred to as non-game areas. The gaming area 124 and the non-gaming area can be distinguished from each other with the outer rail 202 as a boundary. Further, the area inside the area through which the game ball passes with the firing intensity of the game ball maximized can be called at least the game area 124. The game area 124 may include an area through which the game ball does not pass due to the presence of the effect device or the like in the game area 124. The game area 124 may be called a flow-down area at the point where the game ball flows down during the game, and the non-game area may be called the non-flow-down area at the point where the game ball does not flow down during the game except for maintenance and accidents. The entire area of the game area 124 may be referred to as a flow-down area, but an area in which the game ball does not flow down due to the presence of the effect device or the like may be referred to as a non-flow-down area.

A decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124. A main control lamp board 254 is provided below the game area 124, and as shown in FIG. 3B, a normal symbol display device 210 and a first special symbol are placed on the main control lamp board 254. Display device 212, 2nd special symbol display device 214, normal symbol holding lamp 216, 1st special symbol holding lamp 218, 2nd special symbol holding lamp 220, high accuracy middle lamp RK, electric support middle lamp An RD, a right-handed lamp RM, and a round indicator lamp RR are arranged. Hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "normal symbol" and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for displaying various displays used for the decorative symbol and the effect, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas of a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , 7-segment display device, organic EL (ElectroLuminessence) display device, reel (drum) type display device, leaf type display device, plasma display, and other display devices including a projector may be adopted.

The normal figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and is composed of two LEDs in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, each of them is composed of eight LEDs.

The normal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding normal figure variable games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, the normal figure variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do. The first special figure holding lamp 218 is a lamp for indicating the number of special figure changing games held, and in this embodiment, holding up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of special figure changing games. It is possible. Further, the second special symbol holding lamp 220 is a lamp for indicating the number of special figure changing games being held, and in the present embodiment, the special figure changing games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible.

Further, the high-probability middle lamp RK is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high-probability state. The electric support medium lamp RD is a lamp for indicating that the variation display time of the normal symbol is shortened and the blade member 231a of the electric tulip, which will be described later, is in an electric support state where it is easy to open for a long time. The right-handed indicator lamp RM is in a specific game state such as a big hit game state, a small hit game state, a probability change state, or an electric support state, and the player can obtain the benefit by hitting right. It is a lamp to indicate. The round display lamp RR is a lamp for indicating the number of rounds in the big hit game related to the big hit when the big hit is made.

A predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226a, a normal drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, 231 and a jackpot generation gate 252 are arranged around the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a variable winning device 2340 is provided in the lower right portion of the game area 124.

One or a plurality of general winning openings 226a are provided at appropriate locations in the game area 124. Here, the general winning opening arranged on the left side of the game area 124 is referred to as a general winning opening 226a.

When a ball enters the general winning opening 226a, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and assuming that the general winning opening 226a is won, the payout device 152 is driven to win a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls. It is discharged to the upper plate 126 as a ball. The balls discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. In the present embodiment, when a plurality of general winning openings are provided, different ball detection sensors may be used to detect the winning balls, or each of the plurality of general winning openings may be entered. The ball passages that guide the ball game balls may be merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. Further, when a plurality of general winning openings are provided on the right side of the game area 124, the ball passages for guiding the entered game balls may be merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. However, they may be detected by different sphere detection sensors. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226a is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The normal drawing start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the right side of the game board 200. One is arranged in. Unlike the balls that have entered the general winning opening 226, the balls that have passed through the starting port 228 are not discharged to the game island side, but when they are entered, a predetermined number (for example, one) of prizes is awarded. In addition to paying out the balls, the entered game balls may be guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and discharged to the game island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal drawing variation game by the normal drawing display device 210.

In this embodiment, two first special figure starting ports 230 and 231 are arranged vertically side by side in the lower center of the game board 200. In the following description, for convenience, the first special figure start port 230 provided above is referred to as "first special figure start port (upper) 230", and the first special figure start port 231 provided below is referred to as "first special figure start port (upper) 230". It may be referred to as "first special figure start port (bottom) 231". When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects an entry into the starting port (upper) 230 of the first special figure, the payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls are used as prize balls. At the same time as discharging to the plate 126, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port (upper) 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of the present embodiment, due to the arrangement of the first special figure start port (upper) 230, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first special figure start port (upper) 230 when hitting right. ing. Then, in the present embodiment, the specification for starting the variable display of the special figure in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 regardless of whether or not one special figure performs the variable display of the other special figure (such as this). Pachinko machines with various specifications are sometimes called "simultaneous fluctuation machines").

The first special figure start port (bottom) 231 is composed of an electric tulip (electric chew), is arranged below the first special figure start port (top) 230, and includes a blade member 231a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the blade member 231a is closed, it is impossible for the ball to enter the ball, and when the normal figure display device 210 stops and displays the hit symbol, the blade member 231a has a predetermined time interval and a predetermined time. It opens and closes as many times as. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the starting port (bottom) 231 of the first special figure, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, one) of balls is used as a prize ball in the upper plate 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port (bottom) 231 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of the present embodiment, due to the arrangement of the normal drawing start port 228 (by a game nail (not shown)), it is difficult for the game ball to enter the normal drawing start port 228 when hitting left. .. Therefore, in principle, the player does not win the game of changing the normal figure during left-handed hitting, and therefore, in principle, the blade member 231a does not open or close. On the other hand, in the case of hitting to the right, since the game ball can be expected to enter the normal drawing start port 228, the blade member 231a may open and close by winning the normal drawing variable game. That is, while hitting left, there is almost no possibility of winning the first special figure starting port (bottom) 231. However, while hitting right, there is a possibility of winning the first special figure starting port (bottom) 231. It can be said that there is.

As will be described later, the jackpot generation gate 252 is a gate in which detection of the passage of a game ball is effective when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the jackpot generation gate 252 during the valid period after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is started. In the present embodiment, the normal drawing start port 228 and the big hit generation gate 252 are separately provided, but for example, the normal drawing start gate 228 may also have the function of the big hit generation gate 252, that is, , The same game ball passage detection switch may be used for the normal figure start gate and the jackpot generation gate. Further, the game ball passage detection switch that also functions as the jackpot generation gate is not limited to the normal drawing start gate 228, and may be another game ball passage detection switch, for example, the second special figure start port 232 or the like. It may be a game ball passage detection switch used for the first special figure start port (bottom) 231 and the like.

Next, the configuration of the variable winning device 2340 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the variable winning device 2340. In FIG. 4, the decorative member 2340b is transparently shown in order to easily explain the internal structure of the variable winning device 2340.

The variable winning device 2340 is provided with, for example, a mounting base 2340a for mounting on the front surface of the game board 200 and a decorative member 2340b mounted on the front surface of the mounting base 2340a at a predetermined interval. There is.

The mounting base 2340a has a rectangular opening substantially in the center near the upper end, and a plate-shaped first door member 2341a is mounted so as to cover the opening. The lower end side of the first door member 2341a is pivotally supported by the mounting base 2340a, and can be opened and closed forward by driving a solenoid (not shown) mounted on the rear side of the mounting base 2340a. This solenoid is included in the various solenoids 332 described above, and is driven by the drive circuit 334. In the present embodiment, the first variable winning opening 234a is configured as described above. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first variable winning opening 234a, a predetermined number (for example, eight) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234a is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

Further, a second variable winning opening 235a is formed between the mounting base 2340a and the decorative member 2340b as described below.

As shown in FIG. 4, the decorative member 2340b has a wall surface having a bottom surface 2340c, an upper surface 2340d, and a side surface 2340e erected rearward from the back surface of the plate surface 2340f. In the decorative member 2340b, a first rolling region SP1 and a second rolling region SP2 on which the game ball can roll are formed by the wall surface, and the open portion behind the first rolling region SP1 is closed by the front surface of the mounting base 2340a.

The upper part of the first rolling region SP1 is open, and a plate-shaped shutter member 2351a is provided so as to cover the open portion so as to be able to advance and retreat in the depth direction with respect to the mounting base 2340a. The shutter member 2351a is slightly downwardly inclined toward the front and is inclined from the right to the left, and is configured to be displaceable by the drive of the solenoid. This solenoid is included in the various solenoids 332 described above, and is driven by a drive circuit 334 (see FIG. 5). That is, in the present embodiment, when the shutter member 2351a is in the state of advancing forward (closed state) with respect to the mounting base 2340a, the first rolling region SP1 is blocked, and the first of the game balls. When the entry into the rolling region SP1 is blocked and the game is in the backward retracted state (open state), the first rolling region SP1 is opened and the game ball enters the first rolling region SP1. Entry is allowed. Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of ribs 2340i are projected rearward at substantially equal intervals so as to face the shutter member 2351a on the back surface of the decorative member 2340b, and the shutter member is closed. The game ball is decelerated by colliding with the game ball rolling on the 2351a, and the residence time of the game ball on the shutter member 2351a is increased. In the present embodiment, since it is configured in this way, a plurality of game balls mainly staying mainly on the shutter member 2351a can be secondly changed at the same time by opening the shutter member 2351a for a short time (for example, 0.06 seconds). It may be possible to enter the ball into the winning opening 235a. Further, in the present embodiment, since the shutter member 2351a is on the back surface of the decorative member 2340b, the shutter member 2351a is difficult for the player to see.

A winning count switch SW1 for detecting the passage of a game ball is arranged at a position connecting the first rolling region SP1 and the second rolling region SP2, and enters the first rolling region SP1. When the game ball rolls on the bottom surface 2340c and is guided to the left, it passes through the winning count switch SW1. The winning count switch SW1 is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured so that a detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In the present embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passage of the game ball through the winning count switch SW1, it detects the winning of the second variable winning opening 235a and the number based on the winning (for example, 15). ) To pay out the prize ball. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls that can be obtained by winning the second variable winning opening 235a is larger than the number of prize balls that can be obtained by winning the first variable winning opening 234a, so that various playability is provided. You may be able to.

The game ball that has passed through the winning count switch SW1 is guided to the second rolling region SP2. The second rolling region SP2 is configured to be guided by the general passage 2340h and discharged downward. A discharge ball detection switch SW3 is arranged in the general passage 2340h, and the game ball guided by the general passage 2340h is configured to pass through the discharge ball detection switch SW3. The discharge ball detection switch SW3 is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured so that the detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In the present embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passage of the game ball through the discharge ball detection switch SW3, it detects that the game ball has passed through the general passage 2340h.

In the present embodiment, by configuring as described above, for example, the number of passages of the game ball of the winning count switch SW1 and the number of passages of the discharge ball detection switch SW3 can be used to insert the game ball into the second variable winning opening 235a. By monitoring outs, it may be possible to monitor fraudulent winnings. Examples of fraudulent acts include acts using a ball with a thread or a game ball (so-called deca ball) having a size larger than the regulation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the first variable winning opening 234a, and a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the ball entering the second special drawing starting port 232. In this case, the payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, one) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126, and the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure start port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of the present embodiment, due to the arrangement of the second special figure starting port 232, when the ball is hit to the left, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second special figure starting port 232, but it is hit to the right. In that case, it is possible to enter the ball with high frequency due to the arrangement of the surrounding nails. In addition. The second special figure starting port 232 may be provided on the downstream side of the second variable winning opening 235a.
Further, in the game area 124, a disk-shaped ball striking direction changing member 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails are arranged, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, any winning opening or starting opening is provided. There is also an out port 240 for guiding the ball that did not win a prize to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.
In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and drives the launch rod and the launch rod. It is launched into the game area 124 by passing through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the launching mallet. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 flows downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail, or the like, and the winning openings (general winning opening 226a, first variable winning opening 234a, second). Either the variable winning opening 235a) or the starting port (1st special drawing starting port (top) 230, 1st special drawing starting port (bottom) 231 or 2nd special drawing starting port 232) is won, or whichever winning port or starting The out port 240 is reached without winning a prize in the mouth or only by passing through the starting port 228. Further, in the present embodiment, a discharge ball receiving port (not shown) for receiving all the game balls discharged from the game board 200 is formed so as to open upward at the lower side of the space 114 of the main body 104. An out-ball detection sensor SWout that detects the passage of the game ball received at the discharge ball receiving port is provided at a predetermined position on the main body 104. The out-ball detection sensor SWout may be provided on the game board 200 side. In the present embodiment, all the game balls discharged from the game board 200 (including the game balls discharged from the out port 240 and the game balls winning in various winning openings) are accepted by the discharge ball receiving port. Although it is configured to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via a predetermined discharge passage, only the game balls discharged from the out port 240 may pass through the out ball detection sensor SWout.
Further, the effect device 2 is arranged in the upper part of the game area 124, the effect device 3 is arranged in the lower part, and the effect device 4 is arranged on the left side and the right side, respectively. Behind each effect device 4, an effect device 5 described later is arranged. In the case of this embodiment, these are supported by the main body 104.

Further, in the present embodiment, both the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a make it difficult for the game ball to enter in the closed state, but it may be possible to win a prize, at least in the open state. It suffices if it is difficult for the game ball to enter.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The figure shows a functional block diagram of the control unit. The control units of the pachinko machine 100 are roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is configured to include a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game ball, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supply to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a time. A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, etc., a WDT314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, and a random number value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (assuming that this circuit has two counters built-in). Is installed. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. Further, the random number value generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Although the random number value generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, and a variable winning port, and various sensors 320 including a lower plate full tank sensor. Then, the sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304, the random number value generation circuit 318, etc. in the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the first special figure display device 212 or the first 2. A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a normal figure display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, To control the display of the normal figure hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the high-accuracy middle lamp RK, the electric support middle lamp RD, the right-handed lamp RM, the round display lamp RR, etc.) A drive means for driving a drive circuit 330 and a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 231a of a first special figure start port (bottom) 231 as a normal electric accessory, or a first variable winning port as a special electric accessory. A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 including a drive means for driving the door member 2341a of the 234a and the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number value generation circuit 318 are separately provided, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number value generation circuit 318.

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won a prize at the first special figure start port (top) 230 or the first special figure start port (bottom) 231, the sensor circuit 322 has detected the ball. Is output to the random number value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. The random number value generation circuit 318 that received this signal latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230 and the second special figure start port 231, and the latched value corresponds to the special figure 1. It is stored in the built-in counter value storage register. Further, when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the second special figure start port 232, the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 is similarly set. Latch and store the latched value in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to FIG.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown) to an external hall computer (not shown). The game information (for example, the game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 provided in the above.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 provides the voltage value of the power supply. Is less than a predetermined value (9V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 is provided from the start signal output circuit 340. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main process of the main control unit, which will be described later, is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. 1 Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is unidirectional communication, and the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is bidirectional communication. The main control unit 300 is configured so that signals such as commands can be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, but the first sub control unit 400 is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300. doing. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be configured to be performed by two-way communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured so that a signal such as a command can be transmitted to the main control unit 300, but is configured so that a signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. May be good.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with a serial communication control circuit 424. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data is connected to the basic circuit 402. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs. Further, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and the game board frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game board frame lamp 452. Then, lighting control is performed by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 422 for controlling the drive of the effect devices 2 to 5, and a sensor circuit. The 428 and the volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 receives detection signals from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current positions of the effect devices 2 to 5 and the like, and button sensors 426 that detect the pressing of various buttons that constitute the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 190. Output to the basic circuit 402.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives a control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a memory 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. A VDP (video display processor) that reads out image data or the like stored in ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is equipped with 516. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored is connected to the basic circuit 502. In the present embodiment, the memory 508 is used as the temporary storage area, and the memory 508 is composed of a recording medium (for example, EEPROM, flash memory, etc.) capable of holding the storage state even when the power supply is cut off. Thereby, for example, the information for displaying the display related to the jackpot history can be retained even when the main control unit 300 is initialized or the setting is changed. A RAM whose stored information volatilizes when the power is cut off may be used.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a ball rental ball based on the control signal output by the payout sensor 604. Detects whether or not the payout of is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 pays out prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out and a predetermined number (for example, 25) of loan balls. Ball rental information or the like indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). Further, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor 1044 that detects that the main body 104 has been opened, a front frame door sensor 1061 that detects that the front frame door 106 has been opened, and the like, and includes the main body 104 and the front frame door. When the 106 is open, these sensors detect it and output an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs the release signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs the door opening information to the main control unit 300.

The launch control unit 630 is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player, which is output by a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 to instruct launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the launch solenoid 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and the launch mallet 148, and control of the ball feed device 634 that supplies balls from the upper plate 126 to the launch device 110 based on the control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Capacitor). In this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500 with a predetermined voltage, and the payout control unit 600 launches the main control unit 300 and the second sub-control unit 500. Although the control unit 630 is supplied with the power supply of the predetermined voltage, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 6A to 6D, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be used will be explained.

The special figure 1 variable game is performed on condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the special figure 1 start port (top) 230 or the special figure 1 start port (bottom) 231. The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the second start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered the special figure 2 start port 232. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 blinks a part of the eight lamps (for example, the first lower lamp from the left). "Variation display" (special figure fluctuation game) is performed. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 blinks a part of the eight lamps (for example, the first lower lamp from the left). 2 variable display ”(special figure variable game) is performed. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2. After that, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variation display from the start of this "variation display of the special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variation display of the special figure. The variable display of this special figure may be continuously performed multiple times.

FIG. 6A shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1. In FIG. 6A, three types of special figures, "special figure A" to "special figure C", are shown. In FIG. 6A, a white portion in the figure indicates a lamp that is turned off, and a black portion indicates a lamp that is turned on.

In the present embodiment, two types of jackpot symbols (“special figure A” and “special figure B”) are prepared as the stop symbol modes of the special figure. "Special figure A" is a 6-round (R) normal jackpot symbol, and when "special figure A" is stopped and displayed, the first variable winning opening 234a shifts to a jackpot game state in which it opens in all rounds, and the jackpot After the game is finished, the control state becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. In addition, "special figure B" is a 6R probability variation big hit symbol, and when "special figure B" is stopped and displayed, the first variable winning opening 234a shifts to the big hit game state in which it opens in all rounds, and the big hit game ends. After that, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. In this embodiment, two types of jackpot symbols are prepared, but it goes without saying that three or more types of jackpot symbols may be prepared. In addition, a jackpot that is practically difficult to win in some rounds may be prepared. Further, a small hit symbol may be prepared.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether it is a normal big hit or a probabilistic big hit is determined by a lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probability variation jackpot is whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probability variation jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning this jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special figure probability change" or simply "probability change"), and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure. It is called a low probability state. In this embodiment, as will be described later, there is almost no difference in the jackpot probability between the special figure low probability state and the special figure high probability state, and the special figure fluctuates between the special figure low probability state and the special figure high probability state. The times are configured to vary greatly. In addition, after the jackpot game is completed, the time may be shortened (electric support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than that of the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure fluctuation game to the start of the next big hit. It refers to the state. The time saving will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as “normal figure probability change”), and the state not in the normal time saving state is referred to as a normal figure low probability state. In this way, the electric support state (time saving state) is started on condition that the jackpot game is completed. Strictly speaking, the "electric support state" is a state related to a normal figure, and the "time saving state" is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a normal figure and a special figure. A time saving flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is in the normal high probability state. In the high probability state of the normal map, it is easier to win the variable game of the normal map than in the low probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). For example, the winning probability of the normal figure variable game is 0/100 (that is, it is always out of order) in the normal figure low probability state (non-electric support state), whereas the normal figure high probability state (electric support state). ) Increases to 100/100 (that is, it always hits). In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation game is shorter in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (normal map variation and shortness). For example, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 231a of the special drawing 1 start port (bottom) 231 tends to be longer than in the non-electric support state (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew opening period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the blade member 231a is more likely to open than in the non-electric support state (the number of times the electric chew is opened increases). For example, the blade member 231a, which opens only once in the non-electric support state for each winning of the normal drawing start port 228, opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and closes for 2 seconds again). Open). By extending the electric chew opening period and increasing the number of times the electric chew is opened, the probability of entering the special figure 1 starting port (bottom) 231 increases. The time saving flag is set to off during the jackpot game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the jackpot game. This is because the game balls are picked up by the electric chew with a small number of prize balls, especially in the big hit game, and the first variable winning opening 234a or the second variable winning opening 235a (these variable winning openings may be called "attacker"). This is because if the number of prizes for the game ball to (.) Is reduced, the player may be disadvantaged. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (time saving state), the probability change of the normal figure, the change of the normal figure, the extension of the opening period of the electric chew, and the increase of the number of times of opening the electric chew are all performed, but at least of these. If any one of them is performed, the player's advantage will be high, and the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. Alternatively, if either the extension of the electric chew opening period or the increase in the number of times of opening the electric chew is performed, the probability of entering the special figure 1 starting port (bottom) 231 increases, the electric support state (time saving state) is established. May be good. In the non-electric support state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special drawing 1 starting port (bottom) 231 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 1 starting port (bottom) 231 changes into a winning difficult state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and a winning easy state in which the game ball is easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 1 starting port (bottom) 231 is in a state where it is easy to win a prize for a longer period of time in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when "Special Figure A" is stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained for 50 times of the special figure variable game after the end of the big hit game to be performed thereafter, and the electric support state is maintained at the 51st time. It shifts to the support state (low probability state in the normal figure). On the other hand, when a big hit without electric support (“Special Figure B”) is won, the state does not shift to the electric support state after the big hit game is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the "special figure A" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is completed. Further, when the "special figure B" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the big hit game is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure C" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 6B shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. In FIG. 6B, eight types of special figures from "special figure a" to "special figure h" are shown, and five kinds of special figures are jackpot symbols ("special figure a" to "special figure h"). Figure e "). "Special figure a" is a 6R normal jackpot symbol, and when "special figure a" is stopped and displayed, the first variable winning opening 234a shifts to a jackpot game state in which it opens in all rounds, and the jackpot game ends. After that, the control state becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. In addition, "special figure b" is a 6R probability variation big hit symbol, and when "special figure b" is stopped and displayed, the first variable winning opening 234a shifts to a big hit game state in which it opens in all rounds, and the big hit game ends. After that, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. Further, "special figure c" is a 3R probability variation big hit symbol, which is a real 1R big hit that can be expected to get a ball in one of the three rounds, and when "special figure c" is stopped and displayed. The second variable winning opening 235a shifts to the jackpot game state in which it is opened in all rounds, and after the jackpot game is completed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. In addition, "special figure d" is a 6R probability variation big hit symbol, which is a big hit that can be expected to get a ball in all of the 6 rounds, and when "special figure d" is stopped and displayed, the second After the variable winning opening 235a shifts to the jackpot game state in which the variable winning opening 235a is opened in all rounds and the jackpot game is completed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. In addition, "special figure e" is a 10R probability variation big hit symbol, which is a big hit that can be expected to get a ball in all of the 10 rounds, and when "special figure e" is stopped and displayed, the second After the variable winning opening 235a shifts to the jackpot game state in which the variable winning opening 235a is opened in all rounds and the jackpot game is completed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the big hit symbol, two types of stop symbols (“special symbol f” and “special symbol g”) are prepared as small hit symbols. If a small hit is made with "Special Figure f", the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a opens only once for 0.06 seconds after the symbol is stopped, and if a small hit is made with "Special Figure g". After the symbol is stopped, the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a opens for 0.06 seconds 12 times. That is, more game balls are more likely to enter the second variable winning opening 235a when a small hit is made with the "special figure g" than when a small hit is made with the "special figure f". You can get balls. The opening time and the number of times of opening the shutter member 2351a can be appropriately set. Further, there may be one type of small hit symbol. Further, in the small hit game, when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) are entered into the second variable winning opening 235a, or when a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) is acquired, the small hit game is performed. The hit game is completed, and the shutter member 2351a is not opened after that. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game ends, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game.

In the present embodiment, as described above, since the machine is a simultaneous variable machine, there may be a situation in which the special figure 1 is displaying the fluctuation when the special figure 2 becomes a small hit and the game shifts to the small hit game. .. In this case, when a small hit occurs in Special Figure 2, the variation display of Special Figure 1 is interrupted, and when the small hit game related to the small hit ends, the variation display of Special Figure 1 is restarted. In addition, when special figure 1 becomes a big hit and shifts to a big hit game, special figure 2 is in a variable display, or when special figure 2 becomes a big hit and shifts to a big hit game, special figure 1 changes and displays. In this case, if one special figure becomes a big hit, the variation display of the other special map is forcibly terminated, the result of the variation display is discarded, and the result of the deviation is displayed. It will be.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure h" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 6C shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 types of decorative patterns of the present embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". The ball has won a prize in the special figure 1 start port (top) 230, the special figure 1 start port (bottom) or the special figure 2 start port 232, that is, the special figure 1 start port (top) 230 or the special figure 1 start port ( Decorative on condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the lower), or the second start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 2 start port 232. In each of the symbol display areas of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the symbol display device 208, "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... In some cases, "variable display of decorative symbols" is performed, in which the display is switched in the order of "9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variablely displays the decorative symbol separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, in the normal game state and the electric support state in which the special figure 1 is mainly changed, the decorative symbol is changed in accordance with the changed display of the special figure 1, and the special figure 2 is mainly used. In the probabilistic state in which the variation display is performed, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in accordance with the variation display of the special figure 2. On the other hand, in the normal game state and the electric support state, even if the variation display of the special figure 2 is performed, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not performed, and the symbol variation display is performed only on the fourth symbol and the second special symbol display device 214, which will be described later. In the probabilistic state, even if the variation display of the special figure 1 is performed, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not performed, and the symbol variation display is performed only on the fourth symbol and the first special symbol display device 212.

A mode other than the case where the first special figure display device 212 confirms and notifies the 6R probability variation jackpot in the normal game state or the electric support state, and the case where the second special figure display device 214 confirms and notifies that the 10R probability variation jackpot is in the probability variation state. In the case of notifying a big hit or a small hit, 3 decorative symbols having the same numbers other than "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" and "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" are placed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of a series of decorative patterns (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1", "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4", etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, when a 6R probability variation jackpot (“special figure B”) is definitely notified by the first special figure display device 212 in the normal game state or the electric support state, the 10R probability variation jackpot (“special figure B”) is confirmed by the second special figure display device 214 in the probability variation state. In the case of confirming that it is "special figure e"), "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Further, in the case of notifying the lost symbol of "special symbol C" or "special symbol h", a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of decorative symbols described above (for example, dispersal) is provided in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Eye) is stopped and displayed.

Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of this "variable display of the decorative symbol" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol is the variable display of the decorative symbol (in the case of "decorative symbol variable display"). There is also.). The variable display of the decorative symbol is performed by being controlled by the second sub-control unit 500.

FIG. 6D shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the normal drawing. There are two types of stop display modes of the normal figure of the present embodiment: a hit symbol "Public figure A" and a missed symbol "Public figure B". Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the sphere start port 228, the sphere display device 210 alternately lights two LEDs arranged one above the other. Perform "variable display" (normal map variable game). Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the hit symbols "Fu-zu A" and the out-of-order symbol "Fu-zu B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 6D, the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the lamp to be turned off, and the black portion indicates the location of the lamp to be turned on.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "variation display of the normal map" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the normal map may be referred to as the variable display of the normal map.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 5 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 5 stores a special figure random value, a special figure round determination random value, a special figure electric support determination random value, a special symbol symbol determination random value, and the like. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter that generates these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, the random value of winning special figures, the results of various determinations (lottery), and the like. Hereinafter, the area in the RAM 308 for storing the reserved number of special figures may be referred to as a reserved number storage area for special figures. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a start information storage unit for special figures divided into a maximum number of areas (4 in this example) in which the start of the winning / failing determination (lottery) can be suspended. A random value storage area for ordinary drawings is also provided. As will be described later, in the start information storage unit for the special figure, a plurality of types of start information are set as one set, and these start information are stored in each set in the winning order (holding order) for each area.

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 5 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset-starts by reset interruption and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 7 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

In step S101, the initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 308 are set, and the WDT 314 is set. Permission to operate and set initial values. In this embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT314 as an initial value.

In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the voltage monitoring circuit 338. Monitors whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power interruption), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power interruption), the step returns to step S103. Proceed to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, the initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for setting a cycle for executing the timer interrupt process of the main control unit described later in the timer circuit 312 in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, etc.) A process for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off), and when the state before the power is cut off is not returned (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to the processing after step S113 in order to execute the initialization processing.

If it is not determined that the state before the power failure is restored (step S109; No), the cause is whether the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 2 is operated by a clerk of a game store or the like. Whether or not it is determined (step S113). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 is operated is ON (indicating that the operation has been performed). When it is determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; Yes), it is determined whether or not the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side (step S115), and the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side. If it is determined that the case is true (step S115; Yes), the setting change process is executed (step S117).

When the setting change process is executed, the 7-segment corresponding to the setting monitor on the accessory ratio / setting display 196 blinks indicating "1", indicating that the setting can be changed. In this state, each time the setting change button 194 is pressed, the 7-segment of the setting monitor is incremented, and the setting change button 194 is pressed while the 7-segment corresponding to the setting monitor indicates "6". Then, it returns to "1". In the present embodiment, at least one of settings 1 to 6 having different jackpot probabilities can be selected, and the setting is made by operating the setting change key 192 to the OFF side after changing to the desired setting. Is confirmed. At this time, the setting value displayed on the setting monitor is deleted. After that, after the setting is confirmed, the set value can be redisplayed on the setting monitor for a certain period of time (for example, 5 seconds) by operating the setting change button 194. In the present embodiment, the set value is displayed on the setting monitor of the accessory ratio / setting display 196, but for example, it may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or notified by voice output. Good. Further, in the present embodiment, the 6-step setting of settings 1 to 6 is set, but the setting may be other than the 6-step setting, or the setting may not be changed. Further, in the present embodiment, the initial value of the setting displayed on the setting monitor is set to "1", but the setting value before the power is cut off is retained and the retained setting value is displayed. May be good.

Further, in step S113, when it is not determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; No), or when it is not determined in step S115 that the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side (step S113; No). Step S115; No), the process proceeds to step S119 without executing the setting change process of step S117.

In step S119, the initialization process is executed so as to bring the basic circuit 302 into the initial state (step S119). Here, when the RAM clear signal is ON, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and when the power status information is not the information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 (for example,). A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (all areas) to a register having a 1-byte structure whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0). Is determined (whether the checksum result is normal or not), and when the checksum result is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is abnormal). Executes the initialization process to bring the pachinko machine 100 into the initial state. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition is set, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (this setting), and all the storage areas of the RAM 308 are initialized. In the present embodiment, the set value set in the setting change process (step S117) is retained even when the initialization is performed. Further, here, a normal return command and a setting command indicating the setting selected in step S117 are set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S119) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and is the same as the power recovery command described later in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. , Is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S121, after setting the interrupt prohibition, the basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number value counter are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the normal figure winning random number value provided in RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S121 except during the timer interrupt process that starts at a predetermined cycle.

On the other hand, in step S111, the power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 is read at the time of power interruption, and the stack pointer is reset (this setting). Further, when the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and after resetting to each register, the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the resetting, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S121) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 2 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In this step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the state has returned to the state when the power was turned off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 5 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 4 ms in the present embodiment), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Part timer interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT314 is periodically (this) so that the WDT interrupt does not occur when the count value of the WDT314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) (so that a processing abnormality is not detected). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the main control unit timer.

In step S205, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 5, including various ball detection sensors, are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various types are sent to the RAM 308. It is stored in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt processing (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. It is read from the previous detection signal storage area provided in the area, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the detection signal storage area before the previous time, which is divided for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before). ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area this time.

Further, in step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, and each of them is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeats activation at a very short interval of about 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 5 stores prize determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. When it matches with (information indicating that), the general winning opening 226a, the first variable winning opening 234a, the second variable winning opening 235a, the first special drawing start opening (top) 230, and the first special drawing starting opening (upper) Bottom) It is determined that the ball has entered 231 and the second special figure start port 232, or has passed through the normal figure start port 228 or the jackpot generation gate 252. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 234a, 235a, 226a and the starting openings 230, 231,232, 228, 252 have been won. For example, when the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the first start port (top) sensor that detects the entry of the ball into the first special figure start port (top) 230 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information. Determined that the first special figure start port (top) 230 had a prize, that is, the game medium passing through the predetermined area was detected, and the winning of the first special figure start port (top) 230 thereafter. Processing is performed, but if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the processing associated with the subsequent winning of the first special figure start port (top) 230 is performed. Branch to the subsequent processing without performing. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there was a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

In step S207 and step S209, the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S121 is updated, and then the normal number winning random number value and the normal figure winning random number value used by the main control unit 300 are used. The random number counter for generating each special figure random number value is updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the normal figure winning random number value provided in RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has gone around as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a random number winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 99, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the random number counter for generating the initial value corresponding to the random number counter for generating the winning random number, and the value is obtained as the initial value. In addition to setting the random number counter for generating the winning random number value, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next. I will do it. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the winning random number of the normal figure has made one round, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for this purpose.

In step S211 the effect random number update process is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, the timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for measuring the time for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210 in a fluctuating / stop manner. Various types including a special symbol display symbol update timer for timing the fluctuation / stop display time, a timer for timing a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined open time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

In step S215, the winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a prize in the winning openings 234a, 235a, 226a and the starting openings 230, 231, 232, the number of prize balls provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening is stored. The value of the area is read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

Further, in step S217, the winning prize acceptance process is performed. In the prize reception process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of start information are acquired. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in a vacant area of the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 according to the winning order (holding order).

In step S219, which is executed following step S217, the payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 5 are composed of 1 byte, and the strobe information (when on, it indicates that the data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this time processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 encrypted. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is shown.

In step S221, the normal map state update process is performed. This normal map state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state. For example, in the normal figure state update process in the middle of the normal figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned normal figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the two LEDs constituting the normal symbol display device 210 blink alternately. Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of the normal map (normal map variable game).

In addition, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the normal figure fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the normal figure display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the two LEDs constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is performed so as to be a mode, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so as to display a lost symbol. The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the two LEDs is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal drawing stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the hit symbol (normal symbol A shown in FIG. 6 (d)) and the lost symbol (normal symbol B shown in FIG. 6 (d)). Display. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the confirmed and displayed symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

If the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on, as will be described later. When this normal figure hit flag is on, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 The blade member 231a is set to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the blade member 231a of the first special figure start port (bottom) 231 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) while setting the normal drawing operation in the setting area. Is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 231a in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for driving the opening / closing of the blade member 231a, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be inactive. To do. Further, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a loss, the normal map loss flag is turned on as described later. When this normal figure loss flag is on, even in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). Set the setting area of the RAM 308 to be inactive. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, the drawing-related lottery process is performed. In this normal figure-related lottery process, the normal figure fluctuation game and the opening / closing control of the first special figure start port (bottom) 231 are not performed (the state of the normal figure is not operating), and the normal figure is on hold. When the number of fluctuating games is 1 or more, the result of the fluctuating game is won or not won by the random number lottery based on the random number value stored in the above-mentioned random number storage area. A hit determination is made to determine whether or not, and if a winner is to be won, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of unsuccessful, set the hit flag to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and the normal figure display device 210 is used from among a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired normal figure timer random number value. One time for variable display of the figure is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the normal figure fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal figure fluctuation display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved normal figure variable games is stored in the normal figure reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit determination is made, the number of reserved normal figure variable games is calculated. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this reserved number storage area. Also, the random value used for the hit judgment is deleted.

Subsequently, the special figure look-ahead process (step S224) is executed. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol and the fluctuation time before the hit / fail determination process, and predetermines. The result (special figure look-ahead result) is stored in the look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308.

Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following plurality of processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), a predetermined one of the eight LEDs constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is specified. The on / off drive control is performed by repeating the on / off of the LED. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated. Further, if the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 10R jackpot flag, a 6R jackpot flag, a 3R jackpot flag, a small hit flag, a missed flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. .. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, the 10R jackpot flag is on, and the special figure When the probability fluctuation flag is also on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure e and 6R jackpot flags shown in FIG. 6B are on, the special figure probability change flag is also on, and the normal figure probability change flag is off. In the case of either special figure b or special figure d, the 6R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure a and 3R jackpot flag are on, special If the figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is off, special figure c, if the small hit flag is on, either special figure f or special figure g, or if the loss flag is on, The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the LEDs constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is performed so as to be in each mode of the special figure h, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to indicate that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has a 10R probability variation jackpot symbol (special symbol e), a 6R probability variation jackpot symbol (special diagram b, special diagram d), and a 3R probability variation jackpot symbol (special diagram c), 6R. Usually, one of the big hit symbol (special symbol a), the small hit symbol (special symbol f, special symbol g), and the lost symbol (special symbol h) is fixedly displayed. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, which is a simultaneous fluctuation machine, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 may be performed during the fluctuation display of the special figure 2, but the fluctuation display time of the special figure 2 has elapsed. If the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing, the lottery result is discarded and the missed symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing of the jackpot symbol display of special figure 2, regardless of the lottery result of special figure 1. Will be done. Further, when the variation display of the special figure 1 is performed during the variation display of the special figure 2, and the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing when the variation display time of the special figure 2 elapses, the special figure 2 is displayed. The progress of the variation display time of the special figure 1 is interrupted at the timing of the small hit symbol display of, and as a result, from the start of the variation display of the special figure 1 until the symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed. The time is extended by the time from the stop display of the small hit symbol of Special Figure 2 to the end of the small hit game.

After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Further, if the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 0 and the time reduction flag is on, the time reduction flag is turned off. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, in FIG. 2, a symbol for additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area and stopping the variable display is shown in The special figure 2 identification information indicating that the information exists is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit standby state is set in order to wait for the passing of the game ball to the big hit generation gate 252. In the present embodiment, no big hit is generated and no expiration date is set from the time when the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol until the game ball passes through the big hit generation gate 252. If the game ball does not pass through the jackpot generation gate 252 by the time when a predetermined period (for example, 5 minutes or the like) elapses after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot may disappear.

When the game ball passes through the jackpot generation gate 252, the jackpot flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process, the special figure 2 is set to the setting area of the RAM 308, and a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208. In order to wait for a period during which the image for notifying the player to start is displayed, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or the door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a (until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the first variable winning opening 234a or the second variable winning opening 235a) (second variable winning opening). A signal for holding the door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) in the open state is output to the solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for driving the opening / closing of the shutter member 2351a of 235a, and the door opening time management provided in the RAM 308 is managed. Set the information indicating the open period in the storage area of the timer. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) The door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) is closed to the solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening / closing the door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a (the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a). The signal to be held is output, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (10 rounds, 6 rounds or 3 rounds in this example embodiment) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example). (3 seconds), that is, the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to be set to wait for the period during which the image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished is displayed. Set the information indicating the production waiting period in. In the present embodiment, if the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, the time reduction number of times (for example, 50 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction number is set. Turn on the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308. If the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to off, the time reduction number of times is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on. If the special figure probability fluctuation flag is set to on, the probability variation flag provided in the RAM 308 is turned on at the same time as the end of the big hit game.

The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. When the time saving flag is set to on, it is a high probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). In the high-probability state of the normal figure, the probability of winning in the variable game of the normal figure is higher than in the low-probability state of the normal figure. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal-figure variable game is shorter in the normal-figure high-probability state than in the normal-figure low-probability state (normal-figure variation). Further, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 231a of the special drawing 1 starting port (bottom) 231 tends to be longer than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing (electric chew spread). .. In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the pair of blade members 231a are more likely to open than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing. The state in which any of these normal figure probability change, normal figure change short, and electric chew spread is set is called the electric support (starting mouth winning support by electric tulip) state.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the low probability state of the normal figure is maintained. This is because if the probability is high during the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are entered into the first variable winning opening 234a (second variable winning opening 235a) during the big hit game. Fig. 1 There is a problem that many game balls enter the start port (bottom) 231 and the number of game balls (number of balls to be ejected) that can be acquired during the big hit increases, resulting in increased gambling. , To solve this. In the present embodiment, since the number of prize balls for winning the special figure 1 starting port (bottom) 231 is "1", the number of balls to be ejected during the big hit game does not substantially increase, so that the big hit You may leave the time saving flag on even during the game.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out of place flag is turned on. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 non-operating is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for the special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, one of the following plurality of processes is performed according to the state of special figure 1.

For example, in the special figure 1 state update process in the middle of the special figure 1 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), a predetermined one of the eight LEDs constituting the special figure 1 display device 212 is specified. The lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed by repeatedly turning on / off the LED. By performing this control, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs the variable display of special figure 1 (special figure 1 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated. Further, if the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 6R jackpot flag, a missed flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 1 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 1 variation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, the 6R jackpot flag is on, and the special figure The probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure B when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the 6R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the special figure A when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on. When the loss flag is on, the lighting / extinguishing drive control of the LEDs constituting the special figure 1 display device 212 is performed so that each mode of the special figure C is obtained, and the special figure 1 stop display is being displayed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Make settings to indicate that there is. By performing this control, the special figure 1 display device 212 determines any one of the 6R normal jackpot symbol (special figure A), the 6R probability variation jackpot symbol (special figure B), and the lost symbol (special figure C). Display. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, which is a simultaneous fluctuation machine, the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 may be performed during the fluctuation display of the special figure 1, but the fluctuation display time of the special figure 1 has elapsed. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing, the lottery result is discarded and the missed symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing of the jackpot symbol display of special figure 1 regardless of the lottery result of special figure 2. Will be done.

After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 1 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is notified to the player. Further, if the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 0 and the time reduction flag is on, the time reduction flag is turned off. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, in FIG. 1, a symbol for additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the variable display is stopped. The special figure 1 identification information indicating that the information exists is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

Further, if the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, a big hit standby state is set in order to wait for the passing of the game ball to the big hit generation gate 252. In the present embodiment, no big hit is generated and no expiration date is set from the time when the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol until the game ball passes through the big hit generation gate 252. If the game ball does not pass through the jackpot generation gate 252 by the time when a predetermined period (for example, 5 minutes or the like) elapses after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot may disappear.

When the game ball passes through the jackpot generation gate 252, the jackpot flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 1 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In order to set the area to be in operation of the special figure 1 and to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period of displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. In the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating the winning effect period is set. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, a solenoid for opening / closing the door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a (a part of various solenoids 332) until a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are won in the first variable winning opening 234a. ), A signal for holding the door member 2341a in the open state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 2341a in the closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening / closing the door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a, and the door closing time is managed in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating the closure period in the storage area of the timer. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 1 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (6 rounds in this example embodiment) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a decorative symbol The effect waiting period is shown in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set the player to wait for the period during which the image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the display device 208 is to be completed is displayed. Set the information. In the present embodiment, if the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the time saving number (for example, 50 times) is set in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 at the same time as the end of the big hit game, and the RAM 308 is set. Turn on the time saving flag provided in. If the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to off, the time reduction number of times is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on. If the special figure probability fluctuation flag is set to on, the probability variation flag provided in the RAM 308 is turned on at the same time as the end of the big hit game.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 1 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

Further, if the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order, the out of place flag is turned on. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 1 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 non-operating is set. In the special figure 1 state update process in the case where the special figure 1 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S229 without doing anything.

When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure-related lottery process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery process) is performed first (step S229), and then the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process). ) (Step S231). In the special figure 2 related lottery process, the variable game of special figure 2 is not performed, the state of special figure 2 is inactive, neither the big hit game of special figure 1 nor special figure 2 is in progress, and the lottery process is suspended. It is executed using the earliest special figure 2 winning random value and special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random value storage area on the condition that the number of special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more. .. In the special figure 1 related lottery process, the variable game of special figure 1 is not performed, the state of special figure 1 is inactive, neither the big hit game of special figure 1 nor special figure 2 is in progress, and the lottery process is held. It is executed using the earliest special figure 1 winning random value and the special figure 1 random value in the special figure 1 random value storage area on the condition that the number of special figure 1 variable games is 1 or more. .. That is, in the present embodiment, the special figure 1 can start the variable game regardless of whether or not the special figure 2 is in the variable game, and in the special figure 2, the special figure 1 is in the variable game. It is configured so that a variable game can be started regardless of the presence or absence (simultaneous variable machine).

The notification of the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure variation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and in the present embodiment, in the probabilistic state, the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won. The notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the lottery is given priority over the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting port (top) 230 and the special figure 1 starting port (bottom). In the time saving state, the notification of the lottery result based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting port (top) 230 and the special drawing 1 starting port (bottom) 231 is notified of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232. It is given priority over the notification of the lottery result. However, if the lottery result of the special figure 1 variable game in the probabilistic state becomes a big hit, the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 start port 232 is notified, or once the special figure 2 is started. The notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the mouth 232 is interrupted, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting port (top) 230 and the special figure 1 starting port (bottom) 231 is executed. May occur. In addition, when the lottery result of the special figure 2 variable game in the normal game state and the time saving state is a big hit, a lottery based on winning a prize in the special figure 1 starting port (top) 230 and the special figure 1 starting port (bottom) 231. In parallel with the notification of the lottery result of, or by interrupting the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 start port (top) 230 and the special figure 1 start port (bottom) 231 to start special figure 2. Notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the mouth 232 may be executed.

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 start information) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. (Fig. 2 Winning random number value and special figure 2 set of random value) is acquired, and ROM 306 is based on the acquired special figure 2 winning random value in the start information and the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag in RAM 308. The hit / fail judgment table stored in is used to determine whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a miss (hit / fail judgment). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined hit / fail determination result, etc. The symbol to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display (stop symbol) is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / fail determination result, the stop symbol, the number of special figures 2 held at the time of the hit / fail determination, the acquired random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time, and the like. The variation display time (timer number) of Special Figure 2 is determined using various tables.

After extracting the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, and at the same time, FIG. 2 Special figure 2 of the reserved number storage area The reserved number is subtracted by 1. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is made based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above description, the above-mentioned special figure state update process and special figure-related lottery process are performed independently for special figure 1 and special figure 2, so that a plurality of special figures can be changed at the same time. It is not limited to the above, and the lottery process or the variable game regarding the holding of the other special figure may not be performed according to the state of one special figure. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, in the normal game state and the time saving state, the decorative symbol display device 208 is made to perform the effect display according to the variable display of the special figure 1. On the other hand, the effect display is not performed for the variable display of the special figure 2, and in the probabilistic state, the decorative symbol display device 208 is made to perform the effect display according to the variable display of the special figure 2, while the variable display of the special figure 1 is performed. Although the effect display is performed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure, or a plurality of decorative symbol display devices for displaying the lottery results of each special figure. May be provided and each lottery result may be displayed separately. Further, when the fluctuations related to a plurality of special figures are performed at the same time, the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped later.

In step S233 following step S231, the command setting transmission process is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, the bits 15 are strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), and the bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (In this example, the basic command, winning opening winning command, out ball command, launch position command, special figure fluctuation start command, special figure fluctuation stop command, special figure stop type command (special figure 1 and special figure 2) A command sent at the start of fluctuation, which specifies whether either special figure 1 or special figure 2 is stopped and displayed first), game state command, special figure hit start command, big hit generation gate valid start command , Special figure hit end command, big prize opening open command, big hit round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, look-ahead result information command, setting command, etc.), Bits 0 to 10 It consists of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-mentioned command transmission process. In addition, if the command type is a special figure fluctuation start command, the command data includes information indicating various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, timer numbers selected in the special figure related lottery process, and the like. In the form, when the special symbol variation start command is set, the stop symbol information that can specify the stop symbol is included. In the case of the special figure fluctuation stop command, the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, etc. are included, and in the case of the command for specifying the number of big hit rounds, the number of big hit rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not the special figure 1 start port (top) 230 has won a prize, whether or not special figure 1 start port (bottom) 231 has won a prize, and special figure 2 start. This includes the presence / absence of a prize in the mouth 232, the presence / absence of a prize in the first variable winning mouth 234a, the presence / absence of a prize in the second variable winning mouth 235a, and the like. In the case of the pre-reading result information command, the command data includes information such as the types of special figures 1 and 2, the number of pre-reading stored in the pre-reading number storage area, and the stop symbol stored in the pre-reading result storage unit. If it is a setting command, it includes setting information.

Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the command data is selected by the various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flag values, special figure 1 related lottery process, and special figure 2 related lottery process stored in the RAM 308. Set the timer number, the information indicating the number of the reserved special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game, and the like. In the above-mentioned rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and the reserved special figure. 1 Variable game or special figure 2 Set information indicating the number of variable games. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the reserved special figure. 1 Variable game or special figure 2 Set information indicating the number of variable games. In the above-mentioned large winning opening opening setting transmission process, information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, and the like are set in the command data. In the above-mentioned large winning opening closing setting transmission process, information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, and the like are set in the command data.

Further, in this step S233, the general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) and notice information (advance notice information, false notice information) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data. Either advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the effect control content can be determined.

In step S235 following step S233, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100, via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower plate full tank error is monitored. .. When a front frame door opening error or a lower plate full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full tank error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the normal figure display device 210 and the special figure 1 display device 212 are controlled via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. , The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, the timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 7 is performed. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power interruption at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power interruption processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the HALT state is reached.

Next, it is used in the general drawing-related lottery process (step S223), the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The determination table will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 9A is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether or not the normal figure is correct, and FIG. 9B is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining whether or not the special figures 1 and 2 are correct. Yes, FIG. 9C is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special drawing determination sorting table.

The normal figure hit / miss determination table shown in FIG. 9A is a normal figure hit / miss determination table used at the time of the normal figure hit / miss determination. This table is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. As shown in FIG. 9A, when this hit / fail determination table is used, there is no hit value in the low probability state of the normal figure, that is, the probability of hit is 0%, and the normal figure is shown. In the high probability state, the range in which random numbers can be taken is 0 to 65535, and the winning value is 0 to 65535. That is, the probability of winning is 65536/65536 (that is, 100%). In the low probability state of the normal map (when the time is not activated), the hit may be made with a certain probability (for example, 1%), and in the high probability state of the normal figure (when the time is shortened), it is constant. The probability of (for example, 1%) may be different.

The special figure 1 and 2 hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 9 (b) is a table referred to when the hit / fail judgment of the special figures 1 and 2 is performed, and which of the settings 1 to 6 is used. Select the record to be referenced depending on whether it is in the special figure low probability state or the special figure high probability state. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

In the special figure low probability state of setting 1, the big hit is selected with a probability of 329/65536 (about 1/200) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 330/65536 (about / 199).

In the special figure low probability state of setting 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 341/65536 (about 1/193) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 342/65536 (about / 192).

In the special figure low probability state of setting 3, the big hit is selected with a probability of 363/655536 (about 1/181) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability (about / 180) of 364/65536.

In the special figure low probability state of setting 4, the big hit is selected with a probability of 375/65536 (about 1/175) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figures 1 and 2, and in the special figure high probability state, As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of special figures 1 and 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 377/65536 (about / 174).

In the special figure low probability state of setting 5, the big hit is selected with a probability of 451/65536 (about 1/146) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figures 1 and 2, and in the special figure high probability state, the big hit is selected. As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 452/65536 (about / 145).

In the special figure low probability state of setting 6, a big hit is selected with a probability of 701/65536 (about 1/94) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery of special figures 1 and 2, and in the special figure high probability state, the big hit is selected. As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 703/65536 (about / 93).

Further, regardless of any of the settings 1 to 6, and regardless of whether the special figure is in the high probability state or the special figure low probability state, the small hit is selected as the result of the winning / failing judgment of the big hit lottery in the special figure 1. As a result of the winning / failing determination of the big hit lottery of Special Figure 2, the small hit is selected with a probability of 6580/65536 (about 1/10). It should be noted that the small hit may be generated in the special figure 1. Further, the probability of a small hit may be made different for each setting.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in any of the settings 1 to 6, the jackpot probability in the special figure high probability state is slightly higher than the jackpot probability in the special figure low probability state, but it is equated with almost the same probability. It is set to be profitable. Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability differs depending on the setting, and the higher the setting, the easier the jackpot is, and the lower the setting, the more difficult the jackpot is. Therefore, the lower the setting, the less likely it is to be a big hit, but when shifting to the probabilistic state, the number of small hits tends to occur more than in the high setting, and it may be possible to have different game characteristics.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot probability is set to be almost the same in the special figure high probability state and the special figure low probability state in any of the settings, but the major difference is the variation display time of special figure 2. Be done. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 in the special figure high probability state is selected, for example, from 1 to 5 seconds. Therefore, in the special figure high probability state, as described above, when a right-handed hit is made, a large number of game balls can easily enter the second special figure start opening 232, so that the variation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. A large number can be performed, and as a result, the frequency of small hits increases. In the present embodiment, it can be said that the frequency of small hits increases in the special figure high probability state, so it may be called "small hit rush". In addition, in a state where the number of reserved symbol variation displays of special figure 2 is four (full tank), the time required to digest all the symbol variation displays of special figure 2 is longer than the time required for one special figure 1. Since it takes longer to digest the symbol variation display, it is less likely that a big hit will occur in Special Figure 1. On the other hand, as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 in the special figure low probability state, for example, the fluctuation time of 580 seconds is selected. Therefore, in the special figure low probability state, if you hit right, the frequency of entering the special figure 2 start port 232 and the small hit probability do not change, but the time until the result of the fluctuation display of special figure 2 is displayed is approximately. Since it is every 10 minutes, even if you hit right, it is practically disadvantageous for the player. The fluctuation time of the special figure 2 in the special figure low probability state is set to 580 seconds for the miss and the small hit, but the fluctuation time for the big hit is shorter than that, for example. It is set to 227 seconds.

FIG. 9C shows an example of a distribution table for determining a special figure, and as described above, a stop symbol is determined based on the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 or 2 is correct or not. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In this special figure determination distribution table, a random number range corresponding to the stop symbol mode of the special figure (see FIGS. 6A and 6B) is defined for each hit / fail determination result.

First, if the result of the special figure 1 hit / fail determination is a big hit, either "special figure A" or "special figure B" is selected. As described above, "Special Figure A" is a 6R normal jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234a, and "Special Figure B" is a 6R probability variable jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 243a. Each selection rate is 1/2 regardless of the setting.

Next, if the result of the special figure 2 hit / fail determination is a big hit, any one of "special figure a" to "special figure e" is selected. As described above, "special figure a" is a 6R normal jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234a, and "special figure b" is a 6R probability variable jackpot opened by the first variable winning opening 234a. "Special figure c" is a 3R probability variation jackpot opened by the second variable winning opening 235a (2R of the 3Rs is a substantial 1R probability variation jackpot because the second variable winning opening 235a opens shortly), and "special figure d" , The 6R probability variation jackpot opened by the second variable winning opening 235a, and "Special Figure e" is the 10R probability variation jackpot opened by the second variable winning opening 235a. Regardless of the setting, each selection rate is 50/100 for "special figure a", 2/100 for "special figure b", 20/100 for "special figure c", and 3/100 for "special figure d". "Special figure e" is 25/100.

If the result of the special figure 2 hit / fail determination is a small hit, either one of "special figure f" and "special figure g" is selected. As described above, the "special figure f" is a small hit in which the second variable winning opening 235a is opened once, and the "special figure g" is a small hit in which the second variable winning opening 235a is opened 12 times at the maximum. It is a small hit that repeats. In the small hit, the opening time of the second variable winning opening 235a is as short as 0.06 seconds, but as described above, the game ball rolling on the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a stays. Since the structure is easy to use, it is possible to insert a plurality of game balls by opening and closing the shutter member 2351a once. Therefore, in the special figure probability variation state, it may be possible to increase the number of balls to be ejected between large hits by generating a large number of small hits (particularly, small hits in "special figure g").

Further, in the present embodiment, since the big hit in "Special Figure c" is actually a 1R probability variation big hit, when the big hit in "Special Figure c" occurs, the player is made to think that the small hit has occurred. You may be able to.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 10A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S301 of FIG. 10A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. .. In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S309 following step S307, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S311 following step S309, the chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 190 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S309 is converted into the effect data according to the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 190 according to the detection result. Perform the process to change to.

In step S313 following step S311, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S315 following step S313, the lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 442 and 452 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450. To do.

In step S317 following step S315, the movable body control process is performed. For example, if there is an instruction to the effect devices 2 to 5 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S319 following step S317, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, a setting is made to output this control command. After that, the process returns to step S303.

FIG. 10B is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 10C is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S341 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 of the first sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S343 following step S341, the control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S319) of the first sub-control unit main process, and the random value value for other effects is updated. And so on.

Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 11A is a flowchart of the main process executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S401 of FIG. 11A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. .. In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S409 following step S407, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data (effect data by the decorative symbol display device 208) corresponding to this command from the ROM (not shown) is performed to update the effect data. If is necessary, the effect data is updated.

In step S411 following step S409, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is an instruction to VDP516 in the effect data read in step S409, this instruction is output to VDP516 (details will be described later). Then, the process returns to step S403.

FIG. 11B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM.

FIG. 11C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S441 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S403 of the second sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S443, which is next to step S441, other effects such as updating the random value for effect are performed.

FIG. 11D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S411 of the second sub-control unit main process. In step S451, a transfer instruction for image data (movie data and texture data described later) is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing area of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then the image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S453 next to step S451, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP516 has been input, and if the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S453: Yes), the process proceeds to step S455. If not (step S453: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S455, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S451, the CPU 504 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 518, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP516. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S457 following step S455, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S459 following step S457, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 is input based on the end of drawing the image, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input (step S459: Yes), The process proceeds to step S461, and if not (step S459: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S461, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images are generated, is incremented (+1) to end the process.

Next, a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display 196 and the DIP switch board 198 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 12A is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display 196, and FIG. 12B is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the DIP switch board 198. Is.

As described above, the accessory ratio / setting display 196 is configured to have the accessory ratio monitor and the setting monitor, and the accessory ratio monitor includes the continuous accessory ratio (RY) and the accessory ratio ( YH) is displayed, and the setting monitor is displaying the current setting value.

Here, the continuous bonus ratio is due to the operation of the bonus when the bonus is continuously operated among the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired (that is, the first in the big hit game). It refers to the ratio of the number of game balls acquired by opening the variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a and winning a prize. The ratio of the number of game balls acquired by winning the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a to the number of out balls may be used. Further, the bonus ratio is the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired due to the operation of the bonus (that is, the first special figure start opening (bottom) 231 and the first variable winning opening 234a and the first. 2 The ratio of the number of game balls acquired by opening the variable winning opening 235a and winning a prize). The first variable winning opening 234a, the second variable winning opening 235a, the first special drawing starting port (top) 230, the first special drawing starting port (bottom) 231 and the second special drawing starting port 232 with respect to the number of out balls. And may be the ratio of the number of game balls acquired by winning a prize in the general winning opening 226a.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the continuous accessory ratio exceeds 60% as a result of calculating the continuous accessory ratio, the double-digit 7-segment LED displaying the continuous accessory ratio is blinked and then displayed. The security signal (RY) is output to. Here, the security signal (RY) is an error signal output when the continuous accessory ratio exceeds 60%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336. It may be output from a test terminal that can be mounted on the main board 156. As a result, the type application test of the game machine may be smoothly performed.

In addition, when it is determined that the accessory ratio exceeds 70% as a result of calculating the accessory ratio, the double-digit 7-segment LED displaying the accessory ratio is blinked, and then the security signal (YH) is displayed. ) Is output. Here, the security signal (YH) is an error signal output when the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

In the present embodiment, when the continuous accessory ratio or the accessory ratio exceeds the upper limit of the normal value, the predetermined 7-segment LED is blinked, but for example, the emission color is changed. May be good.

As shown in FIG. 12B, eight DIP switches are arranged on the DIP switch board 198. Each DIP switch is connected to the first sub-board 160, and the position of each DIP switch can be read when the power is turned on to change the appearance probability of the effect. For example, the frequency of executing the setting suggestion and the advance notice You can set the appearance rate, the entry rate of the production mode, and so on. Further, in the present embodiment, it is also possible to set whether or not the transition to the power saving mode is possible in the standby state in which the symbol variation display is not performed. When it is set to be able to shift to the power saving mode, for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, one minute has passed without starting the variation effect display of the decorative symbol after the symbol demo started), the power saving mode is set. Transition. The power saving mode is, for example, a decrease in the brightness of the lamp (LED) and / or extinguishing, a decrease in the brightness of the backlight of the LCD, a display indicating that the power saving mode is in effect (for example, a display of the power saving mode shown in FIG. 37C). ) Is performed. It should be noted that the brightness of the lamp (LED) may not be lowered even if the mode is shifted to the power saving mode, the brightness of the backlight of the LCD may not be lowered, or the power saving mode is not displayed. May be. Further, in the power saving mode, a background different from the usual one may be displayed, and in this case, a display indicating that the power saving mode may be displayed may or may not be performed. Further, the conditions for shifting to the power saving mode are not limited to the passage of time, and may be other conditions. Further, when the time until the transition is set as the transition condition to the power saving mode, the time until the transition can be set to an appropriate time. In addition, the time until transition may be variable depending on the setting.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13, an example of the variation display of the special figures 1 and 2 in the pachinko machine 100 configured as described above will be described. Here, FIG. 13A is a timing chart for explaining an example of the operation when the special figure 2 becomes a big hit during the change of the special figure 1, and FIG. 13B is a timing chart during the change of the special figure 1. It is a timing chart explaining an example of operation when special figure 2 becomes a small hit.

As shown in FIG. 13A, the symbol variation display is performed in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. The symbol variation display of the special figure 2 being executed is a symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed. After that, at the timing of t11, the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with the out-of-order symbol, but in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display is continuously performed. When the symbol display time of the special figure 1 (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses and the timing of t12 is reached, one of the reserved symbol variation displays of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is displayed. To be started. It should be noted that the special figure 2 continues to display the symbol variation. After that, when the symbol variation time (for example, 5 seconds) of the special figure 1 elapses and the timing of t13 is reached, the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed as a missed symbol. Even at this time, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is continuously performed. After that, when the symbol display time of the special figure 1 elapses and the timing of t14 is reached, one of the reserved symbol variation displays of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. On the other hand, the symbol variation display of Special Figure 2 is continuously performed. After that, when the symbol fluctuation time of special figure 2 (for example, 227 seconds) elapses and the timing reaches t15, special figure 2 is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, while the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is the remaining symbol variation. Regardless of the time, it ends when the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol, the result of the hit / fail judgment is discarded, and the stop is displayed with the missed symbol. After that, when the symbol display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the special figure 2 elapses and the timing of t16 is reached, the big hit game is started. After that, when the jackpot game ends and the timing of t17 is reached, the symbol variation display of special figure 1 and the symbol variation display of special figure 2 in which the symbol variation display is suspended are digested, respectively, and the symbol variation display of special figure 1 and the symbol variation display are digested. The symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started at the same time.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is displayed in the fluctuation display of one special figure in the simultaneous variable machine, the result of the hit / fail judgment of the other special figure is discarded and the missed symbol is displayed. It has become so. In the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 that is pending when the big hit is made in the special figure 2 includes the symbol variation display that becomes the big hit, the big hit in the special figure 2 is applied. A big hit notice may be given during the big hit game or in the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 which is started after the big hit game is completed.

Next, in the example shown in FIG. 13B, the symbol variation display is performed in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. The symbol variation display of the special figure 2 being executed is a symbol variation display in which the small hit symbol is finally confirmed and displayed. After that, at the timing of t21, the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with the out-of-order symbol, but in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display is continuously performed. When the symbol display time of the special figure 1 (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses and the timing of t22 is reached, one of the reserved symbol variation displays of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is displayed. To be started. It should be noted that the symbol variation display of Special Figure 2 is continuously performed. After that, when the symbol variation time (for example, 580 seconds) of the special figure 2 elapses and the timing of t23 is reached, the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed as a small hit symbol. On the other hand, in the special figure 1, the progress of the symbol variation time is temporarily interrupted at this timing. After that, when the symbol display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the special figure 2 elapses and the timing of t24 is reached, the small hit game is started. Actually, when the symbol display time of the special figure 2 elapses and the game shifts to the small hit game state, the game shifts to the small hit game after waiting for the small hit start wait time (for example, 0.5 seconds). Strictly speaking, after the symbol display time of the special figure 2 is set at the timing of t23, the timer subtraction of the symbol display time of the special figure 2 is started in the next main control unit timer interrupt process. After that, when the small hit game is completed and the timing is t25, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 in which the symbol variation display is suspended is digested, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started. In reality, when the small hit game ends, the small hit game state ends after a standby state of the small hit end wait time (for example, 0.5 seconds). On the other hand, in the special figure 1, at this timing, the progress of the suspended symbol fluctuation time resumes. After that, when the symbol variation time (for example, 5 seconds) of the special figure 1 elapses and the timing of t26 is reached, the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed as a missed symbol. In the present embodiment, since the progress of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is interrupted during the period of the small hit game due to the occurrence of the small hit of the special figure 2, from the start to the end of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1. The actual time taken is longer than the predetermined symbol fluctuation time (5 seconds), and more specifically, the small hit game related to the small hit ends after the small hit occurs in the special figure 2. The time taken up to (interruption period) is added. That is, if the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 was out of order, the symbol variation time of the special figure 1 should have arrived at the timing of t26', but a small hit occurred. As a result, the result of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 has been postponed until the timing of t26. The symbol of special figure 1 is stopped and displayed at the timing of t26, and then when the symbol display time of special figure 1 (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses and the timing of t27 is reached, the symbol variation display is suspended. The symbol variation display of FIG. 1 is digested, and the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started. On the other hand, in Special Figure 2, the symbol variation display is continuously performed. In the present embodiment, after the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the special figure 2 and the symbol display time elapses, the game shifts to the small hit game state, and the predetermined small hit start wait time after the small hit game state starts. The small hit game starts after the lapse of time, and the small hit game state ends when the small hit end wait time elapses after the small hit game ends. Either one of the small hit end wait times may not be provided, or both may not be provided.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the small hit symbol is displayed in the fluctuation display of one special figure in the simultaneous variable machine, the progress of the symbol variation display of the other special figure is temporarily stopped, and the small hit When the game is over, the progress is restarted.

In this embodiment, an example of operating in the manner described above has been introduced. For example, the hit symbol (big hit symbol, small hit symbol) stop> stop display weight (for example, 0.5 seconds)> hit (big hit, small hit). Hit) Start weight (For example, 0.1 seconds for a small hit, several tens of seconds for a big hit (however, it may differ depending on whether it is the first hit or not).)> During a big hit game or during a small hit game> Hit (big hit) , Small hit) End weight (For example, 0.1 seconds for small hits, several tens of seconds for big hits (however, it may differ depending on whether it is the first hit or not).)> A series of symbol variation display start. The operation may be performed. Here, "~ start weight" and "~ end weight" may be expressed as "~ interval", and the hit start effect and the hit end effect are performed at this time.

Further, in the present embodiment, if a small hit is made in the special figure 2 during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the progress of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is interrupted, but the symbol is stopped in the special figure 1. If it is displayed and a small hit is made in the special figure 2 during the measurement of the symbol display time of the special figure 1, the measurement of the symbol display time of the special figure 1 is not interrupted.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 13 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

FIG. 13 shows the decorative symbol display device 208. The first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 216 are not shown. ing.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 13 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is hidden, the default background image described later is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. In addition, various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image depending on the mode) may be displayed. In addition, a mini symbol is displayed in the upper left of the display area, and variable display and stop display are performed according to the decorative symbol displayed large in the center of the display screen.

The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is an area for notifying whether or not the symbol is changing (or the symbol is stopped) and notifying the number of holds, and the hold of special figure 1 is on the upper left of the display area. A number display area is provided, and a reserved number display area of special figure 2 is provided at the lower left. Further, a symbol changing notification area of special figure 1 is provided in the upper right of the display area, and a symbol changing notification area of special drawing 2 is provided in the lower right. In addition, a notification area during symbol change of the general map and a hold number display area of the general map may be further provided. The numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 1 is consistent with the hold number shown in the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of the special figure 2 is the hold lamp 220 of the special figure 2. Consistent with the number of holds indicated by. Further, in the symbol changing notification area of special figure 1, while the symbol of special figure 1 is stopped, for example, if it is a big hit, it is stopped and displayed as "○", and if it is a small hit, it is displayed as "△". Is displayed as a stop, and if it is off, it is displayed as a stop with "x". Further, during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the display of "-" blinks, and it may be possible to recognize that the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is being performed. The display in the symbol changing display area of Special Figure 2 is the same as the display in the symbol changing display area of Special Figure 1, and this is a display mode corresponding to the symbol changing display and the stop display of Special Figure 2. Changes. By changing the display mode, lighting mode, and blinking mode of the fourth symbol, or by changing the display mode of the numerical value displayed in the hold number display area, a pre-reading notice and a notice regarding the running symbol change display can be given. You may go.

Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 in the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 13 is a normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal game state is provided with the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal game state, the designation of the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 is omitted, but the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings in Special Figure 1 is represented by the number of lights of the holding lamp 218 in Special Figure 1 and the number shown in the holding number display area in Special Figure 1, as well as the number of holding icons in Special Figure 1. The number of holds is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of special figure 2. In addition, it may be represented by the number of hold icons of special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 13A, two hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of these two special figures 1 are both displayed. , It is displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon. In addition, in FIG. 13A, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines. ..

On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area of the special figure 2. This is because, as described above, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 13 is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), so that the fluctuation display time of special figure 2 is almost always ( This is because it is extremely long (for example, 580 seconds), and it does not make much sense to win the special figure 2 starting port 232 (when it is out of the way or when it is a small hit).

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the hold icon display area of the special figure on which the display result is easily displayed in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed according to the control state (game state). That is, in the present embodiment, when the control state is the normal gaming state or the electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state), the display result of special figure 1 is likely to be displayed as described above. , As shown in FIG. 13A, when the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d and the control state is the probabilistic state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state). On the contrary, the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is displayed.

Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon of Special Figure 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon of Special Figure 2 may be the same or different. ..

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → start of variation display of the fourth symbol → start or erase of the movement animation of the hold icon → start of variation of the decorative symbol. However, this order may change.

In FIG. 13B, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is performed. The hold icon and decorative design have not changed yet.

In FIG. 13C, the moving animation (moving animation) of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is started. In the movement animation here, the hold icon (the target hold icon for this symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280, and the second hold The hold icon at the display position of the icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. At this stage, the variable display of the decorative pattern has not started. At this stage, the variable display of the decorative pattern may be started.

In FIG. 13D, the movement animation continues, and in FIG. 13E, the hold icon, which was the first hold icon h11 before the start of the change, reaches the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon, which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the fluctuation, reaches the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11, but it is still displayed at this stage. The variable display of decorative icons has not started. When the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon that has been the first hold icon h11 may be viewed as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon may be viewed as the change icon h0. The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.

Then, in FIG. 13 (f), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 13 (f), the game ball enters the first special figure start port (top) 230, the number of holds in special figure 1 increases by 1, and the hold icon display area 281 in special figure 1 It is shown that the increase animation (increase animation) of the hold icon in which the second hold icon h12 appears at the display position of the second hold icon h12 has started. In the increase animation in the present embodiment, an animation is performed in which the hold icon is enlarged and displayed at the display position of the corresponding hold icon among the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14. It goes without saying that the display mode of the increased animation is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and various display modes can be adopted. For example, the display mode appears from a display area other than the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. The animation may be performed by moving to the display position of the hold icon in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, or the hold icon appearing from outside the display area and of the hold icon in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. The animation may be performed by moving to the display position.

As shown in FIG. 13 (g), the operation promotion notification image 136P urging the effect button 136 to be pressed within the valid period is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 from which the variable display of the decorative symbol has been started. In the operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the valid period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. The variable display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing by the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 or the like. .. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 13 (g), it is shown that the increasing animation continues.

In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 13 (h), the valid period is reduced, and in FIG. 13 (i), the player presses the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid period, as shown in FIG. 13J, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the reach state entry notice image 2071 instead of the operation promotion notification image 136P. .. In the reach state entry notice image 2071, the characters "Chance!" Are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. At the timing shown in FIG. 13 (h), the increase animation is completed, and the hold icon is completely displayed in the display area of the second hold icon h12.

In FIG. 13 (k), the reach state entry notice image 2071 disappears, the variable display of the decorative symbol becomes visible, and then the reach state is entered as shown in FIG. 13 (l). Even if the reach state entry notice image 2071 is displayed, it may not enter the reach state, but it may be made to enter without fail.

As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect that triggers a notice regarding the symbol variation display currently being performed.

In FIG. 13 (m), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 disappear. The fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is displayed. Further, the variation display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner and reduced to be displayed, and in FIG. 13 (n). , SP (special) reach (swordsman reach) has developed. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 13 (n) displays a large image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 13 (o) follows the duel between the main character and the swordsman who plays the enemy role. The animation of the scene is displayed.

It should be noted that the reach state entry notice image 2071 is not limited to the notice of entering the reach state, but may be a notice of development to SP reach.

FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 14 step by step.

In FIG. 15 (p) following from FIG. 14 (o), the animation of the duel scene continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 15 (s). In FIG. 15 (s), the hero's lord defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and in FIG. 15 (t), all are temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 and the mini symbol. Instead of hiding, a different background image may be displayed. Alternatively, in this scene, the display of the setting suggestion may be displayed. Eventually, as shown in FIG. (U), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is displayed. The background here may be hidden or may be a background image different from the conventional one. Further, the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remains disappeared, and only the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 and the mini symbol are displayed. As for the mini-designs, variable display is continuously performed for all the symbols until the symbols are confirmed and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 15 (v), the decorative symbols start to change again with the display of the characters "re-lottery !!", and the re-lottery effect is performed. In this re-lottery effect, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" and "decoration 7-", which are a combination of decorative symbols that become a big hit and are determined to shift to a probabilistic state that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is completed. It fuels the expectation that the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 7-Decoration 7" will be finally displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 15 (w), the probability variation jackpot of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is confirmed from the jackpot combination of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" as the combination of decorative patterns. It is shown that a combination of decorative symbols indicating that is displayed. At this time, the effect display EF1 in which the star flashes is displayed around the decorative symbol after the stop, and it is notified that the combination of the so-called stopped jackpot decorative symbols has been upgraded.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 15 (x), the combination of the 6R probability variation jackpot confirmed decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, the fourth symbol (round figure) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 15 (x) is stopped and displayed by "◯", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "777". In FIG. 15 (x), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 15 (y), as a big hit game start effect, the characters "Big chance big hit" are displayed together with the background image celebrating the big hit (omitted here), and the characters "Right hit!" Are displayed. Is urging right-handed.

On the other hand, as a result of the re-lottery effect shown in FIG. 15 (v), for example, as shown in FIGS. 15 (w') to 15 (y'), the combination of the decorative symbols does not change from that before the re-lottery. There is. That is, it may be produced that the re-lottery has failed. However, in the present embodiment, even if the combination of decorative symbols indicating that the probability variation jackpot is fixed does not stop and display, for example, the promotion effect in the jackpot effect can be given a sense of expectation, so that the player can have a sense of expectation. In some cases, expectations can be sustained.

In the present embodiment, the mode of the re-lottery effect is one type, but there are a plurality of types, and the degree to which the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols changes before and after the re-lottery depends on the mode of the re-lottery effect executed. It may be changed, for example, re-lottery effect of the mode accompanied by the movement of the accessory> re-lottery effect by displaying the symbol variation by frame advance> re-lottery effect by high-speed fluctuation> re-lottery effect by slow fluctuation. The expectation that the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit will change before and after the lottery may be high. The order and mode of expectations are not limited to those described above, and can be set as appropriate.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, an example of the process from the stop of the jackpot symbol to the start of the jackpot game will be described. Here, FIG. 16 is a timing chart for explaining an example of the process from the stop of the jackpot symbol to the end of the jackpot game.

The gaming state shown in FIG. 16 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (normal gaming state), but the same operation may be performed in other gaming states, or different operations are performed. May be. In the present embodiment, for example, the execution time of the big hit start effect differs depending on the game state, but in any of the game states, the process from the stop of the big hit symbol to the occurrence of the big hit is the same.

As shown in FIG. 16, special figure 2 is displaying the symbol variation, while special figure 1 is displaying the symbol stop. After that, at the timing shown in t81, the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, and when the symbol display time of the special figure 2 (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses and the timing of t82 is reached, the condition device is activated and the main The right-handed indicator lamp RR of the control lamp board 254 lights up, and the standby state of the jackpot start wait time (for example, 10 seconds) is set. At this time, at least a game state command indicating that the condition device has been activated and a launch position command instructing a right-handed strike are transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives these commands, the jackpot start effect is started, and the right-handed display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this embodiment, even during the symbol stop display of the special figure 1, when the condition device related to the big hit of the special figure 2 is activated and the first sub-control unit 400 receives the game state command to that effect, The display of the menu display is prohibited, and it is controlled so that the menu display is not displayed even if the display operation of the menu display is performed.

When the jackpot start wait time elapses and the timing of t83 is reached, the jackpot generation gate monitoring state becomes effective, and when the game ball passes through the jackpot generation gate 252, the jackpot game starts. At this time, at least a jackpot generation gate valid start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the jackpot generation gate valid start command, the gate entry standby effect is started, and the player is urged to pass the game ball through the jackpot generation gate 252. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the game state command indicating that the condition device has been activated, the display of the menu display is prohibited. The timing at which the display of the display is prohibited is not limited to the above-mentioned timing, and may be, for example, the timing at which the jackpot generation gate valid start command is received, or the special figure fluctuation stop command transmitted at the timing of t81 as the first sub. It may be the timing received by the control unit 400.

After that, the game ball passes through the jackpot generation gate 252 at the timing of t84, and when this is detected, the jackpot game is started at the timing shown in t85 and the first round is started. At this time, the jackpot occurrence gate monitoring state becomes invalid. After that, when the big hit game is digested and the big hit game is completed at the timing shown in t86, the condition device is also stopped (inactive state), and the game state is also a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state or a special figure low probability. It shifts to the high probability state. After that, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 start the symbol variation display on the condition that the symbol variation display is suspended. In addition, when the game state is the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state and there is no hold of the symbol variation display in special figure 2, or the game state is the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state and special figure 1 If there is no hold of the symbol change display, the display of the menu display is permitted, but in the game state other than the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, there is no hold of the symbol change display. The display of the menu display may be prohibited even if the symbol variation display is not in progress.

FIG. 17 is an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device, and is a diagram showing a stepwise example of the effect performed before the jackpot game starts. In addition, also in FIG. 17, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17A, the combination of decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 17A, both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. To that effect, "x" is displayed in both the symbol changing notification area of Special Figure 1 and the symbol changing notification area of Special Figure 2.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 17 is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 is on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. Is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lighting of the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, the number of holdings of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284, and the number of holding icons of special drawing 1. The number of holdings of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284.

In FIG. 17A, two hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of these two special figures 1 are both displayed. , It is displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode).

In FIG. 17B, the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The icon h0 is set, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 in FIG. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

After that, for example, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed as shown in FIGS. 14 to 15, and as a result, as shown in FIG. 17 (c), the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 212. At the same time, the display is stopped by the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4". Then, after the symbol display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the special figure 1 has passed, as shown in FIG. 17 (d), the jackpot start effect continues until the jackpot start wait time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses. Will be. Along with the start of the jackpot start effect, a right-handed display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

The jackpot start wait time has elapsed, and the passage of the game ball to the jackpot generation gate 252 is monitored. As shown in FIG. 17 (e), "waiting for jackpot!" The gate entry standby effect in which the characters "Pass!" Is displayed is started, and the player is urged to pass the game ball to the jackpot generation gate 252. After that, when the game ball passes through the jackpot generation gate 252 at the timing shown in FIG. 17 (f), the jackpot game starts as shown in FIG. 17 (g), the first round starts, and the first variable winning opening The 234a (or the second variable winning opening 235a) opens.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the jackpot game can be started.

FIG. 18 is an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 has started during the symbol variation of the special figure 2 which is a big hit during the production of the animation demo which is the standby effect. It is a figure which shows the production example of a case step by step. In addition, also in FIG. 18, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is illustrated, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special diagram 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted.

At the timing shown in FIG. 18A, the symbol variation display of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is being executed, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is a big hit. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18A, the decorative symbol variation display is performed according to the symbol variation display of the special figure 1. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 18A, since the symbol variation display of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, the fourth symbol / reserved number in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the display area 284, a blinking “−” indicating that the symbol is changing is displayed in both the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 1 and the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 2 to indicate the fact.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 18 is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 is on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. Is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lighting of the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, the number of holdings of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284, and the number of holding icons of special drawing 1. The number of holdings of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284.

At the timing shown in FIG. 18A, since the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is not held, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. On the other hand, there are two hold of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2, and the hold number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is “2”.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18B, the combination of the decorative symbols that are out of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed, and the player is notified that the decoration is out of alignment. .. On the other hand, in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display is still continuously performed, but in the normal gaming state, the effect display corresponding to the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is not performed.

A misaligned symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 212, and when the symbol display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the special diagram 1 elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18C shows a standby effect. The design demo of is started. In the present embodiment, in the symbol demo, the symbol variation display that is the target of the variation display of the decorative symbol (for example, in the normal game state, the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212) is not performed. In addition, it is an effect executed in a standby state, which is not a big hit game state, and the display of the combination of decorative symbols displayed as stopped is maintained, and for example, the effect button 138 and the operation key unit 190 are operated. The display can be changed to the menu screen, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters "display menu with push button" to notify the fact. In addition to or instead of this, the current volume may be displayed, or a display imitating the operation key unit 190 may be displayed in order to prompt the volume change or the like. Further, in this production example, the background display is omitted, but a part or all of the background displayed when the decorative pattern is variablely displayed may be different, for example, a pattern demo. In the display of, the background displayed when the decorative pattern is variablely displayed is the same, but the animation may be different, or a completely different background may be displayed. Also,
When a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the display of the symbol demo, the display is switched from the symbol demo to the animation demo as shown in FIG. 18 (d). The animation demo is an effect executed as a standby effect, and for example, as shown in FIG. 18D, the title of the pachinko machine 100 and the like are displayed to increase the motivation for playing. Further, in this animation demo, the characters "Demo in" are displayed in the upper center of the display screen so that the demo is being produced. The characters "in DEMO" do not necessarily have to be displayed. Further, even in this state, it is possible to shift to the menu screen by operating the effect button 138, for example. The animation demo is switched to the symbol demo again after a predetermined execution time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed. After that, the symbol demo and the animation demo are alternately repeated until the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

After that, when the game ball wins the first special figure start port (upper) 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 18 (e) during the execution of the animation demo, the first special figure is displayed as shown in FIG. 18 (f). The symbol variation display is started in the device 212, and the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the display of the animation demo being executed to the decorative symbol variation display.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (g), the decorative symbol being displayed in the variation is reduced and moved to the lower right corner of the display screen, and the symbol variation display in the special figure 2 becomes a big hit. The text "Preparing for a big hit !!" is displayed large in the center of the display screen to announce that it is a display. In the present embodiment, in the normal game state, the symbol variation display according to the special figure 2 is not performed, so that the player may stop the game without knowing that the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 becomes a big hit. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order not to inflict a disadvantage on the player, for example, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started during the execution of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 which is a big hit. It is designed to notify that the result of the symbol variation display of FIG. 2 is a big hit. Further, by configuring in this way, wasteful hitting may be prevented. Further, in the present embodiment, since the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed for a moment and then "Preparing for big hit !!" is displayed, the variable display is once performed with the large decorative symbol and then the big hit is being prepared. May be able to surprise the player. In addition, "Preparing for big hit !!" may be displayed without starting the variable display of the decorative pattern. If you do this, you will be preparing for a big hit without displaying the fluctuation once with a large decorative pattern, so that you will feel like you have gained one hold by making you think that it was a continuation of the previous fluctuation. May be possible.

After that, the symbol fluctuation time of the special figure 2 elapses, and at the timing shown in FIG. 18 (h), it is shown that the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed by the jackpot symbol (for example, "special figure b"). In line with this, “◯” is displayed in the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 2 of the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284. Further, at this time, the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 being executed is discarded, and the symbol is stopped and displayed as an outlier. In line with this, the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols that are out of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7", and also stops and displays the mini-design at "417" accordingly. There is. After that, when the symbol display time of the special figure 2 elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (i) displays the characters "challenge jackpot" indicating that the jackpot has been achieved, and the upper right corner of the display screen. Right-handed display is displayed in the corner.

After the jackpot start wait time has elapsed, the passage of the game ball to the jackpot generation gate 252 is monitored, and as shown in FIG. 18 (j), "waiting for jackpot!" The gate entry standby effect in which the characters "Pass!" Is displayed is started, and the player is urged to pass the game ball to the jackpot generation gate 252. After that, when the game ball passes through the jackpot generation gate 252 at the timing shown in FIG. 18 (k), the jackpot game starts as shown in FIG. 18 (l), the first round starts, and the second variable winning opening 235a (or the first variable winning opening 234a) opens.

On the other hand, in the case of performing an effect in which it is confirmed that the game state after the end of the big hit will be a probable change state (small hit RUSH), the characters "big chance big hit" are displayed as shown in FIG. 18 (i'). The displayed jackpot start effect is executed, and then, as shown in FIG. 18 (j'), the characters "Waiting for a jackpot!" And "Right-handed to pass the jackpot generation gate!" Are displayed. The approach waiting effect is started, and the player is urged to pass the game ball to the jackpot generation gate 252. That is, in the jackpot start effect and the gate entry promotion effect, the player may be able to guess the type of jackpot by changing the mode of the effect.

In this production example, when the game ball wins the first special figure start port (top) 230 during the execution of the animation demo during the special figure 2 fluctuation (the symbol fluctuation display that becomes the big hit is being executed), "preparation for the big hit". It shows that the big hit notice effect with the characters "Medium !!" is started, but even if the game ball wins the first special figure start port (top) 230 during the execution of the symbol demo. Similarly, the jackpot notice effect with the characters "Preparing for jackpot !!" is started. Further, in the present embodiment, after the big hit notice effect in which the characters "Big hit is being prepared !!" is displayed is started, even if the variable display of the special figure 1 is finished, the game is shifted to the design demo or the animation demo. However, the jackpot notice effect is continuously displayed. Further, in this case, it is not possible to move to the setting screen.

FIG. 19 is an example of an effect centered on a decorative symbol display device, and is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect when a big hit is made in special figure 2 during an effect of a symbol demo which is a standby effect. Note that also in FIG. 19, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special diagram 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted. The effects shown in FIGS. 19 (a) to 19 (c) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 18 (a) to 18 (c), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

After that, during the execution of the symbol demo, the symbol fluctuation time of the special figure 2 elapses, and at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (d), the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol (for example, "special figure b"). It is shown. In line with this, “◯” is displayed in the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 2 of the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284. However, since the symbol demonstration is still being held, it may be difficult for the player to notice that the special figure 2 was a big hit. After that, when the symbol display time of the special figure 2 elapses, the jackpot start wait time is set and the time counting is started. However, as shown in FIG. 19 (e), the jackpot start effect corresponding to the set jackpot start wait time. During the period when the above is performed, a right-handed display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the symbol demonstration is still continuing.

When the jackpot start wait time has elapsed and the game ball is monitored for passing through the jackpot generation gate 252, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19F superimposes the symbol demo on the lower part of the display screen. The text "Right-handed and pass through the jackpot generation gate!" Is displayed. That is, it is shown that the display for promoting the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is performed on top of the display of the symbol demo. After that, when the game ball passes through the jackpot generation gate 252 at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (g), the jackpot game starts as shown in FIG. 19 (h), the first round starts, and the second variable winning opening 235a (or the first variable winning opening 234a) opens.

On the other hand, in the case of performing an effect in which it is confirmed that the game state after the end of the big hit will be a probable change state (small hit RUSH), as shown in FIG. 19 (f'), the passage of the big hit generation gate 252 is promoted. The text "Right-handed to get a big chance!" May be displayed. That is, it may be possible for the player to guess the type of jackpot by changing the mode of the display that promotes the passage of the jackpot generation gate.

As described above, in this production example, when a big hit is obtained in the special figure 2 in the normal game state, the display for promoting the passage of the big hit generation gate 252 is superimposed on the display of the symbol demo without performing the big hit start effect. Is shown in some cases.

FIG. 20 is an example of an effect centered on a decorative symbol display device, and is a diagram stepwise showing another effect example in the case of a big hit in Special Fig. 2 during the production of a symbol demo which is a standby effect. is there. In addition, also in FIG. 20, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is illustrated, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special diagram 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted.

At the timing shown in FIG. 20 (a), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is being executed, and the second special symbol display device 214 is stopped and displayed with a missed symbol. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20A, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed according to the symbol variation display of the special figure 1. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 20A, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is performed, but the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the symbol as an off-line symbol, so that the decorative symbol display device 208. In the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner, a blinking "-" indicating that the symbol is changing is displayed in the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 1 to indicate that fact, and the special figure 2 shows. In the symbol changing notification area, an “x” indicating that the out-of-order symbol is stopped and displayed is displayed.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 20 is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 is on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. Is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lighting of the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, the number of holdings of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284, and the number of holding icons of special drawing 1. The number of holdings of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284.

At the timing shown in FIG. 20A, since the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is not held, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. Further, there is no hold of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2, and the hold number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is “0”.

After that, the game ball wins a prize at the second special figure start port 232, and the symbol variation display is started on the second special symbol display device 214. At the timing shown in FIG. 20B, the symbol variation display and the special figure 1 of the special figure 1 are displayed. It is shown that both of the symbol variation displays of FIG. 2 are being executed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (c), the combination of the decorative symbols that are out of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed, and the player is notified that the decoration is out of alignment. .. On the other hand, in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display is still continuously performed, but in the normal gaming state, the effect display corresponding to the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is not performed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 20 (d) to 20 (i) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 20 (d) to 20 (i) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 19 (c) to 19 (h), the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in this production example, after the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 which is a big hit is started during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 being executed ends, and then the special figure 1 is displayed. If the symbol variation display of FIG. 1 does not start and the state is in a standby state, and the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol during the execution of the symbol demo as the standby effect, the symbol demo is displayed without the jackpot start effect. It is shown that a display promoting the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 may be displayed on top of the above.

FIG. 21 is an example of an effect centered on a decorative symbol display device, and is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect when a big hit is made in Special Figure 2 during an animation demo production which is a standby effect. In addition, also in FIG. 21, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is illustrated, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special diagram 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 21 (a) to 21 (d) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 18 (a) to 18 (d), the description thereof will be omitted.

After that, the symbol fluctuation time of the special figure 2 elapses during the execution of the animation demo, and at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (e), the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol (for example, "special figure b"). It is shown. In line with this, “◯” is displayed in the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 2 of the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284. However, since the animation demo is still ongoing, it may be difficult for the player to notice that the big hit in Special Figure 2 was made. After that, when the symbol display time of the special figure 2 elapses, the jackpot start wait time is set and the time counting is started. However, as shown in FIG. 21 (f), the jackpot start effect corresponding to the set jackpot start wait time. During the period when the above is performed, a right-handed display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the animation demo is still continuing.

After that, when the jackpot start wait time elapses, the passage of the game ball to the jackpot generation gate 252 is monitored, but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (g) still continues the animation demonstration. It has been broken, and the gate entry waiting effect is not performed. Moreover, in this production example, even if the passage of the game ball to the jackpot generation gate 252 is monitored in the animation demo, the display for promoting the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is not displayed.

After that, when the animation demo ends and the process shifts to the symbol demo, as shown in FIG. 21 (h), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a display that promotes the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 on top of the symbol demo display. Will be done. In this embodiment, if the animation demo is changed to the symbol demo after the game ball is monitored for passing through the jackpot generation gate 252, the animation demo is not changed again after that. , As will be described later, it may be possible to move to an animation demo. Further, when the animation demo is changed to the design demo after the jackpot start production period starts, the animation demo may not be changed again after that, or the animation demo may be made possible. After that, when the game ball passes through the jackpot generation gate 252 at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (i), the jackpot game starts as shown in FIG. 21 (j), the first round starts, and the second variable winning opening 235a (or the first variable winning opening 234a) opens.

In addition, the following display may be performed. That is, as shown in FIG. 21 (g'), when the gate entry standby state is entered during the continuation of the animation demo, a display is displayed to promote the passage of the game ball to the jackpot generation gate 252 by hitting right. When the animation demo ends and the symbol demo is started, the display as shown in FIG. 21 (h') may be performed. Since the effect shown in FIG. 21 (h') is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 21 (h), the description thereof will be omitted. Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed after shifting to the symbol demo, the animation demo may be shifted again as shown in FIG. 21 (i').

FIG. 22 is an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device, and is an example of an effect in which the transition to the menu screen (setting screen) is possible and the transition is restricted while the standby effect is being executed. It is a figure which shows. In addition, also in FIG. 22, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is illustrated, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special diagram 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 22A, the special figure 1 is in the stopped display state, but the special figure 2 is in the symbol variation display, and the fourth symbol in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the hold number display area 284, "x" is displayed in the symbol changing notification area of special figure 1 to indicate that fact, and the symbol changing display area of special figure 2 indicates that the symbol change is being displayed. "-" Is blinking. The symbol variation display of the special figure 2 being executed is a symbol variation display that is a big hit.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 22A is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon of special figure 1 is placed on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. A display area 281 is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lighting of the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, the number of holdings of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284, and the number of holding icons of special drawing 1. The number of holdings of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284. At the timing shown in FIG. 22A, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 0, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 2. Further, in this effect example, since the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is not performed and the state is in a standby state, a symbol demonstration as a standby effect is performed.

In this state, when the player operates the effect button 136 (or the operation key unit 190) at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (b), the menu screen (setting screen) is displayed as shown in FIG. 22 (c). May occur. On the menu screen, "member registration", "password input", "passcode issuance", "volume / brightness setting", and "setting suggestion setting" can be performed. After that, the operation key unit 190 is operated by the player, and when “end” is selected and determined by the cursor as shown in FIG. 22 (d), the symbol demo is performed again as shown in FIG. 22 (e). Return to. While the setting operation is performed on the menu screen, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is continuously performed.

After that, during the execution of the symbol demo, the symbol fluctuation time of the special figure 2 elapses, and at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (f), the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol (for example, "special figure b"). It is shown. In line with this, “◯” is displayed in the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 2 of the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284. However, since the symbol demonstration is still being held, it may be difficult for the player to notice that the special figure 2 was a big hit. After that, when the symbol display time of the special figure 2 elapses, the jackpot start wait time is set and the time counting is started. As shown in FIG. 22 (g), the jackpot start effect corresponding to the set jackpot start wait time During the period when the above is performed, a right-handed display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the symbol demonstration is still continuing.

When the jackpot start wait time has elapsed and the game ball is monitored for passing through the jackpot generation gate 252, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (h) is superimposed on the symbol demo display at the bottom of the display screen. The text "Right-handed and pass through the jackpot generation gate!" Is displayed. That is, it is shown that the display for promoting the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is performed on top of the display of the symbol demo.

In the present embodiment, when the symbol display time elapses and the condition device is activated as described above (the gate entry standby state is set), the display of the menu screen is restricted, and the effect button is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (i). Even if 136 (or the operation key unit 190) is operated, as shown in FIG. 22 (j), the symbol demo is continuously performed and the menu screen is not displayed. When the effect button 136 (or the operation key unit 190) is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (i) after the gate entry standby state is set, the screen shifts to the menu screen shown in FIG. 22 (c). Various settings may be possible. For example, whether or not the menu screen can be displayed after the gate entry standby state is set can be set by the DIP switch of the DIP switch board 198 shown in FIG. 12 (B). It may be. Further, the menu screen may be configured so as to be able to shift to the menu screen without operating the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190.

As described above, in this production example, there are cases where the menu screen can be displayed and cases where the display of the menu screen is restricted even in the standby state.

23 (1a) to 23 (1e) are diagrams stepwise showing an example of the effect when the special figure 2 becomes a small hit during the execution of the standby effect. Also in FIG. 23, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special diagram 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (1a), the combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 23 (1a), the special figure 1 is in the stopped display state, but the special figure 2 is in the symbol variation display, and the fourth symbol in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the hold number display area 284, "x" is displayed in the symbol changing notification area of special figure 1 to indicate that fact, and the symbol changing display area of special figure 2 indicates that the symbol change is being displayed. "-" Is blinking. The symbol variation display of the special figure 2 being executed is a symbol variation display that is a small hit.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 23 (1a) is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon of special figure 1 is placed on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. A display area 281 is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lighting of the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, the number of holdings of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284, and the number of holding icons of special drawing 1. The number of holdings of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284. At the timing shown in FIG. 23 (1a), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 0, and the number of holds in special figure 2 is 2. Further, in this effect example, since the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is not performed and the state is in a standby state, a symbol demonstration as a standby effect is performed.

After that, during the execution of the symbol demo, the symbol fluctuation time of the special figure 2 elapses, and at the timing shown in FIG. 23 (1b), the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a small hit symbol (for example, "special symbol g"). The situation is shown. In line with this, "Δ" is displayed in the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 2 of the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284. However, since the symbol demonstration is still being carried out, it may be difficult for the player to notice that the small hit was made in Special Figure 2. After that, when the symbol display time of the special figure 2 elapses, the small hit game is started as shown in FIG. 23 (1c). Then, in the present embodiment, when the effect button 136 (or the operation key unit 190) is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 23 (1d) during the small hit game, the small hit is as shown in FIG. 23 (1e). The menu screen is displayed even during the winning game. That is, in the present embodiment, when the condition device is activated due to a big hit, the display of the menu screen is restricted even in the standby state, but in the small hit game state, the standby effect (design demo, animation demo) is executed. It is shown that the menu screen can be displayed by operating the effect button 136 or the like inside. In the present embodiment, the display of the menu screen is permitted during the small hit game, but the display of the menu screen may be restricted during the small hit game.

FIGS. 23 (2a) to 23 (2h) show step by step an example of a production in which a big hit is obtained in the special figure 1 during the production of the symbol demo in the probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state). It is a figure. Note that also in FIG. 19, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special diagram 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted.

FIG. 23 (2a) shows that only the special figure 1 displays the symbol variation in the probabilistic state. In the probabilistic state, unlike the normal game state or the electric support state, the decorative symbol is changed and displayed according to the symbol variation display of the special figure 2, so that the effect display according to the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is displayed. It has not been done, and a design demonstration is being done.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (2a), the character "small hit RUSH in progress" indicating that the small hit RUSH is in progress (that is, in the probabilistic state) is displayed as "0480 pt". It is displayed above the display of the number of balls. In addition, a mini-design and a right-handed display instructing right-handedness are displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 280 appears in the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 23 (2a) is a probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in this probabilistic state is provided with a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the probabilistic state, the holding icon display area of the special figure 1 is omitted, but the hold icon display area of the special figure 1 may be provided.

In the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed. The number of holds in special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the hold lamp 220 in special figure 2 and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area in special figure 2, as well as the number of hold icons in special figure 2. The number of holds is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of special figure 1. In addition, it may be represented by the number of hold icons of special figure 1. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

As shown in FIG. 23 (2a), since there is no reserved symbol variation display in the special figure 2, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, and the special figure 2 Since the symbol variation display of FIG. 2 is not performed, the variation icon is not displayed even in the variation icon display area 280. Further, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area of the special figure 1. As described above, since the control state (game state) in FIG. 23 (2a) is a probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state), by winning a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232, special figure 2 This is to execute a lot of variable display of.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (2b), it is shown that the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with an off-line symbol (“special figure C”). Along with this, in the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 1 of the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, “x” indicating that the symbol has been stopped and displayed is displayed. On the other hand, in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display has not yet started, and the symbol demonstration in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols on the outskirts of "decoration 6-decoration 3-decoration 8" is continuously performed. There is.

After that, one of the reserved symbol variation displays of the special figure 1 is digested, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (2c) shows that the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. There is. The symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is a symbol variation display that is a big hit. In this production example, even after the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, no notice display regarding the big hit is performed, but the notice display may be performed.

After that, during the execution of the symbol demo, the symbol fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, and at the timing shown in FIG. 23 (2d), the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol (for example, "special figure B"). It is shown. In line with this, “◯” is displayed in the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 1 of the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284. However, since the symbol demonstration is still being carried out, it may be difficult for the player to notice that the big hit was made in Special Figure 1. After that, when the symbol display time of the special figure 1 elapses, the jackpot start wait time is set and the time counting is started. However, as shown in FIG. 23 (2e), the jackpot start effect corresponding to the set jackpot start wait time. During the period when the event is held, the design demonstration is still ongoing.

When the jackpot start wait time has elapsed and the game ball is monitored for passing through the jackpot generation gate 252, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (2f) is superimposed on the symbol demo display at the bottom of the display screen. The text "Right-handed and pass through the jackpot generation gate!" Is displayed. That is, it is shown that the display for promoting the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is performed on top of the display of the symbol demo. After that, when the game ball passes through the jackpot generation gate 252 at the timing shown in FIG. 23 (2 g), the jackpot game starts as shown in FIG. 23 (2h), the first round starts, and the first variable winning opening 234a (or the second variable winning opening 235a) opens.

As described above, in this effect example, when a big hit occurs in the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 which is not the target of the effect display during the execution of the symbol demo in the probabilistic state, the big hit start effect is not performed and the symbol demo is performed. It is shown that a display promoting the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 may be displayed on top of the display of.

FIG. 24 is an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device, and is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect performed before the jackpot game starts. In addition, also in FIG. 24, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is illustrated, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special diagram 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted.

At the timing shown in FIG. 24 (a), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is being executed, but the missed symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 214, and the symbol variation of the special figure 1 is displayed. The display is a symbol variation display that is a big hit. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (a), the decorative symbol variation display is performed according to the symbol variation display of the special figure 1. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 24A, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is performed, but the symbol stop display is being performed in the special figure 2, so that the fourth symbol in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. -In the hold number display area 284, as shown to that effect, in the symbol changing notification area of special figure 1, a blinking display of "-" indicating changing is performed, and the symbol changing notification of special figure 2 is performed. In the area, an "x" indicating that the outlier symbol is stopped is displayed.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 24 is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 is on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. Is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lighting of the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, the number of holdings of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284, and the number of holding icons of special drawing 1. The number of holdings of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284.

In FIG. 24A, two hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1, and all of these three hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 are displayed. , It is displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). Further, since the number of pending symbols of the special figure 1 is two, the number of reserved symbols of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 is “2”. On the other hand, there is no hold of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2, and the hold number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is “0”.

After that, the symbol variation display progresses, and as a result, as shown in FIG. 24 (b), the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 212, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "decoration 4-. The display is stopped by the combination of the big hit decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4". Then, after the symbol display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the special figure 1 has passed, as shown in FIG. 24 (c), the jackpot start effect continues until the jackpot start wait time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses. Will be. Along with the start of the jackpot start effect, a right-handed display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After the jackpot start wait time has elapsed, the passage of the game ball to the jackpot generation gate 252 is monitored, and as shown in FIG. 24 (d), "waiting for jackpot!" The gate entry standby effect in which the characters "Pass!" Is displayed is started, and the player is urged to pass the game ball to the jackpot generation gate 252. However, the player continues to hit left against the instruction of hitting right, and when the game ball wins a prize at the first special drawing start port (top) 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (e), FIG. 24 (f). ), A warning announcement (warning notification) saying "Please hit right!" Is output from the speaker 120 instead of the start winning sound during the execution of the gate entry standby effect. The means for issuing the warning notification is not limited to voice output, and may be performed by display or by a lamp. Further, in this effect example, the first special figure start port is displayed in the gate entry standby state, that is, during the execution of the gate entry standby effect (a display prompting the game ball to pass through the jackpot generation gate 252 by hitting right is also displayed). (Above) When the game ball wins in 230, the start prize sound that may normally be output such as the default start prize sound and the start prize sound of the look-ahead notice is not output, and a warning announcement is output. There is. Although the start sound of the look-ahead notice is not output, the default start winning sound may be output.

After that, when the game ball passes through the jackpot generation gate 252 at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (g), the jackpot game starts as shown in FIG. 24 (h), the first round starts, and the first variable winning opening 234a (or the second variable winning opening 235a) opens.

FIG. 25 is an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device, and is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect performed before the jackpot game starts in the probabilistic state. In addition, also in FIG. 25, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is illustrated, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (a), 35 small hits and big hits were generated including the first big hit, and the characters "35th" were displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. The number of consecutive chans is displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (a), it is shown that the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is performed in the probability variation state. On the other hand, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is not performed, and there is no pending symbol variation display. Then, in the probability variation state, unlike the normal game state or the electric support state, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed according to the symbol variation display of the special figure 2.

Further, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (a), the characters "in small hit RUSH" indicating that the state is in a probable change state are displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen, and below the display screen. , "12215pt" is displayed as the total number of winning balls, and 12215 prize balls are won by winning from the first big hit to the variable winning openings (1st variable winning opening 234a, 2nd variable winning opening 235a). It is shown that

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 280 appears in the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 25 is a probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in this probabilistic state is provided with a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal game state, the designation of the hold icon display area of the special figure 1 is omitted, but the hold icon display area of the special figure 1 may be provided.

In the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed. The number of holds in special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the hold lamp 220 in special figure 2 and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area in special figure 2, as well as the number of hold icons in special figure 2. The number of holds is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 and the numerical value shown in the hold number display area of special figure 1. In addition, it may be represented by the number of hold icons of special figure 1.

In FIG. 25A, four hold icons h21, h22, h23, and h24 of special figure 2 are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2, and the hold icons h21, of these four special figures 1 are displayed. All of h22, h23, and h24 are displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area of the special figure 1. Further, since the number of pending symbols of the special figure 2 is four, the number of reserved symbols of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 is “4”. On the other hand, there is no hold of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, and the hold number display of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is “0”.

After that, the symbol variation display progresses, and as a result, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display device 214, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "decoration 3-". It is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3" with the 10R probability variation jackpot confirmed. Then, after the symbol display time of Special Figure 2 (for example, 0.5 seconds) has passed, as shown in FIG. 25 (c), the jackpot start effect (character of "big chance jackpot" indicating that the probability variation jackpot is confirmed). Is displayed until the jackpot start wait time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses.

After the big hit start wait time has passed, the game ball is monitored for passing through the big hit generation gate 252. As shown in FIG. 25 (d), "waiting for a big chance!" The gate entry standby effect in which the characters "Pass the gate!" Is displayed is started, and the player is urged to pass the game ball to the jackpot generation gate 252. In this production example, since a big hit occurs in the probabilistic state in which right-handed hitting is performed, the player usually continues right-handed hitting. Therefore, after the state of monitoring the passage of the game ball to the jackpot generation gate 252, as shown in FIG. 25 (e), before passing through the jackpot generation gate 252, the second special figure start port 232 The game ball may win a prize. However, since such an event is an event that can be normally assumed in a state where right-handed striking is continuously performed, no particular warning notification is given as shown in FIG. 25 (f). In such a case as well, the warning may be notified.

After that, when the game ball passes through the jackpot generation gate 252 at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (g), the jackpot game starts as shown in FIG. 25 (h), the first round starts, and the second variable winning opening 235a (or the first variable winning opening 234a) opens.

FIG. 26 is an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device, in which a power interruption / recovery occurs while a display promoting the passage of the jackpot generation gate is displayed during the execution of the symbol demo. It is a figure which shows the production example of. In addition, also in FIG. 26, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special diagram 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 26A, the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol during the execution of the symbol demo, and after the big hit start effect period elapses, the gate entry standby state is set. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (a), the characters "Right-handed and pass through the jackpot generation gate!" Are displayed at the bottom of the display screen over the display of the symbol demo. That is, it is shown that the display for promoting the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is performed on top of the display of the symbol demo. In addition, in the special figure 1, the stop display is performed with the out-of-order symbol. Further, in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the display screen, since the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with the missing symbol, "x" is displayed in the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 1. Since the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, "○" is displayed in the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 2.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 26A is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon of special figure 1 is placed on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. A display area 281 is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lighting of the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, the number of holdings of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284, and the number of holding icons of special drawing 1. The number of holdings of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284. At the timing shown in FIG. 26A, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 0, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 2.

After that, for example, due to a power failure of the amusement store due to the influence of a lightning strike or the like, a power failure occurs in the pachinko machine 100 at the timing shown in FIG. 26 (b), and then the power is restored, as shown in FIG. 26 (c). In addition, the pachinko machine 100 is restored to backup. At this time, a power recovery command and a firing position command are transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, and the first sub control unit 400 follows these commands and displays the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 26 (c). At 208, the so-called first appearance in the morning of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1" is displayed, and a right-handed display is displayed. In addition, the power recovery command also includes the number of symbol variation displays held in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, respectively, and the number of holds in Special Figure 1 is displayed in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284. In the hold number display of the special figure 2 and the special figure 2, the hold number before the power failure occurs is displayed, respectively. Further, since the power recovery command does not include information indicating that the game ball is being monitored for passing through the jackpot generation gate 252, the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 that was displayed before the power failure was cut off. The display that promotes is hidden.

When such a situation occurs, the player may not be aware that he / she should hit right due to the occurrence of power interruption / recovery. However, since the first sub-control unit 400 knows that the player should hit right by the firing position command transmitted when the power is restored, the player continuously hits left, and FIG. 26 (d) ), When the game ball wins the first special figure start port (top) 230, as shown in Fig. 26 (e), "Please hit right" from the speaker 120 during the symbol demonstration! A warning announcement (warning notification) is output, and an animation (right-handed promotion animation) that greatly promotes right-handed hitting is displayed on the display screen. In this animation, an image imitating the game board 200 (board image BAN) is displayed, and an image imitating the game ball passes through the launch rail and heads toward the right side of the game area. This animation may be erased in a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), or may be continuously displayed until the game ball passes through the jackpot generation gate 252. Further, the display of the animation for promoting right-handed striking may be a display of another mode. For example, by displaying an animation in which the player is turning the firing handle 134 in the clockwise direction on the display screen. , May be encouraged to hit right. This may cause the player to realize that he needs to hit right. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (e), the first hold icon h11 is displayed by performing an increase animation, and it is shown that the first hold icon h11 is overlapped with the board image BAN. After that, when the game ball passes through the jackpot generation gate 252 at the timing shown in FIG. 26 (f), the jackpot game starts as shown in FIG. 26 (g), the first round starts, and the first variable winning opening 234a (or the second variable winning opening 235a) opens.

In this way, in this production example, if a power failure / recovery occurs while a display promoting the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is displayed during the execution of the symbol demo, the symbol demo resumes, but a jackpot occurs. The display that promotes the passage of the gate 252 is hidden, and further, if the left-handed strike is continued in this state, a warning notification may be given. In this production example, the warning notification is performed by voice and display, but it may be a warning notification by voice only, a warning notification by display only, or a warning notification by lamp only. May be good.

FIG. 27 is an example of an effect centered on a decorative symbol display device, and is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect when a small hit is made in Special Figure 2 during an animation demo production which is a standby effect. .. In addition, also in FIG. 27, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special diagram 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted.

At the timing shown in FIG. 27 (a), the symbol variation display of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is being executed, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is a small hit. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (a), the decorative symbol variation display is performed according to the symbol variation display of the special figure 1. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 27 (a), since the symbol variation display of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, the fourth symbol / reserved number in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the display area 284, a blinking “−” indicating that the symbol is changing is displayed in both the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 1 and the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 2 to indicate the fact.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 27 is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 is on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. Is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lighting of the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, the number of holdings of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284, and the number of holding icons of special drawing 1. The number of holdings of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284.

At the timing shown in FIG. 27 (a), since the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is not held, the hold icon of special figure 1 is not displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1. On the other hand, there are two hold of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2, and the hold number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is “2”.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (b), the combination of the decorative symbols that are out of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed, and the player is notified that the decoration is out of alignment. .. On the other hand, in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display is still continuously performed, but in the normal gaming state, the effect display corresponding to the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is not performed.

A misaligned symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 212, and when the symbol display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the special diagram 1 elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (c) performs a standby effect. The design demo of is started. After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the display of the symbol demo, the display is switched from the symbol demo to the animation demo as shown in FIG. 27 (d). In the present embodiment, the symbol demo is started when the symbol display time of the special figure 1 elapses, but the symbol is further elapsed after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the symbol display time elapses. You may want the demo to start.

After that, the symbol fluctuation time of the special figure 2 elapses during the execution of the animation demo, and the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a small hit symbol (for example, "special figure g") at the timing shown in FIG. 27 (e). It is shown. In line with this, "Δ" is displayed in the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 2 of the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284. However, since the animation demonstration is still ongoing, it may be difficult for the player to notice that the small hit was made in Special Figure 2. After that, when the symbol display time of the special figure 2 elapses, as shown in FIG. 27 (f), the small hit game is started, but in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation demo is continuously executed and right-handed. The display is overlaid on the display of the animation demo.

Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is interrupted during the small hit game executed due to the occurrence of the small hit in the special figure 2, and therefore, for example, the timing shown in FIG. 27 (g). Then, when the first special figure start port (upper) 230 is won, as shown in FIG. 27 (h), the start winning sound is output from the speaker 120, but the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variation of the decorative symbol. Not started. In addition, in the special figure 1, the winning or failing judgment is made by winning the game ball to the first special figure starting port (upper) 230, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, but it is immediate during the small hit game. Will be interrupted. At this time, the characters "display menu with push button" may be deleted.

After that, when the small hit game ends during the execution of the animation demo, as shown in FIG. 27 (i), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 based on the hold starts, and the symbol variation of the special figure 1 that has been interrupted starts. The display resumes. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the display of the animation demo to the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. Regarding the icon displayed based on the winning of the first special figure start port (upper) 230 during the small hit game, the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and then the variable icon display area is displayed. An animation may be performed in which the hold icon moves to 280 and becomes a variable icon. In the present embodiment, an example in which one game ball wins a prize at the first special figure start port (top) 230 while the small hit game during the execution of the animation demo is being performed has been described, but the animation demo is being executed. If two or more game balls win the first special figure start port (top) 230 in the case where a small hit game is performed, the first special figure start port (top) 230 will be displayed after the second. The symbol variation display corresponding to the winning game ball will be suspended. Further, in the present embodiment, if one game ball wins at the first special figure start port (upper) 230 while the small hit game during the execution of the animation demo is being performed, the symbol of special figure 1 changes. Although the example in which the display starts and is immediately interrupted has been described, the symbol variation display may not be started and may be held.

In this way, in this production example, if a small hit game occurs during the execution of the animation demo, the animation demo continues during the small hit game, and it is special while the small hit game is being performed during the animation demo. Even if the game ball wins at the start port according to FIG. 1, the animation demo is continued without starting the variable display of the decorative symbol, and in this case, the icon (variable icon) related to the winning of the game ball to the special figure 1. -It is shown that the hold icon) is not displayed and the icon is displayed after the small hit game is completed.

FIG. 28 is an example of an effect centered on a decorative symbol display device, and is a diagram stepwise showing another effect example in the case of a small hit in Special Figure 2 during the production of an animation demo which is a standby effect. Is. Also in FIG. 28, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special diagram 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted. Further, since the effects shown in FIGS. 28 (a) to 28 (h) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (h), the description thereof will be omitted.

After that, when the execution time of the animation demo has elapsed but the small hit game is still being executed, as shown in FIG. 28 (i), the animation demo ends and the process shifts to the symbol demo. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, but the decorative symbol is displayed in the symbol demo that was executed before the transition to the animation demo. The combination of the decorative symbols on the outskirts of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" is still displayed.

After that, when the small hit game ends during the execution of the symbol demo, as shown in FIG. 28 (j), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 based on the hold starts, and the symbol variation of the special figure 1 that has been interrupted starts. The display resumes. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the change icon display area 280 and the change icon is changed. It becomes h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Regarding the icon displayed based on the winning of the first special figure start port (upper) 230 during the small hit game, the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and then the variable icon display area is displayed. The hold icon was moved to 280 to perform an animation that became a variable icon, but when the animation demo was changed to the design demo, it was displayed based on the winning of the first special figure start port (above) 230. The icon to be displayed may be displayed in the variable icon display area 280 as the variable icon h0.

In this way, in this production example, if a small hit game occurs during the execution of the animation demo, the animation demo continues during the small hit game, and it is special while the small hit game is being performed during the animation demo. Even if the game ball wins at the start port according to FIG. 1, the animation demo is continued without starting the variable display of the decorative symbol, and in this case, the icon (variable icon) related to the winning of the game ball to the special figure 1. -It is shown that the hold icon) is not displayed, and then the icon is displayed when the animation demo is switched to the design demo before the small hit game is over.

FIG. 29 is an example of an effect centered on a decorative symbol display device, and shows a stepwise example of an effect when a game ball wins a prize at the first special figure start port during an animation demo production which is a standby effect. It is a figure. In addition, also in FIG. 29, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is illustrated, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted. Further, since the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (a) to 29 (e) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 18 (a) to 18 (e), the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 29 (d) to 29 (e), when a game ball wins a prize at the first special figure start port (top) 230 during the animation demonstration, as shown in FIG. 29 (f), "Poco! Is output from the speaker 120, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. As the start prize sound output at this time, the start prize sound corresponding to the stage before the transition to the animation demo is output, and in this production example, the start prize sound corresponding to the default stage where the normal background is displayed is output. Has been done. In this production example, a plurality of production stages are prepared, and it is shown that when the start prize is won, the start prize sound corresponding to the shifted production stage is output. In stage A, where a background different from the normal background is displayed, when a start-up prize is won, as shown in FIG. 29 (f'), a start-up prize sound of "pon!" Is output from the speaker 120, and the default stage. It may be possible to make the player recognize the current stage by making it different from the start winning sound output in. Further, in stage B, which is different from stage A, when the start prize is won, as shown in FIG. 29 (f''), a start prize sound of “pin!” Is output from the speaker 120, which is different from the default stage and stage A. By outputting the start winning sound, the player may be able to recognize the current stage. In addition, regardless of the production stage before the transition to the animation demo, if there is a start prize during the animation demo, the start prize sound corresponding to the default stage may be output.

FIG. 30 is an example of a production centered on a decorative symbol display device, and is a stepwise example of another production when a game ball wins a prize at the first special figure start port during the production of an animation demo which is a standby production. It is a figure shown in. In addition, also in FIG. 29, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is illustrated, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted.

At the timing shown in FIG. 30A, the symbol variation display of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is being executed, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is a small hit. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (a), the decorative symbol variation display is performed according to the symbol variation display of the special figure 1. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 30A, since the symbol variation display of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, the fourth symbol / reserved number in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the display area 284, a blinking “−” indicating that the symbol is changing is displayed in both the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 1 and the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 2 to indicate the fact.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 30 is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 is on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. Is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lighting of the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, the number of holdings of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284, and the number of holding icons of special drawing 1. The number of holdings of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284.

At the timing shown in FIG. 30A, since the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is not held, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. On the other hand, there are two hold of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2, and the hold number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is “2”.

Further, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 30A, it is shown that the stage is shifted to “Stage A” which is different from the default stage where the normal background is displayed. In the "stage A", at least the effect content in the symbol variation display is different from that of the default stage, and it may be possible to provide the player with a variety of playability. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 30 (b) to 30 (g) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 30 (b) to 30 (g) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 28 (b) to 28 (g) except that the stage is "stage A", and thus the description thereof will be omitted. To do.

In this production example, when the first special figure start port (upper) 230 is subsequently won at the timing shown in FIG. 30 (g), the start winning sound is output from the speaker 120 as shown in FIG. 30 (h). However, the decorative symbol display device 208 does not start the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the present embodiment, the starting winning sound is not the starting winning sound corresponding to the default stage, but the starting winning sound corresponding to the stage A is output. That is, in this production example, when a small hit related to the special figure 2 occurs during the animation demo, and a prize is won at the start port of the special figure 1 during the small hit game related to the small hit, the animation demo is performed. It is shown that the start winning sound corresponding to the stage before the transition is output.

After that, when the small hit game ends during the execution of the animation demo, as shown in FIG. 30 (i), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 based on the hold starts, and the symbol variation of the special figure 1 that has been interrupted starts. The display resumes. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the display of the animation demo to the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280.

FIG. 31 is an example of an effect centered on a decorative symbol display device, and shows a stepwise example of an effect when a game ball wins a prize at the first special figure start port during the effect of a symbol demo which is a standby effect. It is a figure. Also in FIG. 31, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special diagram 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted. Further, since the effects shown in FIGS. 31 (a) to 31 (c) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 28 (a) to 28 (c), the description thereof will be omitted.

After that, the symbol fluctuation time of the special figure 2 elapses during the execution of the symbol demo, and the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a small hit symbol (for example, "special symbol g") at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (d). It is shown. In line with this, "Δ" is displayed in the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 2 of the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284. However, since the symbol demonstration is still being carried out, it may be difficult for the player to notice that the small hit was made in Special Figure 2. After that, when the symbol display time of the special figure 2 elapses, as shown in FIG. 31 (e), the small hit game is started, but in the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol demo is continuously executed and right-handed. The display is overlaid on the display of the design demo.

Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is interrupted during the small hit game executed due to the occurrence of the small hit in the special figure 2, and therefore, for example, the timing shown in FIG. 31 (f). Then, when the first special figure start opening (top) 230 is won, as shown in FIG. 31 (g), the start winning sound (default start winning sound) is output from the speaker 120, and the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed. Although one hold icon h11 is displayed in the area 281, the decorative symbol display device 208 does not start the variable display of the decorative symbol. In addition, in the special figure 1, the winning or failing judgment is made by winning the game ball to the first special figure starting port (upper) 230, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, but it is immediate during the small hit game. Will be interrupted. Further, as will be described later, when a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the standby of the special figure 1 and the first special figure 1 is held during the small hit game, the first hold icon h11 Is increased by the increasing animation. Further, in this production example, when the game ball wins the first special figure start port (upper) 230 during the symbol demonstration during the small hit game, the characters "display menu with push button" are erased, but they are displayed. The state may be maintained.

After that, when the small hit game ends during the execution of the symbol demo, as shown in FIG. 31 (h), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 based on the hold starts, and the symbol variation of the special figure 1 that has been interrupted starts. The display resumes. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the change icon display area 280 and the change icon is changed. It becomes h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

As described above, in this production example, if a small hit game occurs during the execution of the symbol demo, the symbol demo continues during the small hit game, and the special feature is performed while the small hit game is performed during the symbol demo. Even if a game ball wins a prize at the starting port according to FIG. 1, the symbol demonstration is further continued without starting the variable display of the decorative symbol. In addition, if a game ball wins a prize at the start opening of Special Figure 1 during the small hit game during the symbol demonstration, the icon (variable icon / hold icon) related to the start prize is displayed. There is.

FIG. 32 is an example of an effect centered on a decorative symbol display device, and is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect of a one-shot notification notice effect. In addition, also in FIG. 32, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special diagram 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted. The effects shown in FIGS. 32 (a) to 32 (c) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 22 (a) to 22 (c), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In this state, on the menu screen shown in FIG. 32 (c), "member registration", "password input", "passcode issuance", "volume / brightness setting", and "setting suggestion setting" can be performed. After that, the operation key unit 190 is operated by the player, and when the "setting suggestion setting" is selected and determined by the cursor as shown in FIG. 32 (d), the setting is made as shown in FIG. 32 (e). Move to the suggestion setting screen. On the setting suggestion setting screen, the setting suggestion mode and the one-shot notification mode can be set. In the setting suggestion mode setting, it is possible to set the setting suggestion mode such as the appearance frequency of the setting suggestion effect and the reliability at the time of appearance. In the one-shot notification mode setting, if the jackpot random number value extracted at the time of starting winning is a big hit, whether to enable the one-shot notification mode that executes the one-shot notification effect to notify the player to that effect. It can be set whether or not. The items for which the one-shot notification mode can be set are not limited to this, and appropriate items can be set.

On the setting suggestion setting screen shown in FIG. 32 (e), when the operation key unit 190 is operated by the player and the "one-shot notification mode setting" is selected and determined by the cursor, as shown in FIG. 32 (f). Then, the screen shifts to the one-shot notification mode setting screen. On the one-shot notification mode setting screen, ON / OFF of the one-shot notification mode can be set. In this production example, as shown in FIG. 32 (f), it is shown that "one-shot notification ON" is selected and determined by the cursor.

FIG. 32 (g) shows a state in which the menu screen is then closed and the symbol demo is switched to. After that, when the game ball wins the first special figure start port (upper) 230, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 starts as shown in FIG. 32 (h), and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the decorative symbol. Fluctuation display of is started. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, when the game ball wins a prize at the first special figure start port (upper) 230 and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started during the display of the symbol demo, the first After the increase animation of the hold icon h11 is omitted and the hold icon is displayed at the display position of the first hold icon h11, the hold icon is displayed as a variable icon and changes from the first hold icon h11 by the movement animation. Move to the icon display area 280. After that, two "decorations 4" are brought together to reach the reach in the manner shown in FIGS. 14 (k) to 14 (o), and then the SP reach is performed as shown in FIG. 32 (i). At this time, the icons related to the symbol variation display (variation icon, hold icon) are deleted. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (j), when the game ball wins the first special figure start port 230 and it is determined that the jackpot random number value extracted in connection with the winning is a jackpot. As shown in FIG. 32 (k), the start winning sound "Kyuin!" Is output from the speaker 120. That is, it is shown that the one-shot notification effect is performed by the output of the winning sound. The one-shot notification effect is not limited to voice output, and may be, for example, a notification based on a light emitting mode by 442,452 by various lamps, or a one-shot notification mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be a combination of two or more of these.

As described above, in this production example, for example, when the icon related to the symbol variation display is hidden, such as SP reach, it is shown that one notification may be made when there is a start prize. ing.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a prize is won in the first special figure start port (upper) 230 during the execution of the small hit game during the animation demo, the big hit random value extracted in association with the prize becomes a big hit. Even if it is determined to be a thing, the one-shot notification effect is not performed, but it may be performed.

FIG. 33 is an example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208, and is another case where the game ball wins a prize at the first special figure start port (upper) 230 during the effect of the symbol demo which is the standby effect. It is a figure which shows the production example step by step. In addition, also in FIG. 33, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is illustrated, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special diagram 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 33A, the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol during the execution of the symbol demo, and after the big hit start effect period elapses, the gate entry standby state is set. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (a), the characters "Right-handed and pass through the jackpot generation gate!" Are displayed at the bottom of the display screen over the display of the symbol demo. That is, it is shown that the display for promoting the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is performed on top of the display of the symbol demo. In addition, in the special figure 1, the stop display is performed with the out-of-order symbol. Further, in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the display screen, since the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with the missing symbol, "x" is displayed in the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 1. Since the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, "○" is displayed in the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 2.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 33A is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon of special figure 1 is placed on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. A display area 281 is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lighting of the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, the number of holdings of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284, and the number of holding icons of special drawing 1. The number of holdings of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284. At the timing shown in FIG. 33A, the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 0, and the number of reservations in special drawing 2 is 2.

Then, for example, the player may not realize that he should hit right. However, since the first sub-control unit 400 knows that the right-handed strike should be made by the firing position command transmitted from the main control unit 300, the player continuously strikes the left-hand side, and FIG. 33 When the game ball wins the first special figure start port (top) 230 at the timing shown in (b), as shown in FIG. 33 (c), during the execution of the symbol demonstration, the speaker 120 "hits right". A warning announcement (warning notification) saying "Please!" Is output, and the above-mentioned right-handed promotion animation is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). This may cause the player to realize that he needs to hit right. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (c), it is shown that the first hold icon h11 is displayed by performing the increase animation and is overlapped with the board image BAN. As shown in FIG. 33 (c'), when a game ball wins a prize at the first special figure start port (upper) 230 during the symbol demo, the display is switched from the symbol demo display to the gate entry standby effect. May be good. After that, when the game ball passes through the jackpot generation gate 252 at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (d), the jackpot game starts as shown in FIG. 33 (e), the first round starts, and the first variable winning opening 234a (or the second variable winning opening 235a) opens. In this production example, the warning notification is performed by voice and display, but it may be a warning notification by voice only, a warning notification by display only, or a warning notification by lamp only. May be good. Further, in this production example, in the gate approach standby state, that is, in the state where a display prompting the game ball to pass through the jackpot generation gate 252 by hitting right during the execution of the symbol demo is displayed, the first special figure When a game ball wins a prize at the start opening (top) 230, the start prize sound that may normally be output such as the default start prize sound and the start prize sound of the look-ahead notice is not output, and a warning announcement is output. Has been done. Although the start sound of the look-ahead notice is not output, the default start winning sound may be output.

In this production example, when the game ball wins the first special figure start port (upper) 230 in the gate entry standby state, the right-handed promotion animation is displayed for a predetermined time, but the right-handed promotion animation starts once. If so, it may be continuously displayed until the game ball passes through the jackpot generation gate 252. Further, the right-handed promotion animation may or may not be displayed every time a game ball wins a prize at the first special figure start port (upper) 230. In addition, the right-handed promotion animation may be displayed only when the number of holds increases, and the right-handed promotion animation may be displayed even when the game ball wins the first special figure start port (top) 230 in the hold full state. May be displayed.

FIG. 34 is an example of the production centered on the decorative symbol display device 208, and is still another production example when the game ball wins a prize at the first special figure start port 230 during the production of the animation demo which is the standby production. It is a figure which shows step by step. In addition, also in FIG. 34, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted.

The above-mentioned animation demo is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (a). Further, in the state shown in FIG. 34A, the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol during the execution of the animation demo, and after the big hit start effect period has elapsed, the gate entry standby state is set. In the production example shown in FIG. 34, when the gate entry standby state is entered during the execution of the animation demo, the characters "Right-handed and pass through the jackpot generation gate!" Are not displayed. In addition, in the special figure 1, the stop display is performed with the out-of-order symbol. Further, in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the display screen, since the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with the missing symbol, "x" is displayed in the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 1. Since the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, "○" is displayed in the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 2. Further, the mini symbol displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols on the outskirts of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" which is the combination of the decorative symbols at the time of stop display. ..

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 34 (a) is a normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), but since the animation demo is being executed, the variable icon display area 280 and the special figure The hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 is hidden. The number of holds is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 and the number of holds of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, and the number of holds of special figure 2 is shown in special figure 2. It is represented by the number of lights of the hold lamp 220 and the number of holds displayed in the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284. At the timing shown in FIG. 34 (a), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 0, and the number of holds in special figure 2 is 2.

Then, for example, the player may not realize that he should hit right during the anime demo. However, in the first sub-control unit 400, since it is known that the right-handed strike should be performed by the firing position command transmitted from the main control unit 300, the player continuously strikes the left-hand side, and FIG. 34 When the game ball wins the first special figure start port (top) 230 at the timing shown in (b), as shown in FIG. 34 (c), during the execution of the animation demo, the speaker 120 "hits right". A warning announcement (warning notification) saying "Please!" Is output, and the above-mentioned right-handed promotion animation is displayed. As a result, the player may notice that it is a big hit and needs to hit right, which may make the player feel the unexpectedness of the game. As shown in FIG. 34 (c'), when a game ball wins a prize at the first special figure start port (top) 230 during the animation demo, the display is switched from the animation demo display to the gate entry standby effect. May be good. After that, when the game ball passes through the jackpot generation gate 252 at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (d), the jackpot game starts as shown in FIG. 34 (e), the first round starts, and the first variable winning opening 234a (or the second variable winning opening 235a) opens. In this production example, the warning notification is performed by voice and display, but it may be a warning notification by voice only, a warning notification by display only, or a warning notification by lamp only. May be good.

FIG. 35 is an example of an effect centered on a decorative symbol display device, and is an example of an effect when a power failure / recovery occurs after a gate entry standby state is entered during an animation demo production which is a standby effect. It is a figure which shows step by step. In addition, also in FIG. 35, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is illustrated, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special diagram 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted.

The above-mentioned animation demo is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (1a). Further, in the state shown in FIG. 35 (1a), the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol during the execution of the animation demo, and after the big hit start effect period elapses, the gate entry standby state is set. In the production example shown in FIG. 35 (1a), when the gate entry standby state is entered during the execution of the animation demo, the characters "Right-handed and pass through the jackpot generation gate!" Are not displayed. In addition, in the special figure 1, the stop display is performed with the out-of-order symbol. Further, in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the display screen, since the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with the missing symbol, "x" is displayed in the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 1. Since the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, "○" is displayed in the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 2. Further, the mini symbol displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols on the outskirts of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" which is the combination of the decorative symbols at the time of stop display. ..

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 35 (1a) is a normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), but since the animation demo is being executed, the variable icon display area 280 and the special figure The hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 is hidden. The number of holds is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 and the number of holds of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284, and the number of holds of special figure 2 is shown in special figure 2. It is represented by the number of lights of the hold lamp 220 and the number of holds displayed in the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284. At the timing shown in FIG. 34 (a), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 0, and the number of holds in special figure 2 is 2.

After that, for example, due to a power failure of the amusement store due to the influence of a lightning strike or the like, a power failure occurs in the pachinko machine 100 at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (1b), and then the power is restored, as shown in FIG. 35 (1c). In addition, the pachinko machine 100 is backed up. At this time, a power recovery command and a firing position command are transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, and the first sub control unit 400 follows these commands and displays the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 35 (1c). At 208, a design demo is started instead of an animation demo, and the so-called first appearance in the morning of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1" is displayed and a right-handed display is displayed. In addition, the power recovery command also includes the number of symbol variation displays held in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, respectively, and the number of holds in Special Figure 1 is displayed in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284. In the hold number display of the special figure 2 and the special figure 2, the hold number before the power failure occurs is displayed, respectively. Further, since the power recovery command does not include information indicating that the game ball is being monitored for passing through the jackpot generating gate 252, the display promoting the passage of the jackpot generating gate 252 returns to power failure. It is also hidden afterwards. In this case, for example, when a game ball wins a prize in the first special drawing start port (upper) 230, the effects shown in FIGS. 26 (e) and after are performed, and an effect for urging a right-handed hit is performed. It becomes.

Next, another effect pattern applicable to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 (2a) to 35 (2c). The control state shown in FIG. 35 (2a) is the same as the control state shown in FIG. 35 (1a), and the animation demo is displayed. However, in this production example, the gate entry standby is performed during the execution of the animation demo. When the state is reached, the characters "Right-handed and pass through the jackpot generation gate!" Are displayed.

After that, a power failure occurs in the pachinko machine 100 at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (2b), and then when the power is restored, the pachinko machine 100 is backed up and restored as shown in FIG. 35 (2c). At this time, a power recovery command and a firing position command are transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, and the first sub control unit 400 follows these commands and displays the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 35 (2c). At 208, a design demo is started instead of an animation demo, and the so-called first appearance in the morning of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1" is displayed, and a right-handed display is displayed. In addition, the power recovery command also includes the number of symbol variation displays held in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, respectively, and the number of holds in Special Figure 1 is displayed in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284. In the hold number display of the special figure 2 and the special figure 2, the hold number before the power failure occurs is displayed, respectively. Here, in this production example, the power recovery command may include information indicating that the game ball is being monitored for passing through the jackpot generation gate 252, as shown in FIG. 35 (2c). , A display promoting the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252, which was displayed before the power failure, may be displayed. In this case, for example, when a game ball wins a prize in the first special drawing start port (upper) 230, the effects shown in FIGS. 26 (e) and after are performed, and an effect for urging a right-handed hit is performed. It becomes. Further, when a power failure / recovery occurs in the state shown in FIG. 35 (1a) or FIG. 35 (2a) and a power recovery command is received, “preparing for recovery” as shown in FIG. 35 (2b-1). The character "" may be displayed, and the resetting display may be performed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds after receiving the power recovery command, or until another command is received after receiving the power recovery command. The display shown in FIGS. 35 (1c) and 35 (2c) may be started after the display. In addition, when the return-in-time display is displayed, the characters "Right-handed to pass through the jackpot generation gate!" May be displayed, or the right-handed display may be displayed. In addition, another right-handed display may or may not be displayed. Alternatively, another right-handed display may be displayed in addition to the above display, or only one of them may be displayed.

FIG. 36 is an example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208, and is a diagram showing step by step how the pre-reading notice effect at the time of winning is being performed. In addition, also in FIG. 36, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special diagram 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted.

At the timing shown in FIG. 36 (a), the symbol variation display of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is being executed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (a), the decorative symbol variation display is performed according to the symbol variation display of the special figure 1. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 36A, since the symbol variation display of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, the fourth symbol / reserved number in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the display area 284, a blinking “−” indicating that the symbol is changing is displayed in both the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 1 and the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 2 to indicate the fact.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 36 is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 is on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. Is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lighting of the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, the number of holdings of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284, and the number of holding icons of special drawing 1. The number of holdings of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284.

At the timing shown in FIG. 36A, since the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is not held, the hold icon of special figure 1 is not displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1. On the other hand, there are two hold of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2, and the hold number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is “2”.

After that, when the game ball wins the first special figure start port (top) 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 36 (b), the number of reservations in special figure 1 increases by one, and as shown in FIG. 36 (c), The start winning sound "Poco!" Is output from the speaker 120, and the increase animation is started in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. .. In addition, the lamp provided at the first special figure start port (upper) 230 emits white light, indicating that the first special figure start port (upper) 230 has won a prize. The start winning sound shown in FIG. 36 (c) and the light emitting mode of the lamp at the first special figure start port (top) 230 are both default modes.

After that, when a game ball further wins a prize at the first special figure start port (top) 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 36 (d), the number of reservations in special figure 1 increases by one, as shown in FIG. 36 (e). , "Pirorirori-n!" Is output from the speaker 120, and the increase animation is started in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second hold icon h12 is displayed. Is displayed. It should be noted that this start-up prize sound is a start-up prize sound of the pre-reading notice, and suggests that, for example, a super reach may occur or a symbol variation display that may be a big hit is suspended. Here, the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 36E is the default display mode, but it may be the display mode of the look-ahead notice. Further, although the second hold icon h12 is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, the start winning sound may be the default starting winning sound. Further, in this production example, the lamp provided at the first special figure start port (upper) 230 emits red light, and it is produced that the first special figure start port (upper) 230 has won a prize. It is suggested that the symbol variation display related to the winning of the first special figure start port (top) 230 is a look-ahead notice. In this production example, the pre-reading notice by the start winning sound and the pre-reading notice by the light emission of the lamp of the first special figure start port (top) 230 are given, but the pre-reading notice only by the start winning sound may be given. Alternatively, only the look-ahead notice may be given by the light emission of the lamp of the first special figure start port (top) 230, or only the look-ahead notice may be given by displaying the hold icon. The look-ahead notice may be given in a manner in which two or more of the look-ahead notices are combined. Further, the mode of the start winning sound of the pre-reading notice is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and a plurality of types may be prepared. For example, the degree of expectation for the big hit may be different depending on the type of voice. In addition, there may be a plurality of types of display modes for the look-ahead notice of the hold icon, and the degree of expectation for a big hit may differ depending on the display mode. Further, the light emitting mode of the pre-reading notice of the lamp of the first special figure start port (top) 230 is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and various modes such as color, blinking mode, and presence / absence of lighting may be adopted. The expectation for the big hit may be different. Further, the lamp that emits light at the time of winning a start is not limited to the first special figure start port (upper) 230, and may be performed by another lamp, or the lamp with the first special figure start port (upper) 230. It may be done by a combination.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the first special figure start port (upper) 230, the start winning effect (default winning effect or look-ahead) by the lamp provided at the first special figure start port (upper) 230. The prize-winning effect of the notice) was performed, but for example, in the gate entry waiting state, that is, during the execution of the decorative symbol variation effect, the pattern demo, or the animation demo, right-handed to generate a big hit gate. Even if the game ball wins in the first special figure start port (upper) 230 in the state where the display prompting the passage of the game ball to 252 is displayed, even if the start prize effect by the lamp is not performed. Alternatively, the default winning effect may be performed, but the pre-reading notice winning effect may not be performed. Further, for example, in the gate entry standby state, that is, during the execution of the decorative symbol variation effect, the execution of the symbol demo, or the execution of the animation demo, the game ball is urged to pass through the jackpot generation gate 252 by hitting right. In the state where the display is displayed, even if the game ball wins in the first special figure start port (upper) 230, only the default start winning sound is output so that the start winning sound of the look-ahead notice is not output. Alternatively, none of the start winning sounds may be output.

FIG. 37 is an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device, and is a diagram showing a stepwise example of the effect when the power saving mode is entered. Also in FIG. 37, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special diagram 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted.

37 (1a) to 37 (1e) show the transition to the power saving mode in the standby state in the normal gaming state.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (1a), the combination of decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 37 (a), both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. To that effect, "x" is displayed in both the symbol changing notification area of Special Figure 1 and the symbol changing notification area of Special Figure 2.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 37 (1a) is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon of special figure 1 is placed on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. A display area 281 is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lighting of the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, the number of holdings of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284, and the number of holding icons of special drawing 1. The number of holdings of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284. At the timing shown in FIG. 37 (1a), the number of reservations in both Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is 0. Further, in this effect example, since the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is not performed and the state is in a standby state, a symbol demonstration as a standby effect is performed.

When a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the display of the symbol demo, the display is switched from the symbol demo to the animation demo as shown in FIG. 37 (1b).

After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed from the start of the display of the symbol demo, the mode may shift to the power saving mode as shown in FIG. 37 (1c). When the mode shifts to the power saving mode, for example, the decorative lamp (LED) is turned off, the emission brightness is suppressed to a predetermined ratio (for example, 30%), or the decorative lamp that emits light is limited to a part. The energy output amount of the pachinko machine 100 is suppressed, for example, the emission brightness of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 configured by the LCD is suppressed to a predetermined ratio (for example, 50%) by performing lamp control such as. Various settings are made for this. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters "ECO mode" to notify the player that the power saving mode is set. In this effect example, when the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190 is operated in the power saving mode, the screen can be moved to the setting screen, and the characters "display menu with push button" are displayed. ing. Further, in this effect example, when the mode is shifted to the power saving mode, for example, the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190 is operated to shift to the setting screen, or the game ball enters the first special figure start ports 230 and 231. It continues until the symbol variation display is started, but it is not limited to this, for example, even if the mode is changed to the power saving mode and a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses, the animation demo or the symbol demo is started. Good.

After that, in the power saving mode, when the game ball wins the first special figure start port (upper) 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (1d), the first special figure display device 212 as shown in FIG. 37 (1e). In addition to starting the symbol variation display in, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the display of the animation demo being executed to the decorative symbol variation display. In this production example, when a game ball wins a prize at the first special figure start ports 230 and 231 during a symbol demo, an animation demo, or a power saving mode, and the symbol variation display starts on the first special symbol display device 212. After the increase animation of the first hold icon h11 is omitted and displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable icon display is performed from the display position of the first hold icon h11 by the moving animation. It moves to the display position of the variable icon h0 in the area 280.

37 (2a) to 37 (2e) show a state of shifting to the power saving mode in the gate approach standby state in the normal gaming state.
It is abbreviated.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (2a), the combination of decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 37 (2a), the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol during the execution of the symbol demo, and after the big hit start effect period elapses, the gate entry standby state is set. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (2a), the characters "Right-handed and pass through the jackpot generation gate!" Are displayed at the bottom of the display screen over the display of the symbol demo. That is, it is shown that the display for promoting the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is performed on top of the display of the symbol demo. In addition, in the special figure 1, the stop display is performed with the out-of-order symbol. Further, in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the display screen, since the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with the missing symbol, "x" is displayed in the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 1. Since the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, "○" is displayed in the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 2.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 37 (2a) is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon of special figure 1 is placed on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. A display area 281 is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lighting of the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, the number of holdings of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284, and the number of holding icons of special drawing 1. The number of holdings of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284. At the timing shown in FIG. 37 (1a), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 0, and the number of holds in special figure 2 is 2.

After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed from the start of the display of the symbol demo, the mode may shift to the power saving mode as shown in FIG. 37 (2c). In this production example, following the symbol demonstration, the characters "Right-handed and pass through the big hit-generating gate!" Are displayed, which prompts the player to hit the game ball through the jackpot-generating gate 252. It should be noted that the display prompting the game ball to pass through the jackpot generation gate 252 may not be displayed. Further, in this effect example, in the power saving mode, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters "Right-handed and pass through the jackpot generation gate!", But the display of the characters is displayed separately. When displaying by means, the brightness of the notification means may not be reduced in order to clarify the notification by the notification means, or the brightness of the notification means may be reduced. Good.

After that, when the game ball passes through the jackpot generation gate 252 at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (2d), the jackpot game starts as shown in FIG. 37 (2e), the first round starts, and the second variable winning opening 235a (or the first variable winning opening 234a) opens.

FIG. 38 is an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208, and is a diagram illustrating an example of a light emitting pattern of the lamp according to the effect state. Also in FIG. 38, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special diagram 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted.

At the timing shown in FIG. 38 (a), the symbol variation display of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is being executed, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is a small hit. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (a), the decorative symbol variation display is performed according to the symbol variation display of the special figure 1. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 38 (a), since the symbol variation display of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, the fourth symbol / reserved number in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the display area 284, a blinking “−” indicating that the symbol is changing is displayed in both the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 1 and the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 2 to indicate the fact.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 38 is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 is on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. Is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lighting of the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, the number of holdings of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284, and the number of holding icons of special drawing 1. The number of holdings of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284.

At the timing shown in FIG. 38 (a), since the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is not held, the hold icon of special figure 1 is not displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1. On the other hand, there are two hold of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2, and the hold number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is “2”.

Further, as shown in FIG. 38A, the frame lamp 122 is subjected to a decorative symbol variation effect. That is, it is shown that the blinking mode changes according to the progress of the decorative pattern variation effect with an appropriate emission color. In addition, BGM is output from the speaker 120. This BGM is output during the decorative symbol variation effect, and continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) even after the decorative symbol variation effect ends and the standby state is entered. The BGM may be terminated when the standby state is reached.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (b), the combination of the decorative symbols that are out of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed, and the player is notified that the decoration is out of alignment. .. On the other hand, in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display is still continuously performed, but in the normal gaming state, the effect display corresponding to the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is not performed. It should be noted that the frame lamp 122 is produced in accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbol, for example, the effect of emitting light in red is performed. Further, the speaker 120 outputs a voice "Jean" in accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbol to notify that the decorative symbol has stopped and displayed.

A misaligned symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 212, and when the symbol display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the special diagram 1 elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (c) performs a standby effect. The design demo of is started. At this time, in the frame lamp 122, an effect matching the symbol demo is started, and for example, a blinking effect in which the brightness gradually increases in a predetermined color (for example, white) and then the brightness gradually decreases is repeatedly performed. It should be noted that the speaker 120 shows that the BGM is continuously output even after the decorative symbol variation effect is completed. In this production example, a symbol demo is performed when there is no command (for example, a symbol variation start command) for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after receiving the special symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300. However, the demo display command can be sent and received, and the symbol demo may be started when the display command is received. Further, when the hold number is transmitted in any event in the main control unit 300 such as the special figure fluctuation stop command, the hold information may be determined and immediately shifted to the symbol demo. After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the display of the symbol demo was started, the display is switched from the symbol demo to the animation demo as shown in FIG. 38 (d). When the animation demo is started, the frame lamp 122 starts the effect according to the animation demo, and for example, the effect of blinking in a predetermined color (for example, yellow) is performed. The BGM output from the speaker 120 has ended at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (d), and is in a silent state. The timing at which the BGM ends may be the time when a predetermined time has elapsed since the previous symbol was stopped and displayed, or the time when the symbol demo is changed to the animation demo. Further, the BGM may be terminated at the timing before the transition to the symbol demo and the transition to the animation demo. Further, the BGM may be terminated in connection with the transition from the symbol demo to the symbol demo after the symbol is stopped and displayed, or the BGM may be terminated in connection with the transition from the symbol demo to the animation demo. Further, for example, if the BGM is turned off during the decorative symbol variation effect and the decorative symbol variation effect ends with the BGM turned off, the BGM will continue to be off even after the symbol stop display is displayed. You may do so. Further, when the BGM performs the loop performance for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), the BGM may be turned off when the loop effect is completed after the transition to the symbol demo.

After that, when the animation demo ends, the symbol demo starts as shown in FIG. 38 (e). At this time, the frame lamp 122 starts producing the effect according to the symbol demo, but the silent state continues, and there is no sound output from the speaker 120. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (e), the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed at the small hit symbol (for example, "special figure g"), and in accordance with this, the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 is displayed. “Δ” is displayed in the notification area during symbol change in Special Figure 2. However, since the symbol demonstration is still being carried out, it may be difficult for the player to notice that the small hit was made in Special Figure 2. After that, when the symbol display time of the special figure 2 elapses, as shown in FIG. 38 (f), the small hit game is started, but in the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol demo is continuously executed and right-handed. The display is overlaid on the display of the design demo. Even at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (f), the frame lamp 122 continues to produce the effect according to the symbol demonstration, and the silence state is maintained.

Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is interrupted during the small hit game executed due to the occurrence of the small hit in the special figure 2, and therefore, for example, the timing shown in FIG. 38 (g). Then, when the first special figure start opening (upper) 230 is won, as shown in FIG. 38 (h), the start winning sound (default start winning sound) is output from the speaker 120, and the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed. One hold icon h11 is displayed in the area 281 with an increase animation, but the decorative symbol display device 208 does not start the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the symbol demo is continued. In addition, the frame lamp 122 also continues to be produced according to the design demonstration, and the BGM is not started and remains silent.

In this production example, the case where the small hit game is started during the execution of the symbol demo is shown, but the same applies when the small hit game is started during the execution of the animation demo. It should be noted that the mode may be different depending on whether the small hit game is started during the execution of the symbol demo or the small hit game is started during the execution of the animation demo.

Further, in this production example, the light emitting mode of the lamp in the design demo and the light emitting mode of the lamp in the animation demo are different, but the same light emitting mode (common light emitting mode) may be used. Further, although the lamp light emitting mode in the symbol demo and the lamp light emitting mode in the animation demo are each one type, there may be a plurality of types. For example, in the design demo, the light emission corresponding to the production stage when the symbol is stopped. The lamp may be made to blink in the embodiment.

FIG. 39 is an example of the production centered on the decorative symbol display device 208, and is a diagram showing stepwise examples of the production of the increasing animation and the moving animation. In addition, also in FIG. 39, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is illustrated, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special diagram 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220. , And the drawing of the general drawing hold lamp 216 are omitted.

39 (1a) to 39 (1e) show an example of an effect when a game ball wins a prize at the first special figure start port (top) 230 during a symbol demonstration in a normal game state.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (1a), the combination of decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 39 (1a), both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. To that effect, "x" is displayed in both the symbol changing notification area of Special Figure 1 and the symbol changing notification area of Special Figure 2.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 39 (1a) is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon of special figure 1 is placed on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. A display area 281 is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lighting of the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, the number of holdings of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284, and the number of holding icons of special drawing 1. The number of holdings of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284. At the timing shown in FIG. 39 (1a), the number of reservations for both Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is 0. Further, in this effect example, since the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is not performed and the state is in a standby state, a symbol demonstration as a standby effect is performed.

After that, when the game ball wins the first special figure start port (upper) 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 39 (1b) during the execution of the symbol demonstration, the first special figure is displayed as shown in FIG. 39 (1c). The symbol variation display is started in the device 212, and the decorative symbol variation effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, in this production example, the hold icon related to the winning of the game ball to the first special figure start port (upper) 230 is temporarily displayed at the position where the first hold icon h11 is displayed. Since it is displayed as a fluctuation icon when the fluctuation of 1 starts, the increase animation is omitted. Then, the hold icon once displayed on the first hold icon h11 is displayed as a variable icon, and the variable icon display area 280 is displayed by the movement animation as shown in FIGS. 39 (1c) to 39 (1e). The display to move to is made.

As described above, in this production example, when the game ball wins the first special figure start ports 230 and 232 during the execution of the symbol demo in the normal game state, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and in accordance with this, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. The decorative pattern variation effect display is started, but for the hold icon, the increase animation is omitted in order to suppress the delay of the effect due to both the increase animation and the movement animation, so that the effect is matched. It may be possible to eliminate the discomfort.

FIGS. 39 (2a) to 39 (2g) show a case where a game ball wins a prize at the first special figure start port (top) 230 in a state where a symbol demonstration is performed during a small hit game in a normal game state. An example of the production is shown.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (2a), the combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 39 (2a), the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed on the outskirts, and the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed on the small hit, and the second in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. 4 In the symbol / hold number display area 284, “x” is displayed in the symbol changing notification area of special figure 1 and “△” is displayed in the symbol changing notification area of special figure 2 to indicate that fact. ing. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 39 (2a), it is shown that the game is in a small hit game state.

Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 39 (2a) is the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the hold icon of special figure 1 is placed on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. A display area 281 is provided.

In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of special figure 1 is also shown by the number of lighting of the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, the number of holdings of special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284, and the number of holding icons of special drawing 1. The number of holdings of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284. At the timing shown in FIG. 39 (2a), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 0, and the number of holds in special figure 2 is 2. Further, in this effect example, since the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is not performed and the state is in a standby state, a symbol demonstration as a standby effect is performed.

After that, during the small hit game executed due to the occurrence of the small hit in special figure 2, the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is interrupted. Therefore, for example, at the timing shown in FIG. 39 (2b), the first special When the game ball wins the starting port (top) 230, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 as shown in FIG. 39 (2c), but the decorative symbol display device 208 In, the variable display of the decorative symbol is not started. In addition, in the special figure 1, the winning or failing judgment is made by winning the game ball to the first special figure starting port (upper) 230, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, but it is immediate during the small hit game. Will be interrupted. Further, in this production example, a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the standby state of the special figure 1, and the first special figure 1 is held during the small hit game. Therefore, FIGS. 39 (2c) to As shown in FIG. 2e, the hold icon is increased and displayed by the increase animation, and the hold icon is displayed at the display position of the first hold icon h11.

After that, when the small hit game ends during the execution of the symbol demo, as shown in FIG. 39 (2f), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 based on the hold starts, and the symbol variation of the special figure 1 that has been interrupted starts. The display resumes. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is started, and as shown in FIGS. 39 (2f) to 39 (2g), the hold icon h11 is at the display position of the first hold icon h11. The hold icon moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0. In addition, the decorative symbol variation effect display that matches the variation display of the special figure 1 is started.

In the above-described embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 has been mentioned as an example of the display means, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a flat panel such as an LCD or an EL display device provided in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be a display, a dot matrix LED in which LEDs are arranged in a matrix, or a function as a display means by simply arranging the LEDs and causing the LEDs to emit light. It may be present or it may be a combination thereof.

Further, the display that encourages the player to hit the right side and pass the game ball through the jackpot generation gate 252, which is displayed in the gate entry standby state, is not limited to that performed by the decorative symbol display device 208, for example. , It may be displayed on a display device (for example, a sub liquid crystal, a dot matrix LED, a notification lamp, etc.) different from the decorative symbol display device 208.

In the above description,
"The first symbol display means [for example, the first special symbol display device 212, etc.] capable of executing the first symbol variation display, and
A second symbol display means [for example, a second special symbol display device 214, etc.] capable of executing a second symbol variation display, and
A game control means [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] that can control any one of a plurality of game states.
A certain gate that a game ball can enter [for example, a jackpot generation gate 252, etc.]
A display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
It is a game table equipped with
Both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time [for example, as shown in FIG. 13A, the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212. And the symbol variation display on the second special figure display device 214 may be performed at the same time],
One of the plurality of gaming states is the first gaming state [for example, the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, etc.].
One of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state [for example, a special figure high probability state, a normal figure low probability state, etc.].
The second gaming state is a gaming state different from the first gaming state.
One of the plurality of displays is a symbol variation effect display [for example, a variation display of a decorative symbol displayed in accordance with the variation display of the special figure 1 shown in FIGS. 13 (b) to 14 (x). Production display including (decorative design variation production display), etc.]
The symbol variation effect display is a display including a variation display of a decorative symbol.
In the first gaming state, the symbol variation effect display is started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 17 (a) to 17 (c), special features. In the low-probability normal figure low-probability state, the decorative symbol variation effect display is started at the start of the variation display of special figure 1],
In the first gaming state, the symbol variation effect display corresponding to the start of the second symbol variation display is not started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20B to 20E). Special figure low probability In the normal figure low probability state, the decorative symbol variation effect display is not started at the start of the variation display of special figure 2],
After the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, a certain period [for example, the period during which the jackpot generation gate monitoring state shown in t83 to t85 of FIG. 16 is effective] is started.
Even after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the certain period is started.
When the game ball enters the certain gate in the certain period, the big hit game is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 16, during the period in which the big hit generation gate monitoring state shown in t83 to t85 is effective, it is shown in t84. When the game ball passes through the jackpot generation gate 252 at the timing, the jackpot game is started, etc.],
One of the plurality of displays is a jackpot display [for example, a display of the jackpot start effect shown in FIG. 18 (i)].
One of the plurality of displays is a gate entry promotion display [for example, a display for promoting the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252, which is shown in FIG. 18 (j), "Right-handed to pass the jackpot generation gate!" Etc.]
The gate entry promotion display is a display that prompts the game ball to enter the certain gate.
In the first gaming state, when the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the jackpot display is displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display is displayed (hereinafter, "first". Case [For example, as shown in FIGS. 18 (h) to 18 (j), after the big hit symbol is displayed in the special figure 2, the display of the big hit start effect is displayed, and then the passage of the big hit generation gate 252 is promoted. When the display to be displayed is displayed, etc.] ”),
In the first gaming state, when the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means and then the gate entry promotion display is displayed without displaying the jackpot display (hereinafter, "second". Case [For example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (d) to 19 (f), after the big hit symbol is displayed in the special figure 2, the passage of the big hit generation gate 252 is promoted without displaying the display of the big hit start effect. When the display is displayed, etc.] ”),
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Here, the first symbol display means may be capable of executing only the first symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the first symbol variation display. Further, the first symbol display means may be one that always executes the first symbol variation display, or may not execute the first symbol variation display.

Further, the second symbol display means may be capable of executing only the second symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the second symbol variation display. Further, the second symbol display means may be one that always executes the second symbol variation display, or may not execute the second symbol variation display.

Further, the game control means may be able to control only one of the plurality of game states, or may be controllable to other than any one of the plurality of game states. Further, the game control means may always control one of a plurality of game states, or may not control the game control means to any one of a plurality of game states.

Further, a certain gate may be such that only a game ball can enter, or a gate other than a game ball may also be able to enter. Further, a certain gate may be one in which the game ball always enters, or may be one in which the game ball may not enter.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of displays. Further, the display means may be one that always displays a plurality of displays, or may not display a plurality of displays.

Further, there may be a case where only the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display are executed at the same time, or other than both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display. May be running at the same time. In addition, both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may always be executed at the same time, or both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display are executed at the same time. It may not be done.

In addition, there may be a case where only the first symbol variation display is executed, there may be a case where only the second symbol variation display is executed, and the first symbol variation display and the first symbol variation display may be executed. Both of the two symbol variation displays may be executed at the same time, or both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may not be executed at the same time.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the first game state and the second game state, or can control game states other than the first game state and the second game state. It may be. Further, the game control means may always control the first game state and the second game state, or may not control the first game state and the second game state. You may.

The second gaming state may be a gaming state that is partially different from the first gaming state, or may be a gaming state that is completely different from the first gaming state.

Further, the symbol variation effect display may include only the variation display of the decorative symbol, or may include a display other than the variation display of the decorative symbol. Further, the symbol variation effect display may always include the variation display of the decorative symbol, or may not include the variation display of the decorative symbol.

Further, in the first game state, only the symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and in the first game state, the first symbol variation display is started. Depending on what is done, something other than the symbol variation effect display may be started. Further, in the first game state, the symbol variation effect display may always be started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and in the first game state, the first symbol variation display is started. Depending on what is done, the symbol variation effect display may not be started.

Further, in the first game state, the symbol variation effect display may be started only in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and in the first game state, the first symbol variation display is started. The symbol variation effect display may be started according to something other than what has been done.

Further, in the first game state, the symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of only the first symbol variation display, and in the first game state, other than the first symbol variation display. The symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the symbol variation display.

Further, in the first gaming state, it is not necessary to start only the symbol variation effect display corresponding to the start of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation display is displayed. It is not necessary to start anything other than the symbol variation effect display according to the start. Further, in the first gaming state, the symbol variation effect display corresponding to the start of the second symbol variation display does not necessarily have to be started, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation display is displayed. In some cases, the symbol variation effect display may be started according to the start.

Further, in the first gaming state, the symbol variation effect display corresponding only to the start of the second symbol variation display may not be started, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation display may be displayed. It is not necessary to start the symbol variation effect display according to something other than the start.

Further, in the first gaming state, it is not necessary to start the symbol variation effect display corresponding to the start of only the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, other than the second symbol variation display. It is not necessary to start the symbol variation effect display corresponding to the start of the symbol variation display of.

Further, only a certain period may be started after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, or a period other than a certain period after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means. May also be started. Further, a certain period may be always started after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, and a certain period is not started after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means. There may be cases.

Further, a certain period may be started only after the big hit symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, and a certain period is started other than after the big hit symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means. May be done.

Further, only a certain period may be started after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, or a period other than a certain period after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means. May also be started. Further, a certain period may always be started after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and a certain period is not started after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means. There may be cases.

Further, a certain period may be started only after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and a certain period may be started other than after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means. May be done.

Further, when a game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period, only a big hit game may be started, or when a game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period, a game other than the big hit game may be started. .. Further, the jackpot game may always be started when the game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period, or the jackpot game may not be started when the game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period. ..

Further, the big hit game may be started when the game ball enters only a certain gate in a certain period, or the big hit game may be started when the game ball enters other than a certain gate in a certain period. ..

Further, the jackpot game may be started when the game ball enters a certain gate only in a certain period, or the jackpot game may be started when the game ball enters a certain gate in a period other than a certain period. Good.

The jackpot game may be started by satisfying the requirements other than the game ball entering a certain gate in a certain period.

In addition, a certain gate may further have a function other than the function for starting the jackpot game, and may further have a function for starting the fluctuation of the normal map or the special map, for example.

Further, the gate entry promotion display may only prompt the game ball to enter a certain gate, or may also prompt other than the game ball to enter a certain gate. .. Further, the gate entry promotion display may always prompt the game ball to enter a certain gate, or may not prompt the game ball to enter a certain gate. Good.

In addition, there is only the first case (in the first game state, the jackpot display is displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and then the gate entry promotion display is displayed). It may be a case other than the first case. In addition, there may always be the first case, or there may be no first case.

In addition, there is only the second case (in the first game state, after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the gate entry promotion display is displayed without displaying the jackpot display). It may be a case other than the second case. In addition, there may always be a second case, or there may be no second case.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of displays is the first standby effect display [for example, the display of the symbol demo shown in FIG. 18C].
One of the plurality of displays is a gate entry standby state display [for example, a display of the gate entry standby effect shown in FIG. 18 (j)].
The first standby effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed.
The first standby effect display is a display including a display in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (c), in the display of the symbol demo, "decoration 5-decoration 4-". Includes the display of the mode in which the display is stopped by the combination of the out-of-order symbols of "Decoration 1"],
The gate entry waiting state display is a display that may be displayed during the certain period.
In the first case, the gate entry promotion display is superimposed on the gate entry standby state display [for example, as shown in FIG. 18J, a display that promotes the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is a gate entry. It is overlaid on the standby effect display, etc.],
In the second case, the gate entry promotion display is displayed superimposed on the first standby effect display [for example, as shown in FIG. 19 (f), a display that promotes the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is displayed. It is overlaid on the display of the design demo, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first standby effect display may be displayed only in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed. Alternatively, it may be displayed in a state other than the state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed. Further, the first standby effect display may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed. The first symbol variation display may not be executed in the first game state, and the jackpot game may not be displayed in the state where it is not executed.

Further, the first standby effect display may include only the display in the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or may include a display other than the display in the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. May be good. In addition, the first standby effect display may always include the display of the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or may not include the display of the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. You may.

Further, the gate entry waiting state display may be displayed only in a certain period, or may be displayed in a period other than a certain period. Further, the gate entry waiting state display may be always displayed for a certain period of time, or may not be displayed for a certain period of time.

Further, in the first case, the gate entry promotion display may be displayed only on the gate entry standby status display, and in the first case, the gate entry promotion display may be displayed on a display other than the gate entry standby status display. It may be displayed in an overlapping manner. Further, in the first case, the gate entry promotion display may always be superimposed on the gate entry standby status display, and in the first case, the gate entry promotion display is not superimposed on the gate entry standby status display. There may be cases.

Further, in the second case, the gate entry promotion display may be superimposed only on the first standby effect display, and in the second case, the gate entry promotion display is a display other than the first standby effect display. It may be overlaid on the screen. Further, in the second case, the gate entry promotion display may be superimposed on the first standby effect display, and in the second case, the gate entry promotion display is superimposed on the first standby effect display. It may not be displayed.

In addition, "one of the plurality of displays is a second standby effect display [for example, a display of an animation demo shown in FIG. 18 (d)].
The second standby effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed.
The second standby effect display is a display different from the first standby effect display.
After the first standby effect display is displayed, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display [for example, FIGS. 18 (c) to 18 (d)). As shown, the display of the design demo has been switched to the display of the animation demo, etc.],
The second standby effect display is a display that does not include a display in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (d), in the animation demo display, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Does not include indications of other aspects, etc.],
In the first gaming state, even if the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means while the second standby effect display is displayed, the display of the gate entry promotion display is not started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second standby effect display may be displayed only in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed. Alternatively, it may be displayed in a state other than the state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed. Further, the second standby effect display may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed. The first symbol variation display may not be executed in the first game state, and the jackpot game may not be displayed in the state where it is not executed.

In addition, the second standby effect display may be partially different from the first standby effect display, or may be entirely different from the first standby effect display.

Further, after the first standby effect display is displayed, the display may be switched only from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display, or the first standby effect display is displayed. The display may be later switched from the first standby effect display to a display other than the second standby effect display. Further, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display after the first standby effect display is displayed, or after the first standby effect display is displayed. The display may not switch from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display.

Further, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display only after the first standby effect display is displayed, or the first standby effect display may be displayed. The display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display other than after.

Further, the second standby effect display may not include only the display in the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or may not include the display other than the display in the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. There may be. In addition, the second standby effect display may not always include the display of the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or may include the display of the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. You may.

Further, in the first game state, even if the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means while the second standby effect display is displayed, even if only the display of the gate entry promotion display is not started. Well, in the first game state, even if the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means while the second standby effect display is displayed, other than the display of the gate entry promotion display is also started. It does not have to be. Further, in the first game state, even if the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means while the second standby effect display is displayed, the display of the gate entry promotion display is not always started. Alternatively, in the first game state, even if the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means while the second standby effect display is displayed, the display of the gate entry promotion display may be started. There may be.

Further, in the first game state, even if the jackpot symbol is displayed only on the second symbol display means while the second standby effect display is displayed, even if the display of the gate entry promotion display is not started. Also, in the first game state, even if a big hit symbol is displayed other than the second symbol display means while the second standby effect display is displayed, the display of the gate entry promotion display is not started. May be good.

Further, in the first game state, even if the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means only when the second standby effect display is displayed, even if the display of the gate entry promotion display is not started. Also, in the first game state, even if the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means even in a state other than the state where the second standby effect display is displayed, the display of the gate entry promotion display is started. It does not have to be.

Further, in the first game state, even if the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means while only the second standby effect display is displayed, even if the display of the gate entry promotion display is not started. Alternatively, in the first game state, even if the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means while the display other than the second standby effect display is displayed, the display of the gate entry promotion display is started. It does not have to be.

In addition, even if the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means while the second standby effect display is displayed only in the first game state, even if the display of the gate entry promotion display is not started. Even if the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means while the second standby effect display is displayed in the game state other than the first game state, the display of the gate entry promotion display starts. It does not have to be done.

In addition, "when the display is switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display after the second standby effect display is displayed (hereinafter," the third case [for example, FIG. 21 g) -As shown in the figure (h), there is a case where the display of the animation demo is switched to the display of the design demo, etc.] ".
In the third case, when the gate entry promotion display is superimposed on the first standby effect display (hereinafter, "the fourth case [for example, FIGS. 21 (g) to 21 (h))" When the display of the animation demo is switched to the display of the symbol demo, the display promoting the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is superimposed on the display of the symbol demo, etc.] ”). ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, there may be only the third case (when the display is switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display after the second standby effect display is displayed), or the third case. If not g
In some cases. In addition, there may always be a third case, or there may be no third case.

In addition, there may be only the fourth case (in the third case, the gate entry promotion display is superimposed on the first standby effect display), or there are cases other than the fourth case. You may. In addition, there may always be a fourth case, or there may be no fourth case.

Further, "In the fourth case, the display does not switch from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 21 (g) to 21 (h). , When switching from the animation demo display to the symbol demo display, if the display that promotes the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is superimposed on the symbol demo display, the symbol demo display is changed to the animation demo display. Does not switch, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the fourth case, the display does not have to be switched only from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display, and in the fourth case, the display is changed from the first standby effect display to the second. It is not necessary to switch the display to a display other than the standby effect display of. Further, in the fourth case, the display does not necessarily switch from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display, and in the fourth case, the display is changed from the first standby effect display to the second. The display may be switched to the standby effect display.

Further, only in the fourth case, the display does not have to be switched from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display. Even in cases other than the fourth case, the first standby effect display to the fourth It is not necessary to switch the display to the second standby effect display.

In addition, it is provided with "operation means [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 190, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate the player.
One of the plurality of displays is a setting display [for example, a display of the setting screen shown in FIGS. 22 (c) to 22 (d)].
The setting display is a display including a display instructing to select one option from a plurality of options.
When a certain operation is performed by the operating means while the first standby effect display is displayed, the setting display may be displayed [for example, FIGS. 22A to 22C). ), The setting screen is displayed when the effect button 136 is operated once while the design demo is displayed],
Even when the certain operation is performed by the operating means while the first standby effect display is displayed, the setting display is not displayed at least after the certain period is started [] For example, as shown in FIG. 22, after the condition device is activated (at least after the jackpot occurrence gate monitoring state is enabled), the display of the menu display (display of the setting screen) is prohibited and the setting screen is displayed. Not done, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the operating means may be provided only at a position that can be operated by the player, or may be provided at a position other than the position that can be operated by the player. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position that can be operated by the player, or may not be provided at a position that can be operated by the player.

Further, the setting display may include only a display instructing to select one option from a plurality of options, or instructing to select one option from a plurality of options. It may include a display other than the display. In addition, the setting display may always include a display instructing to select one option from a plurality of options, or select one option from a plurality of options. It may not include the indication of the same.

Further, when a certain operation is performed by the operating means while the first standby effect display is displayed, only the setting display may be displayed, or the first standby effect display is displayed. When a certain operation is performed by the operating means in the state of being set, a display other than the setting display may be displayed. Further, when a certain operation is performed by the operating means while the first standby effect display is displayed, the setting display may always be displayed, or the first standby effect display is displayed. The setting display may not be displayed when a certain operation is performed by the operating means.

Further, the setting display may be displayed only when a certain operation is performed by the operating means while the first standby effect display is displayed, or the first standby effect display is displayed. The setting display may be displayed in a case other than the case where a certain operation is performed by the operating means in the state where the setting is performed.

Further, the setting display may be displayed when a certain operation is performed by the operating means only in the state where the first standby effect display is displayed, or the first standby effect display is displayed. The setting display may be displayed when a certain operation is performed by the operating means even in a state other than the state in which the setting is performed.

In addition, the setting display may be displayed when a certain operation is performed by the operating means while only the first standby effect display is displayed, or other than the first standby effect display. The setting display may be displayed when a certain operation is performed by the operating means while the display is displayed.

Further, even when a certain operation is performed by the operating means while the first standby effect display is displayed, even if only the setting display is not displayed at least after a certain period is started. Even if a certain operation is performed by the operating means while the first standby effect display is displayed, a display other than the setting display is displayed at least after a certain period is started. It does not have to be. Further, even if a certain operation is performed by the operating means while the first standby effect display is displayed, the setting display is not always displayed even after the start of a certain period at least. Even if a certain operation is performed by the operating means while the first standby effect display is displayed, the setting display may be displayed at least after a certain period is started. There may be.

Further, even when a certain operation is performed by the operating means while the first standby effect display is displayed, the setting display may not be displayed only after the start of at least a certain period. However, even if a certain operation is performed by the operating means while the first standby effect display is displayed, even if the setting display is not displayed even after at least a certain period has started. Good.

Further, even if a certain operation is performed by the operating means only in the state where the first standby effect display is displayed, even if the setting display is not displayed at least after a certain period is started. Even if a certain operation is performed by the operating means in a state other than the state in which the first standby effect display is displayed, the setting display is displayed at least after a certain period is started. It does not have to be.

Even if a certain operation is performed by the operating means while the first standby effect display is displayed, the setting display may not be displayed after the start of a certain period. , Even when a certain operation is performed by the operating means while the first standby effect display is displayed, the setting display may not be displayed before the start of a certain period. ..

Further, the small hit game can be started after the small hit symbol [for example, "special figure g" or the like] is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 13 (b). In addition, after the special figure 2 stops and displays the small hit symbol at the timing of t23, the small hit game is started at the timing shown in t24, etc.],
The setting display is displayed when the certain operation is performed by the operating means while the first standby effect display is displayed during the execution of the small hit game [for example, FIG. 23 (1c). ) ~ As shown in Fig. (1e), the setting screen is displayed when the effect button 136 is operated once while the symbol demo is displayed during the small hit game],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, it may be possible to start only the small hit game after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display, or the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display. It may be possible to start a game other than the small hit game later. Further, the small hit game may be always started after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display, or the small hit after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display. The game may not start.

Further, the small hit game may be started only after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display, or after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display. In addition to this, it may be possible to start a small hit game.

Further, the small hit game may be started after only the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display, or a symbol other than the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display. It may be possible to start the small hit game even after it has been played.

Further, only the setting display may be displayed when a certain operation is performed by the operating means while the first standby effect display is displayed during the execution of the small hit game, or the execution of the small hit game. When a certain operation is performed by the operating means while the first standby effect display is displayed, a display other than the setting display may be displayed. Further, the setting display may always be displayed when a certain operation is performed by the operating means while the first standby effect display is displayed during the execution of the small hit game, or the execution of the small hit game. In some cases, the setting display may not be displayed when a certain operation is performed by the operating means while the first standby effect display is displayed.

Further, the setting display may be displayed only when a certain operation is performed by the operating means while the first standby effect display is displayed during the execution of the small hit game, or the execution of the small hit game. The setting display may be displayed even in cases other than the case where a certain operation is performed by the operating means while the first standby effect display is displayed.

Further, the setting display may be displayed when a certain operation is performed by the operating means only in the state where the first standby effect display is displayed during the execution of the small hit game, or the execution of the small hit game. The setting display may be displayed when a certain operation is performed by the operating means even in a state other than the state in which the first standby effect display is displayed.

Further, the setting display may be displayed when a certain operation is performed by the operating means while the first standby effect display is displayed only during the execution of the small hit game, or the execution of the small hit game. The setting display may be displayed when a certain operation is performed by the operating means while the first standby effect display is displayed even in the case other than the inside.

Further, "one of the plurality of displays is a right-handed display [for example, a right-handed display displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen shown in FIG. 23 (1c)].
The right-handed display is a display that encourages the player to hit right.
While the small hit game is being executed, the right-handed display may be displayed on top of the first standby effect display [for example, as shown in FIG. 23 (1c), the small hit game is displayed during the symbol demonstration. When started, a right-handed display will be displayed on top of the design demo display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the right-handed display may urge the player to only right-handed, or may also urge the player to do something other than right-handed. Further, the right-handed display may always urge the player to hit right, or may not urge the player to hit right.

Further, during the execution of the small hit game, only the right-handed display may be displayed overlaid on the first standby effect display, or may be superimposed on the first standby effect display during the execution of the small hit game. A display other than the right-handed display may also be displayed. Further, the right-handed display may always be displayed on top of the first standby effect display during the execution of the small hit game, or the right-handed display may be superimposed on the first standby effect display during the execution of the small hit game. It may not be displayed.

In addition, the right-handed display may be displayed on top of the first standby effect display only during the execution of the small hit game, or may be displayed on the first standby effect display other than during the execution of the small hit game. The right-handed display may be displayed in an overlapping manner.

Further, "one of the plurality of displays is a right-handed display [for example, a right-handed display displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen shown in FIG. 23 (1c)].
The right-handed display is a display that encourages the player to hit right.
In the second case, after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, a certain time [for example, the big hit start wait time (big hit start effect period) shown in t82 to t83 of FIG. 16] After the lapse of time, the gate entry promotion display is displayed superimposed on the first standby effect display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (d) to 19 (f), special figure 2 is displayed during the symbol demonstration. After the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, when the jackpot start production period elapses and the gate entry standby state is entered, a display promoting the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is displayed on top of the symbol demo display],
In the second case, after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the right-handed display is displayed on top of the first standby effect display [for example, FIGS. 19 (d) to 19 (d) to As shown in the figure (e), if the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol during the symbol demo, when the jackpot start production period starts, the right-handed display is displayed over the symbol demo display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the right-handed display may urge the player to only right-handed, or may also urge the player to do something other than right-handed. Further, the right-handed display may always urge the player to hit right, or may not urge the player to hit right.

Further, in the second case, even if the gate entry promotion display is superimposed only on the first standby effect display after a certain time has passed after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means. In the second case, after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the gate entry promotion display is superimposed on the display other than the first standby effect display after a certain time has passed. It may be displayed. Further, in the second case, even if the gate entry promotion display is always superimposed on the first standby effect display after a certain time has passed after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means. In the second case, after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the gate entry promotion display may not be superimposed on the first standby effect display after a certain period of time has passed. There may be.

Further, in the second case, even if the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means and then only the gate entry promotion display is displayed superimposed on the first standby effect display after a certain time has passed. In the second case, after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, after a certain period of time has passed, displays other than the gate entry promotion display are also displayed overlaid on the first standby effect display. May be done.

Further, in the second case, even if the gate entry promotion display is superimposed on the first standby effect display only after a certain time has passed after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means. In the second case, after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the gate entry promotion display is superimposed on the first standby effect display even after a certain time has passed. May be good.

Further, in the second case, only after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the gate entry promotion display is superimposed on the first standby effect display after a certain time has passed. In the second case, the gate entry promotion display is superimposed on the first standby effect display after a certain time has passed, in addition to after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means. It may be displayed.

Further, only in the second case, even if the gate entry promotion display is superimposed on the first standby effect display after a certain time has passed after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means. Even in cases other than the second case, the gate entry promotion display is superimposed on the first standby effect display after a certain period of time has passed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means. May be done.

Further, in the second case, after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, only the right-handed display may be displayed on top of the first standby effect display, and in the second case, only the right-handed display may be displayed. After the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, a display other than the right-handed display may be displayed on top of the first standby effect display. Further, in the second case, after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the right-handed display may always be displayed on the first standby effect display, and in the second case, the right-handed display may be displayed. After the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the right-handed display may not be displayed on top of the first standby effect display.

Further, in the second case, after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the right-handed display may be displayed overlaid only on the first standby effect display, and in the second case, the right-handed display may be displayed. After the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the right-handed display may be displayed on top of the display other than the first standby effect display.

Further, in the second case, the right-handed display may be displayed over the first standby effect display only after the jackpot symbol is displayed in the second symbol display means, and in the second case, the right-handed display may be displayed. A right-handed display may be displayed on top of the first standby effect display other than after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means.

Further, in the second case, after only the big hit symbol is displayed in the second symbol display means, the right-handed display may be displayed over the first standby effect display, and in the second case, the right-handed display may be displayed. After a symbol other than the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the right-handed display may be displayed on top of the first standby effect display.

Further, only in the second case, after the jackpot symbol is displayed in the second symbol display means, the right-handed display may be displayed over the first standby effect display, or other than the second case. Even in this case, the right-handed display may be displayed on top of the first standby effect display after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means.

Further, "The gate entry standby state display is a display that can be displayed in one of a plurality of types of display modes [for example, as shown in FIGS. 18 (j) and 18 (j'). There are multiple types of gate entry standby effects, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the gate entry standby state display may be displayable only in one of a plurality of types of display modes, or may be displayed in a display mode other than one of the plurality of display modes. However, it may be displayable. Further, the gate entry standby state display may always be displayed in one of a plurality of types of display modes, or may not be displayed in one of a plurality of types of display modes. It may be something.

In addition, "The display of one of the plurality of displays is a certain jackpot notice display.
As the certain jackpot notice display, the first jackpot notice display [for example, a jackpot notice display in which the characters "Big hit is approaching !!" is displayed] may be displayed.
As the certain big hit notice display, a second big hit notice display [for example, a big hit notice display in which the characters "Big hit is being prepared !!" shown in FIGS. 18 (g) to 18 (e) are displayed] is displayed. May be
The second jackpot notice display is different from the first jackpot notice display.
As the jackpot display, the first jackpot display [for example, the display of the jackpot start effect in which the characters "challenge jackpot" shown in FIG. 18 (i) are displayed] may be displayed.
As the jackpot display, a second jackpot display [for example, a jackpot start effect display in which the characters "big chance jackpot" shown in FIG. 18 (i') are displayed] may be displayed.
In the second gaming state, the symbol variation effect display is started in response to the start of the second symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 25, in the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. , When the symbol variation of special figure 2 is started, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, etc.],
In the second gaming state, the symbol variation effect display corresponding to the start of the first symbol variation display is not started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 23 (2c) to 23 (2d)). In the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not started even if the symbol variation of the special figure 1 is started],
In the first gaming state, when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, the second jackpot notice display is displayed. When the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the first jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed [for example, FIGS. 18 (f) to 18 (f) to the same). As shown in FIG. (J), in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, when the fluctuation display of special figure 1 is started during the big hit fluctuation of special figure 2, the characters "preparing for big hit !!" are displayed. Special figure 2 to be displayed The big hit notice is started, and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in special figure 2, the big hit start effect that the characters "Challenge big hit" is displayed is performed, and then "Waiting for big hit! There is a gate entry standby effect where the characters "" are displayed],
In the first gaming state, when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, the second jackpot notice display is displayed. When the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the second jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed [for example, FIGS. 18 (f) to 18 (f) to the same). As shown in FIGS. (H), (i') and (j'), the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 starts during the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. Then, the characters "Preparing for a big hit !!" will be displayed. Special Figure 2 Big hit notice will start, and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in Special Figure 2, the characters "Big chance big hit" will be displayed. A big hit start effect is performed, and then a gate entry standby effect is performed in which the characters "Waiting for a big chance!" Are displayed],
In the second game state, when the execution of the second symbol variation display is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, the first jackpot notice display is displayed. When the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the first jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed [for example, special figure high probability normal figure low]. In the probability state, when the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is started during the big hit fluctuation of the special figure 1, the character "Big hit is approaching !!" is displayed. The special figure 1 big hit notice is started, and the special figure 1 When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot start effect in which the characters "Challenge jackpot" is displayed is performed, and then the gate entry standby effect in which the characters "Waiting for jackpot!" Is displayed is performed. etc],
In the second game state, if the execution of the second symbol variation display is not started by the end of the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, the certain jackpot notice display is displayed. The jackpot symbol may be displayed on the first symbol display means without any notice, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without displaying the jackpot display [for example, FIGS. 23 (2c) to the same). As shown in FIG. (2f), if the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is not started by the end of the big hit fluctuation of the special figure 1 in the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state, the special figure 1 big hit notice is started. The jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in special figure 1 without any notice, and then the display that promotes the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is displayed during the symbol demonstration, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the first big hit notice display may be displayed as a certain big hit notice display, or a display other than the first big hit notice display may be displayed as a certain big hit notice display. You may. Further, the first big hit notice display may always be displayed as a certain big hit notice display, or the first big hit notice display may not be displayed as a certain big hit notice display.

In addition, only the second big hit notice display may be displayed as a certain big hit notice display, or a display other than the second big hit notice display may be displayed as a certain big hit notice display. May be good. Further, the second big hit notice display may always be displayed as a certain big hit notice display, or the second big hit notice display may not be displayed as a certain big hit notice display.

Further, the second jackpot notice display may be partially different from the first jackpot notice display, or may be entirely different.

Further, only the first jackpot display may be displayed as the jackpot display, or a display other than the first jackpot display may be displayed as the jackpot display. Further, the first jackpot display may always be displayed as the jackpot display, or the first jackpot display may not be displayed as the jackpot display.

Further, only the second jackpot display may be displayed as the jackpot display, or a display other than the second jackpot display may be displayed as the jackpot display. Further, the second jackpot display may always be displayed as the jackpot display, or the second jackpot display may not be displayed as the jackpot display.

Further, in the second gaming state, only the symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, and in the second game state, the second symbol variation display is started. Display other than the symbol variation effect display may be started according to the above. Further, in the second gaming state, the symbol variation effect display may always be started in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, and in the second game state, the second symbol variation display is started. Depending on what is done, the symbol variation effect display may not be started.

Further, in the second gaming state, the symbol variation effect display may be started only when the second symbol variation display is started, and in the second game state, the second symbol variation display is started. The symbol variation effect display may be started according to something other than what has been done.

Further, in the second gaming state, it is not necessary to start only the symbol variation effect display corresponding to the start of the first symbol variation display, and in the second game state, the first symbol variation display starts. It is not necessary to start the display other than the symbol variation effect display according to the operation. Further, in the second gaming state, the symbol variation effect display corresponding to the start of the first symbol variation display does not necessarily have to be started, and in the second gaming state, the first symbol variation display is displayed. In some cases, the symbol variation effect display may be started according to the start.

Further, in the second gaming state, the symbol variation effect display corresponding only to the start of the first symbol variation display may not be started, and in the second game state, the first symbol variation display may be displayed. It is not necessary to start the symbol variation effect display according to something other than the start.

Further, in the first game state, if the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, the second jackpot notice display is displayed and the second When the jackpot symbol is displayed on the symbol display means of, the first jackpot display may be displayed, and then only the gate entry promotion display may be displayed. In the first gaming state, the jackpot symbol may be displayed. Is displayed. If the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display, the second jackpot notice display is displayed, and the jackpot symbol is displayed in the second symbol display means. And the first jackpot display may be displayed, and then a display other than the gate entry promotion display may be displayed. Further, in the first game state, if the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, the second jackpot notice display is displayed and the second When the jackpot symbol is displayed on the symbol display means of, the first jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may always be displayed, or the jackpot symbol is displayed in the first gaming state. When the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display, the second jackpot notice display is displayed, and when the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the first The jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may not be displayed.

Further, in the first game state, if the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, the second jackpot notice display is displayed and the second When the jackpot symbol is displayed on the symbol display means of, the first jackpot display may be displayed, and the gate entry promotion display may be displayed only after that, or the jackpot symbol may be displayed in the first gaming state. Is displayed. If the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display, the second jackpot notice display is displayed, and the jackpot symbol is displayed in the second symbol display means. And the first jackpot display may be displayed, and the gate entry promotion display may be displayed in addition to that.

Further, in the first game state, if the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, the second jackpot notice display is displayed and the second When the jackpot symbol is displayed on the symbol display means of, only the first jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed. In the first gaming state, the jackpot symbol may be displayed. Is displayed. If the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display, the second jackpot notice display is displayed, and the jackpot symbol is displayed in the second symbol display means. A display other than the first jackpot display may be displayed, and then a gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

Further, in the first game state, if the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, the second jackpot notice display is displayed and the second When only the jackpot symbol is displayed in the symbol display means of, the first jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed. In the first gaming state, the jackpot symbol may be displayed. If the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display, the second jackpot notice display is displayed, and the symbol other than the jackpot symbol is displayed in the second symbol display means. When it is displayed, the first jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

Further, in the first game state, if the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, only the second jackpot notice display is displayed, and the second When the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the first jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed. In the first gaming state, the jackpot symbol may be displayed. If the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display, a display other than the second jackpot notice display is displayed, and the jackpot symbol is displayed in the second symbol display means. When it is displayed, the first jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

Further, in the first game state, if only the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, the second jackpot notice display is displayed, and the second jackpot notice display is displayed. When the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the first jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed. In the first gaming state, the jackpot symbol may be displayed. Is displayed. If the execution of the symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display, the second jackpot notice display is displayed and the second symbol display means is hit. When the symbol is displayed, the first jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

Further, in the first game state, if the execution of the first symbol variation display is started only during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, the second jackpot notice display is displayed, and the second jackpot notice display is displayed. When the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the first jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed. In the first gaming state, the jackpot symbol may be displayed. Is displayed When the execution of the first symbol variation display is started in addition to the execution of the second symbol variation display, the second jackpot notice display is displayed, and the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means. When this is done, the first jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

Further, if the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed only in the first gaming state, the second jackpot notice display is displayed, and the second jackpot notice display is displayed. When the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the first jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed, or a gaming state other than the first gaming state. Also, if the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, the second jackpot notice display is displayed and the jackpot is hit by the second symbol display means. When the symbol is displayed, the first jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

Further, in the first game state, if the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, the second jackpot notice display is displayed and the second When the jackpot symbol is displayed on the symbol display means of, the second jackpot display may be displayed, and then only the gate entry promotion display may be displayed, or in the first game state, the jackpot symbol may be displayed. Is displayed. If the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display, the second jackpot notice display is displayed, and the jackpot symbol is displayed in the second symbol display means. And the second jackpot display may be displayed, and then a display other than the gate entry promotion display may be displayed. Further, in the first game state, if the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, the second jackpot notice display is displayed and the second When the jackpot symbol is displayed on the symbol display means of, the second jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may always be displayed, or the jackpot symbol is displayed in the first game state. When the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display, the second jackpot notice display is displayed, and when the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the second jackpot symbol is displayed. The jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may not be displayed.

Further, in the first game state, if the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, the second jackpot notice display is displayed and the second When the jackpot symbol is displayed on the symbol display means of, the second jackpot display may be displayed, and the gate entry promotion display may be displayed only after that, or the jackpot symbol may be displayed in the first gaming state. Is displayed. If the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display, the second jackpot notice display is displayed, and the jackpot symbol is displayed in the second symbol display means. And the second jackpot display may be displayed, and the gate entry promotion display may be displayed in addition to that.

Further, in the first game state, if the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, the second jackpot notice display is displayed and the second When the jackpot symbol is displayed on the symbol display means of, only the second jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed. In the first gaming state, the jackpot symbol may be displayed. Is displayed. If the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display, the second jackpot notice display is displayed, and the jackpot symbol is displayed in the second symbol display means. A display other than the second jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

Further, in the first game state, if the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, the second jackpot notice display is displayed and the second When only the jackpot symbol is displayed in the symbol display means of, the second jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed. In the first gaming state, the jackpot symbol may be displayed. If the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display, the second jackpot notice display is displayed, and the symbol other than the jackpot symbol is displayed in the second symbol display means. When it is displayed, the second jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

Further, in the first game state, if the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, the second jackpot notice display is displayed and the second When the jackpot symbol is displayed only in the symbol display means of, the second jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed, or in the first gaming state, the jackpot symbol may be displayed. If the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display, the second jackpot notice display is displayed, and the symbol display means other than the second symbol display means is hit. When the symbol is displayed, the second jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

Further, in the first game state, if the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, only the second jackpot notice display is displayed, and the second When the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the second jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed. In the first gaming state, the jackpot symbol may be displayed. If the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display, a display other than the second jackpot notice display is displayed, and the jackpot symbol is displayed in the second symbol display means. When it is displayed, the second jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

Further, in the first game state, if the execution of the first symbol variation display is started only during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, the second jackpot notice display is displayed, and the second jackpot notice display is displayed. When the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the second jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed. In the first gaming state, the jackpot symbol may be displayed. Is displayed. When the execution of the first symbol variation display is started other than during the execution of the second symbol variation display, the second jackpot notice display is displayed, and the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means. When this is done, the second jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

Further, if the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed only in the first gaming state, the second jackpot notice display is displayed, and the second jackpot notice display is displayed. When the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the second jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed, or a gaming state other than the first gaming state. Also, if the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, the second jackpot notice display is displayed and the jackpot is hit by the second symbol display means. When the symbol is displayed, the second jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

Further, in the second game state, if the execution of the second symbol variation display is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, the first jackpot notice display is displayed and the second When the jackpot symbol is displayed in the symbol display means of, the first jackpot display may be displayed, and then only the gate entry promotion display may be displayed, or in the second gaming state, the jackpot symbol may be displayed. Is displayed. If the execution of the second symbol variation display is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display, the first jackpot notice display is displayed, and the jackpot symbol is displayed in the second symbol display means. And the first jackpot display may be displayed, and then a display other than the gate entry promotion display may be displayed. Further, in the second game state, if the execution of the second symbol variation display is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, the first jackpot notice display is displayed and the second When the jackpot symbol is displayed on the symbol display means of, the first jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may always be displayed, or the jackpot symbol is displayed in the second gaming state. When the execution of the second symbol variation display is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display, the first jackpot notice display is displayed, and when the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the first The jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may not be displayed.

Further, in the second game state, if the execution of the second symbol variation display is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, the first jackpot notice display is displayed and the second When the jackpot symbol is displayed on the symbol display means of, the first jackpot display may be displayed, and the gate entry promotion display may be displayed only after that, or in the second gaming state, the jackpot symbol may be displayed. Is displayed. If the execution of the second symbol variation display is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display, the first jackpot notice display is displayed, and the jackpot symbol is displayed in the second symbol display means. And the first jackpot display may be displayed, and the gate entry promotion display may be displayed in addition to that.

Further, in the second game state, if the execution of the second symbol variation display is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, the first jackpot notice display is displayed and the second When the jackpot symbol is displayed on the symbol display means of, only the first jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed. In the second gaming state, the jackpot symbol may be displayed. Is displayed. If the execution of the second symbol variation display is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display, the first jackpot notice display is displayed, and the jackpot symbol is displayed in the second symbol display means. A display other than the first jackpot display may be displayed, and then a gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

Further, in the second game state, if the execution of the second symbol variation display is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, the first jackpot notice display is displayed and the second When only the jackpot symbol is displayed in the symbol display means of, the first jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed. In the second gaming state, the jackpot symbol may be displayed. If the execution of the second symbol variation display is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display, the first jackpot notice display is displayed, and the symbol other than the jackpot symbol is displayed in the second symbol display means. When it is displayed, the first jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

Further, in the second game state, if the execution of the second symbol variation display is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, the first jackpot notice display is displayed and the second When the jackpot symbol is displayed only in the symbol display means of, the first jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed, or in the second gaming state, the jackpot symbol may be displayed. If the execution of the second symbol variation display is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display, the first jackpot notice display is displayed, and the symbol display means other than the second symbol display means is hit. When the symbol is displayed, the first jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

Further, in the second game state, if the execution of the second symbol variation display is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, only the first jackpot notice display is displayed, and the second When the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the first jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed. In the second gaming state, the jackpot symbol may be displayed. If the execution of the second symbol variation display is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display, a display other than the first jackpot notice display is displayed, and the jackpot symbol is displayed in the second symbol display means. When it is displayed, the first jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

Further, in the second game state, if the execution of the second symbol variation display is started only during the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, the first jackpot notice display is displayed, and the second When the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the first jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed. In the second gaming state, the jackpot symbol may be displayed. Is displayed. When the execution of the second symbol variation display is started in addition to the execution of the first symbol variation display, the first jackpot notice display is displayed, and the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means. When this is done, the first jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

Further, in the second game state, if the execution of the second symbol variation display is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display in which only the jackpot symbol is displayed, the first jackpot notice display is displayed, and the second When the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the first jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed. In the second gaming state, the jackpot symbol may be displayed. If the execution of the second symbol variation display is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display, the first jackpot notice display is displayed, and the jackpot symbol is displayed in the second symbol display means. When it is displayed, the first jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

In addition, if the execution of the second symbol variation display is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed only in the second gaming state, the first jackpot notice display is displayed, and the second When the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the first jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed, or a gaming state other than the second gaming state. Also, if the execution of the second symbol variation display is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, the first jackpot notice display is displayed and the jackpot is hit by the second symbol display means. When the symbol is displayed, the first jackpot display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

Further, in the second game state, if the execution of the second symbol variation display is not started by the end of the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, a certain jackpot notice display is displayed. There may be a case where the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, and then only the gate entry promotion display is displayed without displaying the jackpot display, or the jackpot symbol is displayed in the second gaming state. If the execution of the second symbol variation display is not started by the end of the execution of the first symbol variation display, the jackpot symbol will be displayed on the first symbol display means without displaying a certain jackpot notice display. It may be displayed, and then a display other than the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without displaying the jackpot display. Further, in the second game state, if the execution of the second symbol variation display is not started by the end of the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, a certain jackpot notice display is displayed. The jackpot symbol may be displayed on the first symbol display means, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without displaying the jackpot display, or the jackpot symbol may be displayed in the second gaming state. If the execution of the second symbol variation display is not started by the end of the execution of the first symbol variation display, the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means without displaying a certain jackpot notice display, and then the jackpot symbol is displayed. In some cases, the gate entry promotion display may not be displayed without the jackpot display being displayed.

Further, in the second game state, if the execution of the second symbol variation display is not started by the end of the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, a certain jackpot notice display is displayed. The jackpot symbol may be displayed on the first symbol display means, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without displaying only the jackpot display, or the jackpot symbol may be displayed in the second gaming state. If the execution of the second symbol variation display is not started by the end of the execution of the first symbol variation display, the jackpot symbol will be displayed on the first symbol display means without displaying a certain jackpot notice display. It may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without displaying a display other than the jackpot display.

Further, in the second game state, if the execution of the second symbol variation display is not started by the end of the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, a certain jackpot notice display is displayed. The jackpot symbol may be displayed on the first symbol display means, and the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without displaying the jackpot display only after that, or the jackpot symbol may be displayed in the second gaming state. If the execution of the second symbol variation display is not started by the end of the execution of the first symbol variation display, the jackpot symbol will be displayed on the first symbol display means without displaying a certain jackpot notice display. It may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without displaying the jackpot display.

Further, in the second game state, if the execution of the second symbol variation display is not started by the end of the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, a certain jackpot notice display is displayed. In some cases, only the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, and then the gate entry promotion display is displayed without displaying the jackpot display, or the jackpot symbol is displayed in the second gaming state. If the execution of the second symbol variation display is not started by the end of the execution of the first symbol variation display, a certain jackpot notice display will not be displayed and the first symbol display means other than the jackpot symbol The symbol of is displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without displaying the jackpot display.

Further, in the second game state, if the execution of the second symbol variation display is not started by the end of the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, a certain jackpot notice display is displayed. The jackpot symbol may be displayed only on the first symbol display means, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without displaying the jackpot display, or the jackpot symbol may be displayed in the second gaming state. If the execution of the second symbol variation display is not started by the end of the execution of the first symbol variation display, a certain jackpot notice display is not displayed and the symbol display other than the first symbol display means is displayed. The jackpot symbol may be displayed on the means, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without displaying the jackpot display.

Further, in the second game state, if the execution of the second symbol variation display is not started by the end of the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, only a certain jackpot notice display is displayed. The jackpot symbol may be displayed on the first symbol display means without displaying the jackpot symbol, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without displaying the jackpot display, or the jackpot symbol may be displayed in the second gaming state. If the execution of the second symbol variation display is not started by the end of the execution of the first symbol variation display, the display other than a certain jackpot notice display is not displayed and the first symbol display means is used. The jackpot symbol may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without displaying the jackpot display.

Further, in the second game state, a certain jackpot notice display is displayed if the execution of the second symbol variation display is not started only until the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed is completed. The jackpot symbol may be displayed on the first symbol display means without displaying the jackpot symbol, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without displaying the jackpot display, or the jackpot symbol may be displayed in the second gaming state. If the execution of the second symbol variation display is not started other than until the execution of the first symbol variation display is completed, a certain jackpot notice display is not displayed and the first symbol display means is hit. The symbol may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without displaying the jackpot display.

Further, in the second game state, if the execution of the second symbol variation display is not started by the end of the execution of the first symbol variation display in which only the jackpot symbol is displayed, a certain jackpot notice display is displayed. The jackpot symbol may be displayed on the first symbol display means without displaying the jackpot symbol, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without displaying the jackpot display, or the jackpot symbol may be displayed in the second gaming state. If the execution of the second symbol variation display is not started by the end of the execution of the first symbol variation display in which symbols other than the above are displayed, a certain jackpot notice display is not displayed and the first symbol display means is used. The jackpot symbol may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without displaying the jackpot display.

Further, only in the second gaming state, a certain jackpot notice display is displayed if the execution of the second symbol variation display is not started by the end of the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed. The jackpot symbol may be displayed on the first symbol display means without displaying the jackpot symbol, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without displaying the jackpot display, or a gaming state other than the second gaming state. Even in the case of, if the execution of the second symbol variation display is not started by the end of the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, the first symbol display without displaying a certain jackpot notice display. The jackpot symbol may be displayed on the means, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without displaying the jackpot display.

Further, "one of the plurality of displays is a jackpot notice display [for example, a jackpot notice display in which the characters" Preparing for jackpot !! "shown in FIG. 18 (g) are displayed]. ,
When the certain jackpot notice display is displayed during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, the first case occurs [for example, shown in FIGS. 18 (g) to 18 (j). As described above, when the jackpot notice display in which the characters "Preparing for jackpot !!" is displayed during the jackpot fluctuation in Special Figure 2, the jackpot start effect is displayed after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in Special Figure 2. It is started, and after that, a display prompting the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is displayed, etc.],
If the certain jackpot notice display is not displayed by the end of the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, the second case will occur [for example, FIGS. 19 (a) to 19 (f). ), If the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is not started by the end of the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 2, the character "preparing for the jackpot !!" is displayed, and then the jackpot notice display is not displayed. , Even if the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2, the jackpot start effect is not performed, and a display that promotes the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is displayed on top of the symbol demo display],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, if only a certain jackpot notice display is displayed during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be the first case, or the jackpot symbol is displayed in the second. The first case may be the case where a display other than a certain jackpot notice display is displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display. Further, if a certain jackpot notice display is displayed during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be the first case, or the second symbol in which the jackpot symbol is displayed may be displayed. If a certain jackpot notice display is displayed during the execution of the variable display, it may not be the first case.

Further, it may be the first case that a certain jackpot notice display is displayed only during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, or the second symbol in which the jackpot symbol is displayed. It may be the first case when a certain big hit notice display is displayed other than during the execution of the variable display.

Further, if a certain jackpot notice display is displayed during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which only the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be the first case, or a symbol other than the jackpot symbol is displayed. If a certain jackpot notice display is displayed during the execution of the second symbol variation display, it may be the first case.

Further, in the second case, if only a certain jackpot notice display is not displayed by the end of the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, the second case may be obtained, or the jackpot symbol is displayed. In the second case, if a display other than a certain jackpot notice display is not displayed by the end of the execution of the symbol variation display of. In addition, if a certain jackpot notice display is not displayed by the end of the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, the second case may always occur, or the jackpot symbol is displayed second. The second case may not occur unless a certain jackpot notice display is displayed by the end of the execution of the symbol variation display of.

Further, the second case may be obtained if a certain jackpot notice display is not displayed only until the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed is completed, or the jackpot symbol is displayed second. In the second case, if a certain jackpot notice display is not displayed other than until the execution of the symbol variation display of is completed.

Further, in the second case, if a certain jackpot notice display is not displayed by the end of the execution of the second symbol variation display in which only the jackpot symbol is displayed, a symbol other than the jackpot symbol is displayed. If a certain jackpot notice display is not displayed by the end of the execution of the second symbol variation display, the second case may be obtained.

In addition, "when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, the certain jackpot notice display is displayed [for example, FIG. f) As shown in Fig. 2 (g), when the symbol fluctuation display of Special Figure 1 is started during the jackpot fluctuation of Special Figure 2, the characters "Big hit preparations !!" are displayed. Is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, if the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, only a certain jackpot notice display may be displayed, or the jackpot symbol may be displayed. If the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display to be performed, a display other than a certain jackpot notice display may be displayed. Further, if the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, a certain jackpot notice display may be displayed without fail, or the jackpot symbol is displayed. If the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display, a certain jackpot notice display may not be displayed.

Further, if the execution of the first symbol variation display is started only during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, a certain jackpot notice display may be displayed, or the jackpot symbol may be displayed. When the execution of the first symbol variation display is started other than during the execution of the second symbol variation display, a certain jackpot notice display may be displayed.

Further, if the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which only the jackpot symbol is displayed, a certain jackpot notice display may be displayed, or a symbol other than the jackpot symbol may be displayed. When the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display, a certain jackpot notice display may be displayed.

Further, "The certain jackpot notice display is not displayed unless the execution of the first symbol variation display is started by the end of the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed [for example, FIG. 19]. As shown in (a) to (f) of the same figure, if the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is not started by the end of the jackpot variation of the special figure 2, the characters "preparing for the jackpot !!" Notice display is not displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, if the execution of the first symbol variation display is not started by the end of the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, only a certain jackpot notice display may not be displayed, and the jackpot may not be displayed. If the execution of the first symbol variation display is not started by the end of the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the symbol is displayed, the display other than a certain jackpot notice display may not be displayed. Further, if the execution of the first symbol variation display is not started by the end of the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, a certain jackpot notice display may not always be displayed, and the jackpot symbol may not be displayed. If the execution of the first symbol variation display is not started by the end of the execution of the second symbol variation display, a certain jackpot notice display may be displayed.

Further, if the execution of the first symbol variation display is not started only until the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed is completed, a certain jackpot notice display may not be displayed, and the jackpot symbol may not be displayed. It is not necessary to display a certain jackpot notice display unless the execution of the first symbol variation display is started other than until the execution of the second symbol variation display is completed.

Further, if the execution of the first symbol variation display is not started by the end of the execution of the second symbol variation display in which only the jackpot symbol is displayed, a certain jackpot notice display may not be displayed, and the jackpot symbol may not be displayed. A certain jackpot notice display may not be displayed unless the execution of the first symbol variation display is started by the end of the execution of the second symbol variation display in which symbols other than the above are displayed.

In addition, "the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the missing symbol is displayed, and then the execution of the first symbol variation display ends. However, when the execution of the new first symbol variation display is not started, it is not the first case but the second case [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20A to 20G). In addition, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 which becomes a big hit during the deviation fluctuation of the special figure 1 is started, and then the deviation fluctuation of the special figure 1 ends, but the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is not started after that. In that case, even if the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2, the jackpot start effect is not performed, and a display promoting the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is displayed on top of the symbol demo display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the out-of-order symbol is displayed, and then the execution of the first symbol variation display ends. If the execution of the new first symbol variation display is not started, it may be only in the second case instead of the first case, or during the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the missing symbol is displayed. If the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed is started, then the execution of the first symbol variation display ends, but the execution of the new first symbol variation display is not started, the first symbol is displayed. It may be a case other than the second case instead of the case. In addition, the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the out-of-order symbol is displayed, and then the execution of the first symbol variation display ends. If the execution of the first symbol variation display is not started, it may be the second case instead of the first case, or a big hit during the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the missing symbol is displayed. If the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the symbol is displayed is started, the execution of the first symbol variation display ends after that, but the execution of the new first symbol variation display is not started, the first case It may not be the second case instead.

In addition, the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the out-of-order symbol is displayed, and then the execution of the first symbol variation display ends. Only when the execution of the first symbol variation display is not started, it may be the second case instead of the first case, or a big hit during the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the missing symbol is displayed. The execution of the second symbol variation display in which the symbol is displayed is started, and then the execution of the first symbol variation display ends, but the execution of the new first symbol variation display is not started. It may be the second case instead of the first case.

In addition, it is provided with "first starting winning means [for example, first special drawing starting port (top) 230, first special drawing starting port (bottom) 231 etc.] in which a game ball can enter.
When the game ball enters the first start winning means, the execution of the first symbol variation display can be started.
When a game ball enters the first starting winning means during the certain period of the first gaming state, a certain notification [for example, "Please hit right!" Shown in FIG. 24 (f) is used. Warning notification, etc.] is started,
The above-mentioned certain notification is a notification regarding how to hit.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first starting winning means may be one in which only the game ball can enter, or one in which something other than the game ball can also enter. Further, the first starting winning means may be one in which the game ball always enters, or one in which the game ball may not enter.

Further, when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, it may be possible to start only the execution of the first symbol change display, or when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, the first symbol changes. It may be possible to start the execution of the symbol variation display other than the display. Further, when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, the execution of the first symbol variation display may be started without fail, and when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, the first symbol variation display is displayed. Execution may not start.

Further, when the game ball enters only the first starting winning means, the execution of the first symbol variation display may be started, or when the game ball enters a starting winning means other than the first starting winning means. It may be possible to start the execution of the first symbol variation display.

Further, when the game ball enters the first starting winning means in a certain period of the first gaming state, only a certain notification may be started, or the first in a certain period of the first gaming state. When the game ball enters the start winning means, a notification other than a certain notification may be started. Further, when the game ball enters the first starting winning means in a certain period of the first gaming state, a certain notification may be always started, or the first in a certain period of the first gaming state. When the game ball enters the start winning means, a certain notification may not be started.

Further, when the game ball enters only the first starting winning means in a certain period of the first gaming state, a certain notification may be started, or the first in a certain period of the first gaming state. When the game ball enters a winning means other than the starting winning means, a certain notification may be started.

Further, when the game ball enters the first starting winning means only during a certain period of the first gaming state, a certain notification may be started, or during a period other than a certain period of the first gaming state. Also, when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, a certain notification may be started.

Further, a certain notification may be related only to the way of hitting, or may be related to something other than the way of hitting. In addition, a certain notification may or may not be related to the way of hitting.

In addition, "a second starting winning means [for example, a second special drawing starting port 232, etc.] in which a game ball can enter is provided.
When the game ball enters the second start winning means, the execution of the second symbol variation display can be started.
Even if the game ball enters the second start winning means during the certain period of the second gaming state, the certain notification is not started [for example, shown in FIGS. 25 (d) to 25 (f)). As shown above, even if a game ball wins a prize at the start port 232 of the second special figure after the jackpot occurrence gate is monitored, no warning is given, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second starting winning means may be one in which only the game ball can enter, or one in which something other than the game ball can also enter. Further, the second starting winning means may be one in which the game ball always enters, or one in which the game ball may not be able to enter.

Further, when the game ball enters the second starting winning means, it may be possible to start only the execution of the second symbol change display, or when the game ball enters the second starting winning means, the second symbol changes. It may be possible to start the execution of the symbol variation display other than the display. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting winning means, the execution of the second symbol variation display may be started without fail, and when the game ball enters the second starting winning means, the second symbol variation display is displayed. Execution may not start.

Further, when the game ball enters only the second start winning means, the execution of the second symbol variation display may be started, or when the game ball enters the starting winning means other than the second starting winning means. It may be possible to start the execution of the second symbol variation display.

Further, even if the game ball enters the second starting winning means in a certain period of the second gaming state, only a certain notification may not be started, and in a certain period of the second gaming state, the first Even if the game ball enters the second starting winning means, the notification other than a certain notification may not be started. Further, even if a game ball enters the second starting winning means in a certain period of the second gaming state, a certain notification does not necessarily have to be started, and in a certain period of the second gaming state, the first Even if the game ball enters the second starting winning means, a certain notification may be started.

Further, even if the game ball enters only the second starting winning means in a certain period of the second gaming state, a certain notification may not be started, and in a certain period of the second gaming state, the first Even if the game ball enters a winning means other than the second starting winning means, a certain notification may not be started.

Further, even if a game ball enters the second starting winning means only during a certain period of the second gaming state, a certain notification may not be started, and other than a certain period of the second gaming state. Even during the period, even if the game ball enters the second starting winning means, a certain notification may not be started.

Further, "If the power is cut off or restored while the gate entry promotion display is displayed, the gate entry promotion display is erased, and then when the game ball enters the first start winning means, the certain notification is started. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (e), if the power is cut off or restored while the display for promoting the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is displayed in the jackpot generation gate monitoring state, the jackpot is generated. The display that promotes the passage of the generation gate 252 is erased, but if a game ball wins a prize at the first special figure start port (top) 230 after that, a warning notification is given, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, if the power is cut off or the power is restored while the gate entry promotion display is being displayed, the gate entry promotion display may be erased, and then when the game ball enters the first start winning means, only a certain notification may be started. If the power is cut off or restored while the gate entry promotion display is being displayed, the gate entry promotion display is erased, and then when the game ball enters the first start winning means, a notification other than a certain notification may be started. Further, if the power is cut off or restored while the gate entry promotion display is displayed, the gate entry promotion display is erased, and then when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, a certain notification may be started without fail. If the power is cut off or the power is restored while the gate entry promotion display is being displayed, the gate entry promotion display is erased, and if a game ball enters the first starting winning means thereafter, a certain notification may not be started.

Further, if the power is cut off or restored while the gate entry promotion display is displayed, the gate entry promotion display is erased, and then when the game ball enters only the first starting winning means, a certain notification may be started. If the power is turned off or restored while the gate entry promotion display is being displayed, the gate entry promotion display is erased, and then when a game ball enters a winning means other than the first starting winning means, a certain notification may be started.

Further, if the power is cut off or restored while the gate entry promotion display is displayed, the gate entry promotion display is erased, and only after that, when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, a certain notification may be started. If the power is cut off or restored while the gate entry promotion display is displayed, the gate entry promotion display is erased, and a certain notification may be started when the game ball enters the first starting winning means.

Further, if the power is cut off or restored while the gate entry promotion display is displayed, only the gate entry promotion display is deleted, and then when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, a certain notification may be started. If the power is cut off or restored while the gate entry promotion display is being displayed, the display other than the gate entry promotion display is erased, and then when the game ball enters the first start winning means, a certain notification may be started.

Further, if the power is cut off or restored only while the gate entry promotion display is displayed, the gate entry promotion display is erased, and then when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, a certain notification may be started. In addition to the display of the gate entry promotion display, the gate entry promotion display may be erased when the power is cut off or the power is restored, and then a certain notification may be started when the game ball enters the first start winning means.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"The first symbol display means [for example, the first special symbol display device 212, etc.] capable of executing the first symbol variation display, and
A second symbol display means [for example, a second special symbol display device 214, etc.] capable of executing a second symbol variation display, and
A game control means [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] that can control any one of a plurality of game states.
The first starting winning means [for example, the first special drawing starting port (top) 230, the first special drawing starting port (bottom) 231 and the like] that the game ball can enter,
A display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
It is a game table equipped with
When the game ball enters the first start winning means, the execution of the first symbol variation display can be started.
Both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time [for example, as shown in FIG. 13A, the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212. And the symbol variation display on the second special figure display device 214 may be performed at the same time],
The execution of the small hit game can be started after the small hit symbol [for example, "special figure g" etc.] is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 13 (b). , After the special figure 2 stops and displays the small hit symbol at the timing of t23, the small hit game starts at the timing shown in t24, etc.],
One of the plurality of gaming states is the first gaming state [for example, the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, etc.].
One of the plurality of displays is a symbol variation effect display [for example, a variation display of a decorative symbol displayed in accordance with the variation display of special figure 1 shown in FIGS. 14 (b) to 15 (x). Production display including (decorative design variation production display), etc.]
The symbol variation effect display is a display including a variation display of a decorative symbol.
In the first gaming state, the symbol variation effect display is started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 17 (a) to 17 (c), special features. In the low-probability normal figure low-probability state, the decorative symbol variation effect display is started at the start of the variation display of special figure 1],
In the first gaming state, the symbol variation effect display corresponding to the start of the second symbol variation display is not started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20B to 20E). Special figure low probability In the normal figure low probability state, the decorative symbol variation effect display is not started at the start of the variation display of special figure 2],
One of the plurality of displays is a second standby effect display [for example, a display of an animation demo shown in FIG. 18 (d)].
The second standby effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed in the first game state.
The second standby effect display is a display that does not include a display in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (d), in the animation demo display, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Does not include indications of other aspects, etc.],
The second standby effect display may be displayed even during the small hit game [For example, as shown in FIG. 27 (f), the display of the animation demo is displayed during the small hit game. Etc.],
In the first game state, the first start winning means is in a state where the small hit game is being executed while the second standby effect display is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as "first state"). Even if the game ball enters the game, the second standby effect display is continuously displayed [For example, as shown in FIGS. 27 (f) to 27 (h), a small hit during the display of the animation demo. Even if the game ball wins a prize at the first special figure start port (top) 230 while the game is being executed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is not started, and the animation demo is continuously displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Here, the first symbol display means may be capable of executing only the first symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the first symbol variation display. Further, the first symbol display means may be one that always executes the first symbol variation display, or may not execute the first symbol variation display.

Further, the second symbol display means may be capable of executing only the second symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the second symbol variation display. Further, the second symbol display means may be one that always executes the second symbol variation display, or may not execute the second symbol variation display.

Further, the game control means may be able to control only one of the plurality of game states, or may be controllable to other than any one of the plurality of game states. Further, the game control means may always control one of a plurality of game states, or may not control the game control means to any one of a plurality of game states.

Further, the first starting winning means may be one in which only the game ball can enter, or one in which something other than the game ball can also enter. Further, the first starting winning means may be one in which the game ball always enters, or one in which the game ball may not enter.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of displays. Further, the display means may be one that always displays a plurality of displays, or may not display a plurality of displays.

Further, when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, it may be possible to start only the execution of the first symbol change display, or when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, the first symbol changes. It may be possible to start the execution of the symbol variation display other than the display. Further, when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, the execution of the first symbol variation display may be started without fail, and when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, the first symbol variation display is displayed. Execution may not start.

Further, when the game ball enters only the first starting winning means, the execution of the first symbol variation display may be started, or when the game ball enters a starting winning means other than the first starting winning means. It may be possible to start the execution of the first symbol variation display.

Further, there may be a case where only the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display are executed at the same time, or other than both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display. May be running at the same time. In addition, both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may always be executed at the same time, or both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display are executed at the same time. It may not be done.

In addition, there may be a case where only the first symbol variation display is executed, there may be a case where only the second symbol variation display is executed, and the first symbol variation display and the first symbol variation display may be executed. Both of the two symbol variation displays may be executed at the same time, or both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may not be executed at the same time.

Further, it may be possible to start only the small hit game after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display, or after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display. Games other than small hit games may also be started. Further, the small hit game may be always started after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display, or the small hit after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display. The game may not start.

Further, the small hit game may be started only after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display, or after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display. In addition to this, it may be possible to start a small hit game.

Further, the small hit game may be started after only the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display, or a symbol other than the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display. It may be possible to start the small hit game even after it has been played.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the first game state, or may be capable of controlling game states other than the first game state. Further, the game control means may be one that always controls the first game state, or may not be controlled to the first game state.

Further, the symbol variation effect display may include only the variation display of the decorative symbol, or may include a display other than the variation display of the decorative symbol. Further, the symbol variation effect display may always include the variation display of the decorative symbol, or may not include the variation display of the decorative symbol.

Further, in the first game state, only the symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and in the first game state, the first symbol variation display is started. Depending on what is done, something other than the symbol variation effect display may be started. Further, in the first game state, the symbol variation effect display may always be started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and in the first game state, the first symbol variation display is started. Depending on what is done, the symbol variation effect display may not be started.

Further, in the first game state, the symbol variation effect display may be started only in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and in the first game state, the first symbol variation display is started. The symbol variation effect display may be started according to something other than what has been done.

Further, in the first game state, the symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of only the first symbol variation display, and in the first game state, other than the first symbol variation display. The symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the symbol variation display.

Further, in the first gaming state, it is not necessary to start only the symbol variation effect display corresponding to the start of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation display is displayed. It is not necessary to start anything other than the symbol variation effect display according to the start. Further, in the first gaming state, the symbol variation effect display corresponding to the start of the second symbol variation display does not necessarily have to be started, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation display is displayed. In some cases, the symbol variation effect display may be started according to the start.

Further, in the first gaming state, the symbol variation effect display corresponding only to the start of the second symbol variation display may not be started, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation display may be displayed. It is not necessary to start the symbol variation effect display according to something other than the start.

Further, in the first gaming state, it is not necessary to start the symbol variation effect display corresponding to the start of only the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, other than the second symbol variation display. It is not necessary to start the symbol variation effect display corresponding to the start of the symbol variation display of.

Further, the second standby effect display may be displayed only in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed. Alternatively, the first symbol variation display may not be executed in the first game state, and may be displayed in a state other than the state in which the jackpot game is not executed. Further, the second standby effect display may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed. The first symbol variation display may not be executed in the first game state, and the jackpot game may not be displayed in the state where it is not executed.

Further, the second standby effect display may not include only the display in the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or may not include the display other than the display in the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. There may be. In addition, the second standby effect display may not always include the display of the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or may include the display of the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. You may.

Further, only the second standby effect display may be displayed even during the execution of the small hit game, and the display other than the second standby effect display may be displayed even during the execution of the small hit game. It may be. Further, the second standby effect display may always be displayed even during the execution of the small hit game, or the second standby effect display may not be displayed even during the execution of the small hit game. Good.

Further, only the second standby effect display may be displayed only during the execution of the small hit game, and only the second standby effect display may be displayed even when the small hit game is not being executed. May be present.

In addition, even when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state (in the first game state, the small hit game is being executed while the second standby effect display is displayed). , Only the second standby effect display may be continuously displayed, or even if the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the display other than the second standby effect display may be displayed. It may be displayed continuously. Further, even if the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the first state, the second standby effect display may always be continuously displayed, or in the first state, the first Even if the game ball enters the starting winning means, the second standby effect display may not be continuously displayed.

Further, in the first state, the second standby effect display may be continuously displayed only when the game ball enters the first start winning means, or in the first state, the first The second standby effect display may be continuously displayed even in cases other than the case where the game ball has entered the starting winning means.

Further, only in the first state, even if the game ball enters the first start winning means, the second standby effect display may be continuously displayed, or even in a state other than the first state. Even when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, the second standby effect display may be continuously displayed.

In addition, it is equipped with an audio output means [for example, a speaker 120, etc.] capable of outputting a plurality of types of audio.
One of the plurality of types of sounds is the first start winning sound [for example, the start winning sound corresponding to the default stage shown in FIG. 27 (h)].
The first start winning sound is a sound that may be output when a game ball enters the first starting winning means.
It is possible to display an icon [for example, a variable icon, a hold icon, etc.] related to the first symbol variation display.
When the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the icon is not displayed and the first start winning sound is output [for example, FIGS. 27 (f) to 27 (fi)). As shown in (h), if a game ball wins a prize at the first special figure start port (top) 230 while the small hit game is being executed while the animation demo is being displayed, the start prize sound is output. However, the variable icon (hold icon) is not displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the audio output means may be capable of outputting only a plurality of types of audio, or may be capable of outputting other than a plurality of types of audio. Further, the audio output means may always output a plurality of types of audio, or may not output a plurality of types of audio.

Further, the audio output means may be able to output only the first start winning sound, or may be able to output a start winning sound other than the first starting winning sound. Further, the audio output means may always output the first start winning sound, or may not output the first starting winning sound.

Further, the first start winning sound may be output only when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, or the game ball may enter the first starting winning means. It may be output in cases other than the above. Further, the first start winning sound may be output whenever the game ball enters the first start winning means, or when the game ball enters the first starting winning means. It may not be output.

Further, it may be possible to display only the icon related to the first symbol variation display, or it may be possible to display an icon other than the icon related to the first symbol variation display. Further, the icon related to the first symbol variation display may be always displayed, or the icon related to the first symbol variation display may not be displayed.

Further, it may be possible to display an icon related only to the first symbol variation display, or it may be possible to display an icon related to a symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display.

Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the icon may not be displayed and only the first start winning sound may be output, or the first in the first state. When the game ball enters the starting winning means, the icon is not displayed and sounds other than the first starting winning sound may be output. Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the icon may not be displayed and the first start winning sound may be output without fail, or the first in the first state. When the game ball enters the starting winning means, the icon may not be displayed and the first starting winning sound may not be output.

Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, only the icon may not be displayed and the first start winning sound may be output, or the first in the first state. When the game ball enters the starting winning means, nothing other than the icon is displayed, and the first starting winning sound may be output.

Further, the icon may not be displayed and the first start winning sound may be output only when the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the first state, or the first in the first state. The icon may not be displayed and the first start winning sound may be output even when the game ball has not entered the starting winning means of.

Further, when the game ball enters only the first starting winning means in the first state, the icon may not be displayed and the first starting winning sound may be output, or the first in the first state. Even when the game ball enters a starting winning means other than the starting winning means, the icon may not be displayed and the first starting winning sound may be output.

Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means only in the first state, the icon may not be displayed and the first start winning sound may be output, or even in a state other than the first state. When the game ball enters the first start winning means, the icon may not be displayed and the first start winning sound may be output.

In addition, "when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the second standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state. , The second standby effect display is switched to the symbol variation effect display, the icon is displayed, and the first start winning sound is output [for example, shown in FIGS. 29 (d) to 29 (f)). As shown above, when the game ball wins the first special figure start port (above) 230 while the animation demo is displayed while the symbol of special figure 2 is changing, the start winning sound is output and the animation demo starts. It is switched to the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the variable icon (hold icon) is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the second standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state, when the game ball enters the first start winning means, the second The standby effect display may be switched to the symbol variation effect display, an icon may be displayed, and only the first start winning sound may be output, or the second standby effect display may be displayed during the display of the second standby effect display in the first game state. When a game ball enters the first start winning means while the symbol variation display is being executed, the second standby effect display is switched to the symbol variation effect display, an icon is displayed, and the first start winning sound is displayed. Sounds other than the above may also be output. In addition, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the second standby effect display is displayed in the first game state, the second standby The effect display is switched to the symbol variation effect display, an icon is displayed, and the first start winning sound may be output without fail, or the second symbol is displayed while the second standby effect display is displayed in the first game state. When a game ball enters the first start winning means while the variation display is being executed, the second standby effect display is switched to the symbol variation effect display, an icon is displayed, and the first start winning sound is heard. It may not be output.

In addition, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the second standby effect display is displayed in the first game state, the second standby The effect display may be switched to the symbol variation effect display, only the icon may be displayed, and the first start winning sound may be output, or the second symbol may be output while the second standby effect display is displayed in the first game state. When the game ball enters the first start winning means while the variation display is being executed, the second standby effect display is switched to the symbol variation effect display, and something other than the icon is also displayed, and the first start. A winning sound may be output.

In addition, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the second standby effect display is displayed in the first game state, the second standby The effect display may be switched only to the symbol variation effect display, the icon may be displayed, and the first start winning sound may be output, or the second symbol may be output while the second standby effect display is displayed in the first game state. When the game ball enters the first start winning means while the variation display is being executed, the display is switched from the second standby effect display to a display other than the symbol variation effect display, the icon is displayed, and the first A start winning sound may be output.

In addition, only when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the second standby effect display is displayed in the first game state, the second The standby effect display may be switched to the symbol variation effect display, an icon may be displayed, and the first start winning sound may be output, or the second standby effect display may be displayed during the display of the second standby effect display in the first game state. In the state where the symbol variation display is being executed, even when the game ball does not enter the first start winning means, the second standby effect display is switched to the symbol variation effect display, the icon is displayed, and the second One start winning sound may be output.

In addition, when the game ball enters the first start winning means only in the state where the second symbol variation display is executed while the second standby effect display is displayed in the first game state, the second The standby effect display may be switched to the symbol variation effect display, an icon may be displayed, and the first start winning sound may be output, or the second symbol may be output while the second standby effect display is displayed in the first gaming state. Even in a state other than the state in which the variation display is executed, when the game ball enters the first start winning means, the second standby effect display is switched to the symbol variation effect display, the icon is displayed, and the first A start winning sound may be output.

In addition, "It is possible to shift to one of multiple production stages,
The first start winning sound is output in a mode corresponding to the running production stage among the plurality of types of production stages [for example, FIGS. 29 (f), 29 (f'), and (f'). As shown in'), when a game ball wins a prize in the first special figure starting port (top) 230, a starting winning sound corresponding to the stage is output, etc.],
When a game ball enters the first start winning means during the display of the second standby effect display, it is executed when the display of the second standby effect display of the plurality of types of effect stages is started. The first start winning sound is output in a manner corresponding to the production stage that was in the middle [For example, as shown in FIGS. 30 (a) to 30 (h), when the start prize is won during the animation demo. , The start winning sound corresponding to the stage before the transition to the animation demo is output, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, it may be possible to shift to only one of the plurality of types of production stages, or it may be possible to shift to a stage other than one of the plurality of types of production stages. In addition, the stage may always shift to one of the plurality of types of production stages, or may not shift to one of the plurality of types of production stages.

Further, only the first start winning sound may be output in a mode corresponding to the executing production stage among the plurality of types of production stages, or the running production stage among the plurality of types of production stages may be output. Sounds other than the first start winning sound may be output in the above manner. In addition, the first start winning sound may always be output in a manner corresponding to the executing production stage among the plurality of types of production stages, or corresponds to the executing production stage among the plurality of types of production stages. In some cases, the first start winning sound may not be output.

In addition, the first start winning sound may be output only in a mode corresponding to the executing production stage among the plurality of types of production stages, or corresponds to the executing production stage among the plurality of types of production stages. The first start winning sound may be output in a mode other than the above mode.

Further, the first start winning sound may be output in a mode corresponding only to the executing production stage among the plurality of types of production stages, or other than the executing production stage among the plurality of types of production stages. The first start winning sound may be output in a manner corresponding to the production stage.

In addition, when a game ball enters the first start winning means while the second standby effect display is displayed, it is being executed when the display of the second standby effect display of the plurality of types of effect stages is started. Only the first start winning sound may be output in a manner corresponding to the existing stage, or when the game ball enters the first starting winning means while the second standby effect display is displayed, there are a plurality of types. Sounds other than the first start winning sound may be output in a manner corresponding to the effect stage that was being executed when the display of the second standby effect display was started. In addition, when a game ball enters the first start winning means while the second standby effect display is displayed, it is being executed when the display of the second standby effect display among a plurality of types of effect stages is started. The first start winning sound may always be output in a manner corresponding to the existing production stage, and when the game ball enters the first starting winning means while the second standby effect display is displayed, there are multiple types. In some cases, the first start winning sound may not be output in a manner corresponding to the effect stage that was being executed when the display of the second standby effect display was started.

In addition, when a game ball enters the first start winning means while the second standby effect display is displayed, it is being executed when the display of the second standby effect display among a plurality of types of effect stages is started. The first start winning sound may be output only in a mode corresponding to the existing production stage, and when the game ball enters the first starting winning means while the second standby effect display is displayed, there are a plurality of types. The first start winning sound may be output in a mode other than the mode corresponding to the effect stage that was being executed when the display of the second standby effect display was started.

In addition, when a game ball enters the first start winning means while the second standby effect display is displayed, it is being executed when the display of the second standby effect display among a plurality of types of effect stages is started. The first start winning sound may be output in a manner corresponding only to the existing production stage, and when the game ball enters the first starting winning means while the second standby effect display is displayed, there are a plurality of types. The first start winning sound may be output in a manner corresponding to an effect stage other than the effect stage that was being executed when the display of the second standby effect display was started.

In addition, when a game ball enters the first start winning means while the second standby effect display is displayed, it is being executed only when the display of the second standby effect display is started among a plurality of types of effect stages. The first start winning sound may be output in a manner corresponding to the effect stage, and when the game ball enters the first start winning means while the second standby effect display is displayed, there are a plurality of types. Even if the first start winning sound is output in a manner corresponding to the production stage that was being executed when the display other than when the display of the second standby production display was started among the production stages of Good.

Also, only when the game ball enters the first start winning means while the second standby effect display is displayed, it is executed when the display of the second standby effect display among the plurality of types of effect stages is started. The first start winning sound may be output in a manner corresponding to the effect stage that was in the middle, except when the game ball enters the first start winning means while the second standby effect display is displayed. In this case, the first start winning sound may be output in a manner corresponding to the effect stage that was being executed when the display of the second standby effect display among the plurality of types of effect stages was started.

In addition, "It is possible to shift to one of multiple production stages,
The first start winning sound is output in a mode corresponding to the running production stage among the plurality of types of production stages [for example, FIGS. 29 (f), 29 (f'), and (f'). As shown in'), when a game ball wins a prize in the first special figure starting port (top) 230, a starting winning sound corresponding to the stage is output, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of production stages is a default production stage [for example, the default stage shown in FIG. 29 (a)].
When the game ball enters the first start winning means during the display of the second standby effect display, the first start winning sound is output in a manner corresponding to the default effect stage.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, it may be possible to shift to only one of the plurality of types of production stages, or it may be possible to shift to a stage other than one of the plurality of types of production stages. In addition, the stage may always shift to one of the plurality of types of production stages, or may not shift to one of the plurality of types of production stages.

Further, only the first start winning sound may be output in a mode corresponding to the executing production stage among the plurality of types of production stages, or the running production stage among the plurality of types of production stages may be output. Sounds other than the first start winning sound may be output in the above manner. In addition, the first start winning sound may always be output in a manner corresponding to the executing production stage among the plurality of types of production stages, or corresponds to the executing production stage among the plurality of types of production stages. In some cases, the first start winning sound may not be output.

In addition, the first start winning sound may be output only in a mode corresponding to the executing production stage among the plurality of types of production stages, or corresponds to the executing production stage among the plurality of types of production stages. The first start winning sound may be output in a mode other than the above mode.

Further, the first start winning sound may be output in a mode corresponding only to the executing production stage among the plurality of types of production stages, or other than the executing production stage among the plurality of types of production stages. The first start winning sound may be output in a manner corresponding to the production stage.

Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means while the second standby effect display is displayed, only the first start winning sound may be output in a manner corresponding to the default effect stage. When the game ball enters the first start winning means while the second standby effect display is displayed, sounds other than the first start winning sound may be output in a manner corresponding to the default effect stage. Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means while the second standby effect display is displayed, the first start winning sound may be output without fail in a manner corresponding to the default effect stage. When the game ball enters the first start winning means during the display of the second standby effect display, the first start winning sound may not be output in a manner corresponding to the default effect stage.

Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means while the second standby effect display is displayed, the first start winning sound may be output only in a mode corresponding to the default effect stage. When the game ball enters the first start winning means during the display of the second standby effect display, the first start winning sound may be output in a mode other than the mode corresponding to the default effect stage.

Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means while the second standby effect display is displayed, the first start winning sound may be output in a manner corresponding only to the default effect stage. When the game ball enters the first start winning means during the display of the second standby effect display, the first start winning sound may be output in a mode corresponding to the effect stage other than the default effect stage.

Further, the first start winning sound may be output in a manner corresponding to the default effect stage only when the game ball enters the first start winning means while the second standby effect display is displayed. , Even if the first start winning sound is output in a manner corresponding to the default production stage, even when the game ball enters the first starting winning means while the second standby effect display is displayed. Good.

In addition, "one of the plurality of displays is the first jackpot notice display [for example, the jackpot notice display in which the characters" Preparing for jackpot !! "shown in FIG. 18 (g) are displayed]. ,
In the first game state, the game ball is used as the first start winning means in the state where the jackpot symbol is displayed while the second standby effect display is displayed and the second symbol variation display is being executed. When the character enters, the display is switched from the second standby effect display to the first jackpot notice display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 18 (d) to 18 (g), the special figure low probability and the normal figure low probability. In the state, when the fluctuation display of special figure 1 is started during the animation demo and the big hit change of special figure 2, the characters "Preparing for big hit !!" are displayed. Display changes, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the first game state, the game ball is used as the first start winning means in the state where the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed while the second standby effect display is displayed is being executed. Upon entering, the display may be switched only from the second standby effect display to the first jackpot notice display, or in the first gaming state, the jackpot symbol is displayed while the second standby effect display is displayed. If a game ball enters the first start winning means while the second symbol variation display is being executed, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to a display other than the first jackpot notice display. .. Further, in the first game state, the game ball enters the first start winning means while the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed while the second standby effect display is displayed is being executed. Then, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the first jackpot notice display without fail, and in the first game state, the jackpot symbol is displayed while the second standby effect display is displayed. If a game ball enters the first start winning means while the symbol variation display of is being executed, the display may not be switched from the second standby effect display to the first jackpot notice display.

Further, in the first game state, the game ball is displayed only in the first start winning means in the state where the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed while the second standby effect display is displayed is being executed. Upon entering, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the first jackpot notice display, or in the first game state, the jackpot symbol is displayed while the second standby effect display is displayed. If a game ball enters a starting winning means other than the first starting winning means while the symbol variation display of is being executed, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the first jackpot notice display. ..

Further, in the first game state, the game ball is used as the first start winning means only when the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed while the second standby effect display is displayed is executed. Upon entering, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the first jackpot notice display, or in the first game state, the jackpot symbol is displayed while the second standby effect display is displayed. Even in a state other than the state in which the symbol variation display of is executed, when the game ball enters the first start winning means, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the first jackpot notice display.

In addition, only in the first game state, the game ball is used as the first start winning means in the state where the second symbol variation display in which the jackpot symbol is displayed while the second standby effect display is displayed is being executed. Upon entering, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the first jackpot notice display, and even in a game state other than the first game state, the jackpot symbol is displayed during the display of the second standby effect display. If a game ball enters the first starting winning means while the second symbol variation display to be displayed is being executed, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the first jackpot notice display. ..

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of displays is the first standby effect display [for example, the display of the symbol demo shown in FIG. 18C].
The first standby effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed.
The first standby effect display is a display different from the second standby effect display.
After the first standby effect display is displayed, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display [for example, FIGS. 18 (c) to 18 (d)). As shown, the display of the design demo has been switched to the display of the animation demo, etc.],
The first standby effect display is a display including a display in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (c), in the display of the symbol demo, "decoration 5-decoration 4-". Includes the display of the mode in which the display is stopped by the combination of the out-of-order symbols of "Decoration 1"],
In the first game state, when the game ball enters the first start winning means while the small hit game is being executed while the first standby effect display is displayed, the first The standby effect display of is continuously performed, the icon is displayed, and the first start winning sound is output [for example, as shown in FIGS. 31 (e) to 31 (g), a small hit. If the game ball wins the first special figure start port (above) 230 while the animation demo is displayed during the game, the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 and the start prize is won. Sound is output, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first standby effect display may be displayed only in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed. Alternatively, it may be displayed in a state other than the state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed. Further, the first standby effect display may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed. The first symbol variation display may not be executed in the first game state, and the jackpot game may not be displayed in the state where it is not executed.

Further, the first standby effect display may be partially different from the second standby effect display, or may be entirely different from the second standby effect display.

Further, after the first standby effect display is displayed, the display may be switched only from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display, or the first standby effect display is displayed. The display may be later switched from the first standby effect display to a display other than the second standby effect display. Further, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display after the first standby effect display is displayed, or after the first standby effect display is displayed. The display may not switch from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display.

Further, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display only after the first standby effect display is displayed, or the first standby effect display may be displayed. The display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display other than after.

Further, the first standby effect display may include only the display in the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or may include a display other than the display in the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. May be good. In addition, the first standby effect display may always include the display of the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or may not include the display of the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. You may.

Further, in the first game state, when the game ball enters the first start winning means while the small hit game is being executed while the first standby effect display is displayed, the first standby effect is produced. The display may be continued, an icon may be displayed, and only the first start winning sound may be output, or in the first game state, a small hit game may be displayed while the first standby effect display is displayed. When a game ball enters the first start winning means in the executed state, the first standby effect display is continuously performed, an icon is displayed, and sounds other than the first start winning sound are displayed. May also be output. Further, in the first game state, when the game ball enters the first start winning means while the small hit game is being executed while the first standby effect display is displayed, the first standby effect is produced. While the display is continuously performed, the icon may be displayed and the first start winning sound may be output without fail, or in the first game state, the small hit game is displayed while the first standby effect display is displayed. If the game ball enters the first start winning means while it is being executed, the first standby effect display is continuously performed, the icon is displayed, and the first start winning sound is not output. There may be cases.

Further, in the first game state, when the game ball enters the first start winning means while the small hit game is being executed while the first standby effect display is displayed, the first standby effect is produced. While the display is continuously performed, only the icon may be displayed and the first start winning sound may be output, or in the first game state, the small hit game may be displayed while the first standby effect display is displayed. When the game ball enters the first start winning means in the executed state, the first standby effect display is continuously performed, and other than the icon is also displayed, and the first start winning sound is displayed. May be output.

Further, in the first game state, when the game ball enters the first start winning means while the small hit game is being executed while the first standby effect display is displayed, the first standby effect is produced. While only the display is continuously performed, the icon may be displayed and the first start winning sound may be output, or in the first game state, the small hit game may be displayed while the first standby effect display is displayed. When the game ball enters the first start winning means in the executed state, the display other than the first standby effect display is continuously performed, the icon is displayed, and the first start winning sound is displayed. May be output.

Further, in the first game state, the first standby is performed only when the game ball enters the first start winning means while the small hit game is being executed while the first standby effect display is displayed. While the effect display is continuously performed, an icon may be displayed and the first start winning sound may be output, or in the first game state, a small hit game may be displayed while the first standby effect display is displayed. Even when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the executed state, the first standby effect display is continuously performed, the icon is displayed, and the first start winning sound is displayed. May be output.

Further, in the first game state, when the small hit game is being executed while the first standby effect display is displayed and the game ball enters only the first start winning means, the first standby is performed. While the effect display is continuously performed, an icon may be displayed and the first start winning sound may be output, or in the first game state, a small hit game may be displayed while the first standby effect display is displayed. Even if the game ball enters a start winning means other than the first start winning means in the executed state, the first standby effect display is continuously performed, the icon is displayed, and the first start is started. A winning sound may be output.

Further, in the first game state, only when the small hit game is executed while the first standby effect display is displayed, when the game ball enters the first start winning means, the first standby While the effect display is continuously performed, an icon may be displayed and the first start winning sound may be output, or in the first game state, a small hit game may be displayed while the first standby effect display is displayed. Even in a state other than the executed state, when the game ball enters the first start winning means, the first standby effect display is continuously performed, the icon is displayed, and the first start winning sound is displayed. May be output.

Further, only in the first game state, when the small hit game is executed while the first standby effect display is displayed and the game ball enters the first start winning means, the first standby is performed. The effect display may be continuously performed, an icon may be displayed, and the first start winning sound may be output. Even in a game state other than the first game state, the first standby effect display is being displayed. When the game ball enters the first start winning means while the small hit game is being executed, the first standby effect display is continuously performed, the icon is displayed, and the first start is performed. A winning sound may be output.

In addition, "the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display after the second standby effect display is displayed [for example, FIGS. 28 (h) to 28 (h). As shown in i), the display of the animation demo has been switched to the display of the design demo, etc.],
After the game ball has entered the first start winning means in the first state, the second standby effect display is changed to the first standby effect display while the small hit game is being executed. When the display is switched, the icon is displayed and the first start winning sound is output [for example, as shown in FIGS. 28 (f) to (i), an animation demo is displayed during a small hit game. After the game ball wins a prize at the first special figure start port (above) 230 in the displayed state, if the display shifts from the animation demo to the symbol demo during the continuation of the small hit game, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed. A hold icon is displayed in area 281 and a start winning sound is output, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, after the second standby effect display is displayed, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to only the first standby effect display, or the second standby effect display may be displayed. After that, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to a display other than the first standby effect display. Further, after the second standby effect display is displayed, the display may always switch from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display, or the second standby effect display is displayed. The display may not be switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display later.

Further, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display only after the second standby effect display is displayed, or the second standby effect display may be displayed. The display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display other than after.

In addition, after the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the display is switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display while the execution of the small hit game continues. In that case, the icon may be displayed and only the first start winning sound may be output, or after the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the first state, the execution of the small hit game continues. When the display is switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display in this state, an icon may be displayed and a start winning sound other than the first starting winning sound may be output. In addition, after the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the display is switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display while the execution of the small hit game continues. In that case, the icon may be displayed and the first start winning sound may be output without fail, or after the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the first state, the execution of the small hit game continues. When the display is switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display in the state of being displayed, the icon may be displayed and the first start winning sound may not be output.

In addition, after the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the display is switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display while the execution of the small hit game continues. In that case, only the icon may be displayed and the first start winning sound may be output, or after the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the first state, the execution of the small hit game continues. When the display is switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display in this state, something other than the icon may be displayed and the first start winning sound may be output.

In addition, after the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the display is switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display while the execution of the small hit game continues. The icon may be displayed and the first start winning sound may be output only when the icon is displayed, or the small hit game continues to be executed after the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the first state. The icon may be displayed and the first start winning sound may be output even when the display is not switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display in the state of being displayed.

In addition, after the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the display is displayed from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display only when the execution of the small hit game is continued. When the switch is made, an icon may be displayed and the first start winning sound may be output, or after the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the first state, the execution of the small hit game continues. When the display is switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display even in a state other than the above state, the icon may be displayed and the first start winning sound may be output.

Also, only after the game ball has entered the first start winning means in the first state, the small hit game is displayed from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display while the execution of the small hit game continues. When is switched, an icon may be displayed and the first start winning sound may be output, and the small hit game may be output other than after the game ball has entered the first starting winning means in the first state. When the display is switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display while the execution is continuing, the icon may be displayed and the first start winning sound may be output.

In addition, it is possible to execute "a certain big hit notice [for example, one-shot notification effect shown in FIG. 32 (k)].
The certain jackpot notice is a notice executed in response to the entry of the game ball into the first start winning means, and corresponds to the entry of the game ball into the first start winning means. It is a notice that may be executed when the result of the first symbol variation display to be executed is the result of displaying the jackpot symbol.
A state in which the second symbol variation display is executed while the icon is hidden while the symbol variation effect display is being displayed (hereinafter, as shown in the "second state [for example, FIG. 32 (i))". In addition, during the symbol variation display of the special figure 2, the variable icon and the hold icon are hidden during the variable display of the decorative symbol related to the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 after shifting to SP reach.] " ),
When the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the second state, the certain jackpot notice may be executed [for example, shown in FIGS. 32 (i) to 32 (k). As described above, during the symbol variation display of the special figure 2, the first special is in a state where the variation icon and the hold icon are hidden by shifting to the SP reach during the variation display of the decorative symbol related to the symbol variation display of the special figure 1. When a game ball wins a prize at the start port (top) 230, a one-shot notification effect is performed, etc.]
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only a certain big hit notice may be executed, or a notice other than a certain big hit notice may be executed. In addition, a certain big hit notice may be executed without fail, or a certain big hit notice may not be executed.

In addition, there may be a case where only the second state (the state in which the icon is hidden while the symbol variation effect display is being displayed and the second symbol variation display is being executed) may be the second state. It may be in a state other than the state. In addition, the second state may always be reached, or the second state may not be reached.

Further, when the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the second state, only a certain big hit notice may be executed, or the first starting winning means in the second state. When a game ball enters the game, a notice other than a certain big hit notice may be executed. Further, when a game ball enters the first starting winning means in the second state, a certain big hit notice may be executed without fail, or the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the second state. When entering, a certain jackpot notice may not be executed.

Further, a certain jackpot notice may be executed only when the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the second state, or the first starting winning means in the second state. In addition to the case where the game ball has entered the game, a certain jackpot notice may be executed.

Further, when the game ball enters the first starting winning means only in the second state, a certain big hit notice may be executed, and even in a state other than the second state, the first When a game ball enters the starting winning means, a certain jackpot notice may be executed.

In addition, it is possible to execute "a certain big hit notice [for example, one-shot notification effect shown in FIG. 32 (k)].
The certain jackpot notice is a notice executed in response to the entry of the game ball into the first start winning means, and corresponds to the entry of the game ball into the first start winning means. It is a notice that may be executed when the result of the first symbol variation display to be executed is the result of displaying the jackpot symbol.
When the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the execution of the certain jackpot notice is not started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only a certain big hit notice may be executed, or a notice other than a certain big hit notice may be executed. In addition, a certain big hit notice may be executed without fail, or a certain big hit notice may not be executed.

Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, it is not necessary to start only the execution of a certain jackpot notice, and the first start in the first state. When the game ball enters the winning means, the execution other than the execution of a certain jackpot notice may not be started. Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, it is not always necessary to start the execution of a certain jackpot notice, and the first start in the first state. When a game ball enters the winning means, the execution of a certain jackpot notice may be started.

Further, only when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the execution of a certain jackpot notice does not have to be started, and the first start winning in the first state. Even when the game ball enters the means, the execution of a certain jackpot notice may not be started.

Further, when the game ball enters the first starting winning means only in the first state, it is not necessary to start the execution of a certain jackpot notice, and the first state other than the first state. When the game ball enters one of the starting winning means, it is not necessary to start the execution of a certain jackpot notice.

In addition, it is provided with "operation means [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 190, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate the player.
One of the plurality of displays is a setting display [for example, a display of the setting screen shown in FIGS. 22 (c) to 22 (d)].
The setting display is a display including a display instructing to select one option from a plurality of options.
When a certain operation is performed by the operating means while the second standby effect display is displayed, the setting display may be displayed [for example, FIGS. 22A to 22C). ), The setting screen is displayed when the effect button 136 is operated once while the design demo is displayed],
Even when the certain operation is performed by the operating means in the first state, the setting display is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the operating means may be provided only at a position that can be operated by the player, or may be provided at a position other than the position that can be operated by the player. .. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where it can be operated by the player, or may not be provided at a position where it can be operated by the player.

Further, the setting display may include only a display instructing to select one option from a plurality of options, or instructing to select one option from a plurality of options. It may include a display other than the display. Further, the setting display may always include a display instructing to select one option from a plurality of options, or instructing to select one option from a plurality of options. It may not include the display.

Further, when a certain operation is performed by the operating means while the second standby effect display is displayed, only the setting display may be displayed, or the second standby effect display is displayed. When a certain operation is performed by the operating means in the state of being set, a display other than the setting display may be displayed. Further, when a certain operation is performed by the operating means while the second standby effect display is displayed, the setting display may always be displayed, or the second standby effect display is displayed. The setting display may not be displayed when a certain operation is performed by the operating means.

Further, the setting display may be displayed only when a certain operation is performed by the operating means while the second standby effect display is displayed, or the second standby effect display is displayed. The setting display may be displayed in a case other than the case where a certain operation is performed by the operating means in the state where the setting is performed.

Further, the setting display may be displayed when a certain operation is performed by the operating means only in the state where the second standby effect display is displayed, or the second standby effect display is displayed. The setting display may be displayed even when a certain operation is performed by the operating means in a state other than the state in which the setting is performed.

Further, the setting display may be displayed when a certain operation is performed by the operating means while only the second standby effect display is displayed, or other than the second standby effect display. The setting display may be displayed even when a certain operation is performed by the operating means while the display is displayed.

Further, even when a certain operation is performed by the operating means in the first state, only the setting display may not be displayed, and a certain operation is performed by the operating means in the first state. Even in this case, a display other than the setting display may not be displayed. Further, even when a certain operation is performed by the operating means in the first state, the setting display does not necessarily have to be displayed, and a certain operation is performed by the operating means in the first state. Even in this case, the setting display may be displayed.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"The first symbol display means [for example, the first special symbol display device 212, etc.] capable of executing the first symbol variation display, and
A second symbol display means [for example, a second special symbol display device 214, etc.] capable of executing a second symbol variation display, and
A game control means [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] that can control any one of a plurality of game states.
A certain gate that a game ball can enter [for example, a jackpot generation gate 252, etc.]
A display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
It is a game table equipped with
Both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time [for example, as shown in FIG. 13A, the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212. And the symbol variation display on the second special figure display device 214 may be performed at the same time],
One of the plurality of gaming states is the first gaming state [for example, the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, etc.].
One of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state [for example, a special figure high probability state, a normal figure low probability state, etc.].
The second gaming state is a gaming state different from the first gaming state.
One of the plurality of displays is a symbol variation effect display [for example, a variation display of a decorative symbol displayed in accordance with the variation display of special figure 1 shown in FIGS. 14 (b) to 15 (x). Production display including (decorative design variation production display), etc.]
The symbol variation effect display is a display including a variation display of a decorative symbol.
In the first gaming state, the symbol variation effect display is started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 17 (a) to 17 (c), special features. In the low-probability normal figure low-probability state, the decorative symbol variation effect display is started at the start of the variation display of special figure 1],
In the first gaming state, the symbol variation effect display corresponding to the start of the second symbol variation display is not started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20B to 20E). Special figure low probability In the normal figure low probability state, the decorative symbol variation effect display is not started at the start of the variation display of special figure 2],
After the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, a certain period [for example, the period during which the jackpot generation gate monitoring state shown in t83 to t85 of FIG. 16 is effective] is started.
Even after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the certain period is started.
When the game ball enters the certain gate in the certain period, the big hit game is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 16, during the period in which the big hit generation gate monitoring state shown in t83 to t85 is effective, it is shown in t84. When the game ball passes through the jackpot generation gate 252 at the timing, the jackpot game is started, etc.],
One of the plurality of displays is a gate entry promotion display [for example, a display for promoting the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252, which is shown in FIG. 18 (j), "Right-handed to pass the jackpot generation gate!" Etc.]
One of the plurality of displays is the first standby effect display [for example, the display of the symbol demo shown in FIG. 18C].
One of the plurality of displays is a gate entry standby state display [for example, a display of the gate entry standby effect shown in FIG. 18 (j)].
The gate entry promotion display is a display that prompts the game ball to enter the certain gate.
The first standby effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed.
The first standby effect display is a display including a display in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (c), in the display of the symbol demo, "decoration 5-decoration 4-". Includes the display of the mode in which the display is stopped by the combination of the out-of-order symbols of "Decoration 1"],
The gate entry waiting state display is a display that may be displayed during the certain period.
In the first gaming state, after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the gate entry promotion display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 18 (h) to 18 (j)). , After the big hit symbol is displayed on the special figure 2, the display that promotes the passage of the big hit generation gate 252 is displayed, etc.],
In some cases, both the gate entry promotion display and the gate entry standby state display may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 18J, the display that promotes the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is a gate. It is overlaid on the display of the approach waiting effect, etc.],
In some cases, both the gate entry promotion display and the first standby effect display are displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 19 (f), a display that promotes the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is displayed. It is overlaid on the display of the design demo, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Here, the first symbol display means may be capable of executing only the first symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the first symbol variation display. Further, the first symbol display means may be one that always executes the first symbol variation display, or may not execute the first symbol variation display.

Further, the second symbol display means may be capable of executing only the second symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the second symbol variation display. Further, the second symbol display means may be one that always executes the second symbol variation display, or may not execute the second symbol variation display.

Further, the game control means may be able to control only one of the plurality of game states, or may be controllable to other than any one of the plurality of game states. .. Further, the game control means may be one that always controls one of a plurality of game states, or may not be controlled to any one of a plurality of game states.

Further, a certain gate may be such that only a game ball can enter, or a gate other than a game ball may also be able to enter. Further, a certain gate may be one in which the game ball always enters, or may be one in which the game ball may not enter.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of displays. Further, the display means may be one that always displays a plurality of displays, or may not display a plurality of displays.

Further, there may be a case where only the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display are executed at the same time, or a display other than both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display is executed. May be running at the same time. In addition, both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may always be executed at the same time, or both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may not be executed at the same time. There may be.

Further, the game control means may be controllable only in the first game state and the second game state, or can be controlled in a game state other than the first game state and the second game state. It may be anything. Further, the game control means may always control the first game state and the second game state, or may not control the first game state and the second game state. You may.

The second gaming state may be a gaming state that is partially different from the first gaming state, or may be a gaming state that is completely different from the first gaming state.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variation effect display, the gate entry promotion display, the first standby effect display, and the gate entry standby state display, or the symbol variation effect display and the gate entry promotion display. Display other than the first standby effect display and the gate entry standby status display may also be displayable. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the symbol variation effect display, the gate entry promotion display, the first standby effect display, and the gate entry standby state display, or the symbol variation effect display and the gate entry promotion display. The first standby effect display and the gate entry standby status display may not be displayed.

Further, the symbol variation effect display may include only the variation display of the decorative symbol, or may include a display other than the variation display of the decorative symbol. Further, the symbol variation effect display may always include the variation display of the decorative symbol, or may not include the variation display of the decorative symbol.

Further, in the first game state, only the symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and in the first game state, the first symbol variation display is started. Display other than the symbol variation effect display may be started according to the above. Further, in the first game state, the symbol variation effect display may always be started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and in the first game state, the first symbol variation display is started. Depending on what is done, the symbol variation effect display may not be started.

Further, in the first game state, the symbol variation effect display may be started only in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and in the first game state, the first symbol variation display is started. The symbol variation effect display may be started according to something other than what has been done.

Further, in the first game state, the symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of only the first symbol variation display, and in the first game state, other than the first symbol variation display. The symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the symbol variation display.

Further, in the first gaming state, it is not necessary to start only the symbol variation effect display corresponding to the start of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation display is displayed. It is not necessary to start the display other than the symbol variation effect display according to the start. Further, in the first gaming state, the symbol variation effect display corresponding to the start of the second symbol variation display does not necessarily have to be started, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation display is displayed. In some cases, the symbol variation effect display may be started according to the start.

Further, in the first gaming state, the symbol variation effect display corresponding only to the start of the second symbol variation display may not be started, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation display may be displayed. It is not necessary to start the symbol variation effect display according to something other than the start.

Further, in the first gaming state, it is not necessary to start the symbol variation effect display corresponding to the start of only the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, other than the second symbol variation display. It is not necessary to start the symbol variation effect display corresponding to the start of the symbol variation display of.

Further, only a certain period may be started after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, or a period other than a certain period after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means. May also be started. Further, a certain period may be always started after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, and a certain period is not started after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means. There may be cases.

Further, a certain period may be started only after the big hit symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, and a certain period is started other than after the big hit symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means. May be done.

Further, only a certain period may be started even after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, or a period other than a certain period even after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means. May be started. Further, a certain period may always be started even after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and a certain period is not started even after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means. There may be cases.

Further, a certain period may be started only after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and a certain period may be started other than after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means. May be done.

Further, a certain period may be started after the jackpot symbol is displayed only on the second symbol display means, or even after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the symbol display means other than the second symbol display means. Period may be started.

Further, when a game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period, only a big hit game may be started, or when a game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period, a game other than the big hit game may be started. .. Further, the jackpot game may always be started when the game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period, or the jackpot game may not be started when the game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period. ..

Further, the big hit game may be started only when the game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period, and the big hit game is started only when the game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period. May be done.

Further, the jackpot game may be started when the game ball enters only a certain gate in a certain period, or the jackpot game may be started when the game ball enters a gate other than a certain gate in a certain period. ..

Further, the jackpot game may be started when the game ball enters a certain gate only for a certain period, or the jackpot game may be started when the game ball enters a certain gate during a period other than a certain period. Good.

Further, the gate entry promotion display may only prompt the game ball to enter a certain gate, or may also prompt other than the game ball to enter a certain gate. .. Further, the gate entry promotion display may always prompt the game ball to enter a certain gate, or may not prompt the game ball to enter a certain gate. Good.

Further, the first standby effect display may be displayed only in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed. Alternatively, the first symbol variation display may not be executed in the first game state, and may be displayed in a state other than the state in which the jackpot game is not executed. Further, the first standby effect display may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed. The first symbol variation display may not be executed in the first game state, and the jackpot game may not be displayed in the state where it is not executed.

Further, the first standby effect display may include only the display in the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or may include a display other than the display in the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. May be good. In addition, the first standby effect display may always include the display of the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or may not include the display of the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. You may.

Further, the gate entry waiting state display may be displayed only in a certain period, or may be displayed in a period other than a certain period. Further, the gate entry waiting state display may be always displayed for a certain period of time, or may not be displayed for a certain period of time.

Further, in the first game state, only the gate entry promotion display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, or in the first game state, the second symbol display means may be displayed. After the jackpot symbol is displayed, a display other than the gate entry promotion display may be displayed. Further, in the first game state, the gate entry promotion display may always be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and in the first game state, the second symbol display means may be displayed. The gate entry promotion display may not be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed.

Further, in the first game state, the gate entry promotion display may be displayed only after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and in the first game state, the second symbol display means may be displayed. The gate entry promotion display may be displayed other than after the jackpot symbol is displayed.

Further, in the first game state, the gate entry promotion display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed only on the second symbol display means, and in the first game state, the second symbol display means may be displayed. The gate entry promotion display may be displayed even after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the symbol display means other than the above.

Further, only in the first gaming state, the gate entry promotion display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and even in a gaming state other than the first gaming state, the first The gate entry promotion display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means.

In addition, there may be a case where only the gate entry promotion display and the gate entry standby status display are displayed, or a display other than both the gate entry promotion display and the gate entry standby status display is displayed. It may be in a state of being. In addition, both the gate entry promotion display and the gate entry standby status display may be displayed without fail, or both the gate entry promotion display and the gate entry standby status display may not be displayed. There may be.

In addition, there may be a case where only both the gate entry promotion display and the first standby effect display are displayed, and displays other than both the gate entry promotion display and the first standby effect display are also displayed. It may be in the state of being. In addition, both the gate entry promotion display and the first standby effect display may be displayed without fail, and both the gate entry promotion display and the first standby effect display may not be displayed. There may be cases.

In addition, "one of the plurality of displays is a jackpot display [for example, a display of the jackpot start effect shown in FIG. 18 (i)].
In the first gaming state, when the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the jackpot display is displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display is displayed (hereinafter, "first". Case [For example, as shown in FIGS. 18 (h) to 18 (j), after the big hit symbol is displayed in the special figure 2, the display of the big hit start effect is displayed, and then the passage of the big hit generation gate 252 is promoted. When the display to be displayed is displayed, etc.] ”),
In the first gaming state, when the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means and then the gate entry promotion display is displayed without displaying the jackpot display (hereinafter, "second". Case [For example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (d) to 19 (f), after the big hit symbol is displayed in the special figure 2, the passage of the big hit generation gate 252 is promoted without displaying the display of the big hit start effect. When the display to be displayed is displayed, etc.] ”),
In the first case, both the gate entry promotion display and the gate entry standby state display are displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (j), the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is promoted. The display is overlaid on the display of the gate entry standby effect, etc.],
In the second case, both the gate entry promotion display and the first standby effect display are displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 19 (f), the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is passed. The display to promote is overlaid on the display of the design demo, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the first gaming state, the jackpot display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and then only the gate entry promotion display may be displayed. In the first gaming state, the jackpot display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and then a display other than the gate entry promotion display may be displayed. Further, in the first gaming state, the jackpot display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and then the gate entry promotion display may always be displayed, or the first gaming state. In the second symbol display means, the jackpot display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may not be displayed.

Further, in the first game state, only the jackpot display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed. In one game state, a display other than the jackpot display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and then a gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

Further, in the first game state, the jackpot display may be displayed after only the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed. In one game state, the jackpot display may be displayed after the symbol other than the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

Further, in the first gaming state, the jackpot display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed only on the second symbol display means, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed. In one game state, the jackpot display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the symbol display means other than the second symbol display means, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

Further, only in the first gaming state, the jackpot display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed. In a gaming state other than the one gaming state, the jackpot display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

Further, in the first gaming state, after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, only the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without displaying the jackpot display, or the first In one game state, after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, a display other than the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without displaying the big hit display. Further, in the first gaming state, after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the gate entry promotion display may always be displayed without displaying the jackpot display, or the first gaming state. In some cases, after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the jackpot display is not displayed and the gate entry promotion display is not displayed.

Further, in the first gaming state, after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without displaying only the jackpot display. In one game state, after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without displaying any display other than the jackpot display.

Further, in the first game state, after only the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without displaying the jackpot display. In one game state, after a symbol other than the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without displaying the jackpot display.

Further, in the first game state, after the jackpot symbol is displayed only on the second symbol display means, the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without displaying the jackpot display. In one game state, after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the symbol display means other than the second symbol display means, the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without displaying the jackpot display.

Further, only in the first gaming state, after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without displaying the jackpot display. In a gaming state other than the one gaming state, the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without displaying the big hit display after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means.

Further, in the first case, only the gate entry promotion display and the gate entry standby status display may be displayed, and in the first case, the gate entry promotion display and the gate entry standby status display may be displayed. A display other than both of the above may be displayed. Further, in the first case, both the gate entry promotion display and the gate entry standby status display may be displayed without fail, and in the first case, the gate entry promotion display and the gate entry standby status display may be displayed. Both may not be displayed.

Further, only in the first case, both the gate entry promotion display and the gate entry standby status display may be displayed, and even in cases other than the first case, the gate entry promotion display and the gate entry may be displayed. Both of the standby status displays may be displayed.

Further, in the second case, only the gate entry promotion display and the first standby effect display may be displayed, and in the second case, the gate entry promotion display and the first standby display may be displayed. Display other than both of the effect display may be displayed. Further, in the second case, both the gate entry promotion display and the first standby effect display may be displayed without fail, and in the second case, the gate entry promotion display and the first standby display may be displayed. Both of the effect displays may not be displayed.

Further, only in the second case, both the gate entry promotion display and the first standby effect display may be displayed, and even in cases other than the second case, the gate entry promotion display and the first standby effect display may be displayed. Both of the one standby effect display may be displayed.

In addition, in the above description,
"The first symbol display means [for example, the first special symbol display device 212, etc.] capable of executing the first symbol variation display, and
A second symbol display means [for example, a second special symbol display device 214, etc.] capable of executing a second symbol variation display, and
A game control means that can control any one of a plurality of game states [for example, CPU 304 in the main control unit 300] and
The first starting winning means [for example, the first special drawing starting port (top) 230, the first special drawing starting port (bottom) 231 and the like] that the game ball can enter,
A certain gate that a game ball can enter [for example, a jackpot generation gate 252, etc.]
A display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
It is a game table equipped with
The first starting winning means is a winning means corresponding to the first symbol display means.
The gate is provided at a position where the game ball can enter when hitting to the right [for example, as shown in FIG. 3, the jackpot generating gate 252 is provided on the right side of the game area 124. , It is possible to pass by hitting right, etc.],
Both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time [for example, as shown in FIG. 13A, the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212. And the symbol variation display on the second special figure display device 214 may be performed at the same time],
One of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state [for example, a normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), etc.].
One of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state [for example, a jackpot gaming state, a probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state), or an electric support state (special figure low probability). State, high probability state), etc.]
The second gaming state is a gaming state different from the first gaming state.
One of the plurality of displays is a symbol variation effect display [for example, a decorative symbol displayed in accordance with the variation display of the special figure 1 shown in FIGS. 14 (b) to 15 (x). Production display including fluctuation display (decorative design fluctuation production display), etc.]
One of the plurality of displays is the first standby effect display [for example, the display of the symbol demo shown in FIG. 18C].
The certain symbol variation effect display is a display including a display in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed.
The first standby effect display is a display including a display in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (c), in the display of the symbol demo, "decoration 5-decoration 4-". Includes the display of the mode in which the display is stopped by the combination of the out-of-order symbols of "Decoration 1"],
In the first gaming state, the certain symbol variation effect display is started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (f), in the normal gaming state, in the normal gaming state, The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol variation effect display in response to the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212],
In the first gaming state, the certain symbol variation effect display corresponding to the start of the second symbol variation display is not started [for example, as shown in FIG. 18C, in the normal gaming state. , The decorative symbol variation effect display is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to the symbol variation display on the second special symbol display device 214],
The first standby effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed.
After the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, a certain period [for example, the period during which the jackpot generation gate monitoring state shown in t83 to t85 of FIG. 16 is effective] is started.
When the game ball enters the certain gate in the certain period, the big hit game is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 16, during the period in which the big hit generation gate monitoring state shown in t83 to t85 is effective, it is shown in t84. When the game ball passes through the jackpot generation gate 252 at the timing, the jackpot game is started, etc.],
One of the plurality of displays is the first display [for example, right-handed to pass through the jackpot generating gate 252, which is shown in FIG. 33 (a). Display, etc. that promotes
One of the plurality of displays is a second display [for example, a display of a gate entry standby effect shown in FIG. 18 (j)].
One of the plurality of displays is a third display [for example, a right-handed promotion animation shown in FIG. 33 (c)].
The first display is a display that encourages right-handed striking.
The second display is a display that may be displayed during the certain period.
The third display is a display that encourages right-handed striking.
The display mode of the third display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display.
In the first gaming state, the first display is displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (d) to 19 (f)). , After the big hit symbol is displayed on the special figure 2, the display that promotes the passage of the big hit generation gate 252 is displayed, etc.],
In some cases, both the first display and the second display may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (j), a display that promotes the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 enters the gate. It is overlaid on the standby effect display, etc.],
A state in which both the first display and the first standby effect display are displayed (hereinafter, "a big hit occurs during the display of the symbol demo as shown in the first state [for example, FIG. 33A). A state in which a display promoting the passage of the gate 252 is displayed, etc.] ”) may occur.
When the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the display of the third display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 33 (a) to 33 (c)). When the game ball enters the first special figure start port (upper) 230 while the display promoting the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is displayed during the display of the symbol demo, the display of the right-handed promotion animation is started. etc],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Here, the first symbol display means may be capable of executing only the first symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the first symbol variation display. Further, the first symbol display means may be one that always executes the first symbol variation display, or may not execute the first symbol variation display.

Further, the second symbol display means may be capable of executing only the second symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the second symbol variation display. Further, the second symbol display means may be one that always executes the second symbol variation display, or may not execute the second symbol variation display.

Further, the game control means may be able to control only one of the plurality of game states, or may be controllable to other than any one of the plurality of game states. .. Further, the game control means may be one that always controls one of a plurality of game states, or may not be controlled to any one of a plurality of game states.

Further, the first starting winning means may be one in which only the game ball can enter, or one in which something other than the game ball can also enter. Further, the first starting winning means may be one in which the game ball always enters, or one in which the game ball may not enter.

Further, a certain gate may be such that only a game ball can enter, or a gate other than a game ball may also be able to enter. Further, a certain gate may be one in which the game ball always enters, or may be one in which the game ball may not enter.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of displays. Further, the display means may be one that always displays a plurality of displays, or may not display a plurality of displays.

Further, the first start winning means may correspond only to the first symbol display means, or may correspond to a symbol display means other than the first symbol display means. Further, the first start winning means may be one that always corresponds to the first symbol display means, or may not correspond to the first symbol display means.

Further, only a certain gate may be provided at a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right, or other than a certain gate at a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right. Things may be provided. Further, a certain gate may be provided at a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right, or a certain gate is provided at a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right. It may not be done.

Further, a certain gate may be provided only at a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right, or at a position other than a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right. A gate may be provided.

Further, a certain gate may be provided at a certain position where only the game ball can enter when hitting right, or at a certain position where something other than the game ball can enter when hitting right. A gate may be provided.

Further, a certain gate may be provided at a certain position where the game ball can enter only when hitting right, or at a certain position where the game ball can enter even when not hitting right. A gate may be provided.

The second gaming state may be a gaming state that is partially different from the first gaming state, or may be a gaming state that is completely different from the first gaming state.

Further, only the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time, or symbols other than both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time. The variable display may also be executed at the same time. In addition, both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may always be executed at the same time, or both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may not be executed at the same time. There may be.

Further, a certain symbol variation effect display may include only the display of the mode in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, or may include a display other than the display of the mode in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. There may be. In addition, a certain symbol variation effect display may always include a display of a mode in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, or may not include a display in a mode in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. It may be.

Further, the first standby effect display may include only the display in the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or may include a display other than the display in the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. May be good. In addition, the first standby effect display may always include the display of the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or may not include the display of the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. You may.

Further, in the first gaming state, only a certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be started. A display other than a certain symbol variation effect display may also be started in response to the start of. Further, in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be always started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be started. There may be a case where a certain symbol variation effect display is not started in response to the start of.

Further, in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be started only in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be started. A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to something other than the start of.

Further, in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of only the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be started. A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the symbol variation display other than the above.

Further, only in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and even in a gaming state other than the first gaming state, the first A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the symbol variation display of.

Further, in the first gaming state, it is not necessary to start only a certain symbol variation effect display in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation display It is not necessary to start the display other than a certain symbol variation effect display according to the start of the display. Further, in the first gaming state, it is not always necessary to start a certain symbol variation effect display in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the display.

Further, in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may not be started only in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation may be started. It is not necessary to start a certain symbol variation effect display in response to something other than the start of the display.

Further, in the first game state, it is not necessary to start a certain symbol change effect display in response to the start of only the second symbol change display, and in the first game state, the second symbol change display is started. It is not necessary to start a certain symbol variation effect display in response to the start of the symbol variation display other than the display.

Further, only in the first gaming state, it is not necessary to start a certain symbol variation effect display in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, and even in a gaming state other than the first gaming state, the first It is not necessary to start a certain symbol variation effect display in response to the start of the second symbol variation display.

Further, the first standby effect display may be displayed only in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed. Alternatively, the first symbol variation display may not be executed in the first game state, and may be displayed in a state other than the state in which the jackpot game is not executed. Further, the first standby effect display may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed. The first symbol variation display may not be executed in the first game state, and the jackpot game may not be displayed in the state where it is not executed.

Further, only a certain period may be started after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, or a period other than a certain period after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means. May also be started. Further, a certain period may be always started after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, and a certain period is not started after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means. There may be cases.

Further, a certain period may be started only after the big hit symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, and a certain period is started other than after the big hit symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means. May be done.

Further, a certain period may be started after only the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, or a certain period may be started even after a symbol other than the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means. May be started.

Further, a certain period may be started after the jackpot symbol is displayed only on the first symbol display means, or even after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the symbol display means other than the first symbol display means. Period may be started.

Further, when a game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period, only a big hit game may be started, or when a game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period, a game other than the big hit game may be started. .. Further, the jackpot game may always be started when the game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period, or the jackpot game may not be started when the game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period. ..

Further, the big hit game may be started only when the game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period, and the big hit game is started even in a case other than the case where the game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period. May be done.

Further, the big hit game may be started when the game ball enters only a certain gate in a certain period, or the big hit game may be started when the game ball enters something other than a certain gate in a certain period. ..

Further, the jackpot game may be started when the game ball enters a certain gate only for a certain period, or the jackpot game may be started when the game ball enters a certain gate during a period other than a certain period. Good.

Further, the first display may be one that encourages only right-handed striking, or may be one that encourages something other than right-handed striking. In addition, the first display may always encourage right-handed strikes, or may not prompt right-handed strikes.

Further, the second display may be displayed only in a certain period, or may be displayed in a period other than a certain period. In addition, the second display may be always displayed for a certain period of time, or may not be displayed for a certain period of time.

In addition, the third display may encourage only right-handed strikes, or may also encourage other than right-handed strikes. In addition, the third display may always encourage right-handed strikes, or may not prompt right-handed strikes.

In addition, the display mode of the third display may be partially different from the display mode of the first display, or may be completely different.

Further, in the first game state, only the first display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, or in the first game state, the second symbol display means may be displayed. After the jackpot symbol is displayed on, a display other than the first display may be displayed. Further, in the first game state, the first display may always be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and in the first game state, the second symbol display means may be displayed. The first display may not be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed in.

Further, in the first game state, the first display may be displayed only after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and in the first game state, the second symbol display means may be displayed. The first display may be displayed other than after the jackpot symbol is displayed.

Further, in the first game state, the first display may be displayed after only the jackpot symbol is displayed in the second symbol display means, or in the first game state, the second symbol display means may be displayed. The first display may be displayed after a symbol other than the jackpot symbol is displayed in.

Further, in the first game state, the first display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed only on the second symbol display means, and in the first game state, the second symbol display means may be displayed. The first display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the symbol display means other than the above.

Further, only in the first gaming state, the first display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and even in a gaming state other than the first gaming state, the first display may be displayed. The first display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means.

In addition, there may be a case where only the first display and the second display are displayed, or a state other than both the first display and the second display is displayed. May be the case. In addition, there may be a case where both the first display and the second display are not displayed.

In addition, there may be a case where only both the first display and the first standby effect display are displayed, and displays other than both the first display and the first standby effect display are also displayed. It may be in the state of being. Further, both the first display and the first standby effect display may be displayed without fail, or both the first display and the first standby effect display may not be displayed. There may be cases.

Further, when the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the first state, only the display of the third display may be started, or the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the first state. Upon entering, things other than the display of the third display may be started. Further, when the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the first state, the display of the third display may be always started, or the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the first state. Upon entering, the display of the third display may not start.

Further, when the game ball enters only the first starting winning means in the first state, the display of the third display may be started, or the winning means other than the first starting winning means in the first state. When the game ball enters the market, the display of the third display may be started.

Further, when the game ball enters the first starting winning means only in the first state, the display of the third display may be started, or the first starting winning means may be started in a state other than the first state. When the game ball enters, the display of the third display may be started.

In addition, "one of the plurality of displays is a jackpot display [for example, a display of the jackpot start effect shown in FIG. 18 (i)].
In the first gaming state, when the jackpot display is displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and then the first display is displayed (hereinafter, "first". Case [For example, as shown in FIGS. 18 (h) to 18 (j), after the big hit symbol is displayed in the special figure 2, the display of the big hit start effect is displayed, and then the passage of the big hit generation gate 252 is promoted. When the display to be displayed is displayed, etc.] ”),
In the first gaming state, when the first display is displayed without displaying the jackpot display after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means (hereinafter, "second". Case [For example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (d) to 19 (f), after the big hit symbol is displayed in the special figure 2, the passage of the big hit generation gate 252 is promoted without displaying the display of the big hit start effect. When the display to be displayed is displayed, etc.] ”),
In the first case, both the first display and the second display are displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 18J, a display that promotes the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252. Is displayed on top of the gate entry standby effect display, etc.],
In the second case, the first state is obtained [for example, as shown in FIG. 19 (f), a display promoting the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is displayed superimposed on the display of the symbol demo, etc. ],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only in the first case (in the first game state, the jackpot display is displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and then the first display is displayed). It may be present, or it may be a case other than the first case. In addition, there may always be the first case, or there may be no first case.

In addition, there is only the second case (in the first game state, the first display is displayed without displaying the jackpot display after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means). It may be a case other than the second case. In addition, there may always be a second case, or there may be no second case.

Further, in the first case, only the first display and the second display may be displayed, and in the first case, both the first display and the second display may be displayed. A display other than the above may also be displayed. Further, in the first case, both the first display and the second display may be displayed without fail, and in the first case, both the first display and the second display may be displayed. May not be displayed.

Further, in the second case, it may be in only the first state or in a state other than the first state. Further, in the second case, the first state may always be reached, or the first state may not be reached.

Further, "When the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the display is switched from the first standby effect display to the second display [for example, FIGS. 33 (a) to 33 (a). As shown in the figure (c'), when the game ball wins the first special figure start port (top) 230 while the display promoting the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is displayed during the display of the symbol demo. , The display switches from the design demo to the gate entry standby effect display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the display may be switched only from the first standby effect display to the second display, or the first in the first state. When the game ball enters the starting winning means of, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to a display other than the second display. Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display without fail, and in the first state, the first display may be switched. When the game ball enters the starting winning means, the display may not be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display.

Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the display may be switched from only the first standby effect display to the second display, or in the first state, the first display. When the game ball enters the starting winning means, the display may be switched from the display other than the first standby effect display to the second display.

Further, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display only when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, and the first in the first state. The display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display even in cases other than the case where the game ball has entered the start winning means of.

Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means only in the first state, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display, or in a state other than the first state. When the game ball enters the first starting winning means, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display.

In addition, it is equipped with an audio output means [for example, a speaker 120, etc.] capable of outputting a plurality of types of audio.
One of the plurality of types of sounds is the first start winning sound [for example, the default start winning sound shown in FIG. 36 (c)].
One of the plurality of types of voices is a second start winning sound [for example, a start winning sound of the look-ahead notice shown in FIG. 36 (e)].
When the game ball enters the first starting winning means, the first starting winning sound may be output [for example, as shown in FIGS. 36 (b) to 36 (c), the first When a game ball wins a prize at the special figure start port (top) 230, a default start prize sound may be output, etc.],
When the game ball enters the first starting winning means, the second starting winning sound may be output [for example, as shown in FIGS. 36 (d) to 36 (e), the first When a game ball wins a prize at the special figure start port (top) 230, a start prize sound of a look-ahead notice may be output, etc.],
The first start winning sound is the default start winning sound.
The second start winning sound is the start winning sound of the look-ahead notice.
When the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the first start winning sound may be output.
Even if the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the second start winning sound is not output.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the audio output means may be capable of outputting only a plurality of types of audio, or may be capable of outputting audio other than the plurality of types of audio. Further, the audio output means may always output a plurality of types of audio, or may not output a plurality of types of audio.

Further, only the first start winning sound may be output when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, or when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, the first Sounds other than one start winning sound may also be output. Further, the first start winning sound may always be output when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, or the first starting winning when the game ball enters the first starting winning means. Sound may not be output.

Further, the first start winning sound may be output only when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, and other than when the game ball enters the first starting winning means. In some cases, the first start winning sound may be output.

Further, when the game ball enters only the first starting winning means, the first starting winning sound may be output, or the game ball enters the winning means other than the first starting winning means. Even if this is done, the first start winning sound may be output.

Further, only the second start winning sound may be output when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, or when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, the first Sounds other than the second start winning sound may also be output. Further, the second start winning sound may always be output when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, and the second starting winning when the game ball enters the first starting winning means. Sound may not be output.

Further, the second start winning sound may be output only when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, and other than the case where the game ball enters the first starting winning means. In some cases, the second start winning sound may be output.

Further, when the game ball enters only the first start winning means, the second start winning sound may be output, or the game ball enters the winning means other than the first starting winning means. In this case, the second start winning sound may be output.

Further, when the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the first state, only the first starting winning sound may be output, or in the first state, the first starting winning means may be output. When the game ball enters, sounds other than the first start winning sound may be output. Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the first start winning sound may be output without fail, or the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the first state. Then, the first start winning sound may not be output.

Further, when the game ball enters only the first starting winning means in the first state, the first starting winning sound may be output, and in the first state other than the first starting winning means. When the game ball also enters the winning means of, the first starting winning sound may be output.

Further, when the game ball enters the first starting winning means only in the first state, the first starting winning sound may be output, and the first starting winning sound may be output in a state other than the first state. When the game ball enters the starting winning means, the first starting winning sound may be output.

Further, even if the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, only the second start winning sound may not be output, and the first starting winning in the first state may not be output. Even if the game ball enters the means, it is not necessary that a sound other than the second start winning sound is output. Further, even if the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the first state, the second starting winning sound does not necessarily have to be output, and in the first state, the game is played in the first starting winning means. Even if the ball enters, the second start winning sound may be output.

Further, even if the game ball enters only the first starting winning means in the first state, the second starting winning sound may not be output, and the first starting winning in the first state may not be output. Even if the game ball enters a winning means other than the means, the second starting winning sound may not be output.

Further, even if the game ball enters the first start winning means only in the first state, the second start winning sound may not be output, and even in a state other than the first state, the first Even if the game ball enters the first starting winning means, the second starting winning sound may not be output.

In addition, it is equipped with an audio output means [for example, a speaker 120, etc.] capable of outputting a plurality of types of audio.
One of the plurality of types of sounds is the first start winning sound [for example, the default start winning sound shown in FIG. 36 (c)].
When the game ball enters the first starting winning means, the first starting winning sound may be output [for example, as shown in FIGS. 36 (b) to 36 (c), the first When a game ball wins a prize at the special figure start port (top) 230, a default start prize sound may be output, etc.],
Even if the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the first start winning sound is not output.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the audio output means may be capable of outputting only a plurality of types of audio, or may be capable of outputting audio other than the plurality of types of audio. Further, the audio output means may always output a plurality of types of audio, or may not output a plurality of types of audio.

Further, only the first start winning sound may be output when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, or when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, the first Sounds other than one start winning sound may also be output. Further, the first start winning sound may always be output when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, or the first starting winning when the game ball enters the first starting winning means. Sound may not be output.

Further, the first start winning sound may be output only when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, and other than when the game ball enters the first starting winning means. In some cases, the first start winning sound may be output.

Further, when the game ball enters only the first starting winning means, the first starting winning sound may be output, or the game ball enters the winning means other than the first starting winning means. Even if this is done, the first start winning sound may be output.

Further, even if the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, only the first start winning sound may not be output, and the first starting winning sound may be output in the first state. Even if the game ball enters the means, it is not necessary that a sound other than the first start winning sound is output. Further, even if the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the first state, the first starting winning sound does not necessarily have to be output, and in the first state, the game is played in the first starting winning means. Even if the ball enters, the first start winning sound may be output.

Further, even if the game ball enters only the first starting winning means in the first state, the first starting winning sound may not be output, and the first starting winning sound may not be output in the first state. Even if the game ball enters a winning means other than the means, the first starting winning sound may not be output.

Further, even if the game ball enters the first starting winning means only in the first state, the first starting winning sound may not be output, and the first starting winning sound may not be output even in a state other than the first state. Even if the game ball enters the first starting winning means, the first starting winning sound may not be output.

Further, "a light emitting means capable of emitting light with a plurality of types of light emitting patterns [for example, a game board lamp 442 and a game underframe lamp 452 shown in FIG. 5] is provided.
One of the plurality of types of light emission patterns is the first light emission pattern [for example, the lamp provided at the first special figure start port (top) 230 shown in FIG. 36 (c) emits white light. The default light emission mode, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of light emission patterns is a second light emission pattern [for example, the lamp provided at the first special figure start port (top) 230 shown in FIG. 36 (e) emits red light. Light emission mode of pre-reading notice, etc.]
When the game ball enters the first start winning means, light emission may be started in the first light emission pattern [for example, as shown in FIGS. 36 (b) to 36 (c), the first 1 When a game ball wins in the special figure start port (top) 230, the lamp provided in the first special figure start port (top) 230 may emit light in the default light emitting mode],
When the game ball enters the first start winning means, light emission may be started in the second light emission pattern [for example, as shown in FIGS. 36 (d) to 36 (e), the first 1 When a game ball wins in the special figure start port (top) 230, the lamp provided in the first special figure start port (top) 230 may emit light in the light emission mode of the look-ahead notice],
The first emission pattern is the default emission pattern and
The second light emission pattern is a light emission pattern of the look-ahead notice.
When the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, light emission may be started in the first light emission pattern.
Even if the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the light emission does not start in the second light emission pattern.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the light emitting means may be capable of emitting light only in a plurality of types of light emitting patterns, or may be capable of emitting light in a pattern other than the plurality of types of light emitting patterns. Further, the light emitting means may be one that always emits light in a plurality of types of light emission patterns, or may be one that does not emit light in a plurality of types of light emission patterns.

Further, when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, light emission may be started only in the first light emitting pattern, or when the game ball enters the first starting winning means. Light emission may be started in a light emission pattern other than the first light emission pattern. Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means, the light emission may always start in the first light emission pattern, or when the game ball enters the first start winning means, the first light emission may occur. The pattern may not start light emission.

Further, the light emission may be started in the first light emitting pattern only when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, and other than the case where the game ball enters the first starting winning means. In the case of, the light emission may be started in the first light emission pattern.

Further, when the game ball enters only the first start winning means, the light emission may be started in the first light emitting pattern, or the game ball may be started in the winning means other than the first starting winning means. In some cases, light emission may be started in the first light emission pattern when is entered.

Further, when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, the light emission may be started only in the second light emitting pattern, or when the game ball enters the first starting winning means. Light emission may be started in a light emission pattern other than the second light emission pattern. Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means, the light emission may always start in the second light emission pattern, or when the game ball enters the first start winning means, the second light emission may be started. The pattern may not start light emission.

Further, the light emission may be started in the second light emitting pattern only when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, and other than the case where the game ball enters the first starting winning means. In the case of, the light emission may be started in the second light emission pattern.

Further, when the game ball enters only the first starting winning means, the light emission may be started in the second light emitting pattern, or the game ball may be started in the winning means other than the first starting winning means. In some cases, light emission may be started in the second light emission pattern when is entered.

Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, light emission may be started only in the first light emitting pattern, or the first starting winning means in the first state. When the game ball enters the space, light emission may be started even with a light emission pattern other than the first light emission pattern. Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the light emission may always start in the first light emitting pattern, or the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the first state. When entering, light emission may not be started in the first light emission pattern.

Further, when the game ball enters only the first starting winning means in the first state, light emission may be started in the first light emitting pattern, or the first starting winning means in the first state. When the game ball enters a winning means other than the above, light emission may be started in the first light emission pattern.

Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means only in the first state, light emission may be started in the first light emission pattern, and even in a state other than the first state, the first light emission may be started. When the game ball enters the starting winning means of the above, light emission may be started in the first light emitting pattern.

Further, even if the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the light emission may not be started only in the second light emission pattern, and the first start in the first state. Even if the game ball enters the winning means, light emission may not be started even in a light emission pattern other than the second light emission pattern. Further, even if the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the light emission may not always start in the second light emission pattern, and the first start in the first state. Even if the game ball enters the winning means, light emission may be started in the second light emission pattern.

Further, even if the game ball enters only the first start winning means in the first state, the light emission may not be started in the second light emission pattern, and the first start in the first state. Even if the game ball enters a winning means other than the winning means, the light emission may not start in the second light emitting pattern.

Further, even if the game ball enters the first start winning means only in the first state, the light emission may not be started in the second light emission pattern, and even in a state other than the first state. Even if the game ball enters the first start winning means, the light emission may not be started in the second light emission pattern.

Further, "a light emitting means capable of emitting light with a plurality of types of light emitting patterns [for example, a game board lamp 442 and a game underframe lamp 452 shown in FIG. 5] is provided.
One of the plurality of types of light emission patterns is the first light emission pattern [for example, the lamp provided at the first special figure start port (top) 230 shown in FIG. 36 (c) is white. Default light emission mode, etc.],
When the game ball enters the first start winning means, light emission may be started in the first light emission pattern [for example, as shown in FIGS. 36 (b) to 36 (c), the first 1 When a game ball wins in the special figure start port (top) 230, the lamp provided in the first special figure start port (top) 230 may emit light in the default light emitting mode],
Even if the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, light emission is not started in the first light emission pattern.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the light emitting means may be capable of emitting light only in a plurality of types of light emitting patterns, or may be capable of emitting light in a pattern other than the plurality of types of light emitting patterns. Further, the light emitting means may be one that always emits light in a plurality of types of light emission patterns, or may be one that does not emit light in a plurality of types of light emission patterns.

Further, when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, light emission may be started only in the first light emitting pattern, or when the game ball enters the first starting winning means. Light emission may be started in a light emission pattern other than the first light emission pattern. Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means, the light emission may always start in the first light emission pattern, or when the game ball enters the first start winning means, the first light emission may occur. The pattern may not start light emission.

Further, the light emission may be started in the first light emitting pattern only when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, and other than the case where the game ball enters the first starting winning means. In the case of, the light emission may be started in the first light emission pattern.

Further, when the game ball enters only the first start winning means, the light emission may be started in the first light emitting pattern, or the game ball may be started in the winning means other than the first starting winning means. In some cases, light emission may be started in the first light emission pattern when is entered.

Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the light emission may not be started only in the first light emitting pattern, and the first starting winning means in the first state. When the game ball enters the space, light emission may not be started even with a light emission pattern other than the first light emission pattern. Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the light emission does not necessarily start in the first light emission pattern, and the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state. It is not necessary that the first emission pattern does not start when the light is emitted.

Further, when the game ball enters only the first start winning means in the first state, the light emission may not start in the first light emitting pattern, and the first starting winning means in the first state may not be started. When the game ball enters a winning means other than the above, the light emission may not be started in the first light emission pattern.

Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means only in the first state, the light emission may not be started in the first light emission pattern, and the first state is also in a state other than the first state. When the game ball enters the starting winning means of, the light emission may not be started in the first light emitting pattern.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"The first symbol display means [for example, the first special symbol display device 212, etc.] capable of executing the first symbol variation display, and
A second symbol display means [for example, a second special symbol display device 214, etc.] capable of executing a second symbol variation display, and
A game control means that can control any one of a plurality of game states [for example, CPU 304 in the main control unit 300] and
It is equipped with a certain gate that a game ball can enter [for example, a jackpot generation gate 252, etc.]
The first starting winning means [for example, the first special drawing starting port (top) 230, the first special drawing starting port (bottom) 231 and the like] that the game ball can enter,
A display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
It is a game table equipped with
The gate is provided at a position where the game ball can enter when hitting to the right [for example, as shown in FIG. 3, the jackpot generating gate 252 is provided on the right side of the game area 124. , It is possible to pass by hitting right, etc.],
The first starting winning means is a winning means corresponding to the first symbol display means.
Both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time [for example, as shown in FIG. 13A, the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212. And the symbol variation display on the second special figure display device 214 may be performed at the same time],
One of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state [for example, a normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), etc.].
One of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state [for example, a jackpot gaming state, a probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state), or an electric support state (special figure low probability). State, high probability state), etc.]
The second gaming state is a gaming state different from the first gaming state.
One of the plurality of displays is a symbol variation effect display [for example, a decorative symbol displayed in accordance with the variation display of the special figure 1 shown in FIGS. 14 (b) to 15 (x). Production display including fluctuation display (decorative design fluctuation production display), etc.]
One of the plurality of displays is the first standby effect display [for example, the display of the symbol demo shown in FIG. 18C].
The certain symbol variation effect display is a display including a display in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed.
The first standby effect display is a display including a display in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (c), in the display of the symbol demo, "decoration 5-decoration 4-". Includes the display of the mode in which the display is stopped by the combination of the out-of-order symbols of "Decoration 1"],
In the first gaming state, the certain symbol variation effect display is started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (f), in the normal gaming state, in the normal gaming state, The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol variation effect display in response to the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212],
In the first gaming state, the certain symbol variation effect display corresponding to the start of the second symbol variation display is not started [for example, as shown in FIG. 18C, in the normal gaming state. , The decorative symbol variation effect display is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to the symbol variation display on the second special symbol display device 214],
The first standby effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed.
After the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, a certain period [for example, the period during which the jackpot generation gate monitoring state shown in t83 to t85 of FIG. 16 is effective] is started.
When the game ball enters the certain gate in the certain period, the big hit game is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 16, during the period in which the big hit generation gate monitoring state shown in t83 to t85 is effective, it is shown in t84. When the game ball passes through the jackpot generation gate 252 at the timing, the jackpot game is started, etc.],
One of the plurality of displays is the first display [for example, right-handed to pass through the jackpot generating gate 252, which is shown in FIG. 33 (a). Display, etc. that promotes
One of the plurality of displays is a second display [for example, a display of a gate entry standby effect shown in FIG. 18 (j)].
The first display is a display that encourages right-handed striking.
The second display is a display that may be displayed during the certain period.
In the first gaming state, the first display is displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (d) to 19 (f)). , After the big hit symbol is displayed on the special figure 2, the display that promotes the passage of the big hit generation gate 252 is displayed, etc.],
In some cases, both the first display and the second display may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (j), a display that promotes the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 enters the gate. It is overlaid on the standby effect display, etc.],
A state in which both the first display and the first standby effect display are displayed (hereinafter, "a big hit occurs during the display of the symbol demo as shown in the first state [for example, FIG. 33A). A state in which a display promoting the passage of the gate 252 is displayed, etc.] ”) may occur.
One of the plurality of displays is a fourth display [for example, a display including the character display of "preparing for a big hit !!" shown in FIG. 18 (g)].
The fourth display is an effect display including a display for notifying a big hit [for example, a character display of "preparing for a big hit !!" shown in FIG. 18 (g)].
When the first standby effect display is displayed in a state where the first symbol variation display is not executed and the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter, referred to as "third case"). () [For example, as shown in FIG. 18C, the symbol variation display is not performed on the first special symbol display device 212, and the symbol variation display is performed on the second special symbol display device 214. The design demo may be displayed in the state],
In the third case, when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, the display of the fourth display may be started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Here, the first symbol display means may be capable of executing only the first symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the first symbol variation display. Further, the first symbol display means may be one that always executes the first symbol variation display, or may not execute the first symbol variation display.

Further, the second symbol display means may be capable of executing only the second symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the second symbol variation display. Further, the second symbol display means may be one that always executes the second symbol variation display, or may not execute the second symbol variation display.

Further, the game control means may be able to control only one of the plurality of game states, or may be controllable to other than any one of the plurality of game states. .. Further, the game control means may be one that always controls one of a plurality of game states, or may not be controlled to any one of a plurality of game states.

Here, a certain gate may be such that only a game ball can enter, or a gate other than a game ball may also be able to enter. Further, a certain gate may be one in which the game ball always enters, or may be one in which the game ball may not enter.

Further, the first starting winning means may be one in which only the game ball can enter, or one in which something other than the game ball can also enter. Further, the first starting winning means may be one in which the game ball always enters, or one in which the game ball may not enter.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of displays. Further, the display means may be one that always displays a plurality of displays, or may not display a plurality of displays.

Further, only a certain gate may be provided at a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right, or other than a certain gate at a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right. Things may be provided. Further, a certain gate may be provided at a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right, or a certain gate is provided at a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right. It may not be done.

Further, a certain gate may be provided only at a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right, or at a position other than a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right. A gate may be provided.

Further, a certain gate may be provided at a certain position where only the game ball can enter when hitting right, or at a certain position where something other than the game ball can enter when hitting right. A gate may be provided.

Further, a certain gate may be provided at a certain position where the game ball can enter only when hitting right, or at a certain position where the game ball can enter even when not hitting right. A gate may be provided.

Further, the first start winning means may correspond only to the first symbol display means, or may correspond to a symbol display means other than the first symbol display means. Further, the first start winning means may be one that always corresponds to the first symbol display means, or may not correspond to the first symbol display means.

Further, only the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time, or symbols other than both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time. The variable display may also be executed at the same time. In addition, both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may always be executed at the same time, or both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may not be executed at the same time. There may be.

The second gaming state may be a gaming state that is partially different from the first gaming state, or may be a gaming state that is completely different from the first gaming state.

Further, a certain symbol variation effect display may include only the display of the mode in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, or may include a display other than the display of the mode in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. There may be. In addition, a certain symbol variation effect display may always include a display of a mode in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, or may not include a display in a mode in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. It may be.

Further, the first standby effect display may include only the display in the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or may include a display other than the display in the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. May be good. In addition, the first standby effect display may always include the display of the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or may not include the display of the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. You may.

Further, in the first gaming state, only a certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be started. A display other than a certain symbol variation effect display may also be started in response to the start of. Further, in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be always started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be started. There may be a case where a certain symbol variation effect display is not started in response to the start of.

Further, in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be started only in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be started. A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to something other than the start of.

Further, in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of only the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be started. A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the symbol variation display other than the above.

Further, only in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and even in a gaming state other than the first gaming state, the first A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the symbol variation display of.

Further, in the first gaming state, it is not necessary to start only a certain symbol variation effect display in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation display It is not necessary to start the display other than a certain symbol variation effect display according to the start of the display. Further, in the first gaming state, it is not always necessary to start a certain symbol variation effect display in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the display.

Further, in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may not be started only in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation may be started. It is not necessary to start a certain symbol variation effect display in response to something other than the start of the display.

Further, in the first game state, it is not necessary to start a certain symbol change effect display in response to the start of only the second symbol change display, and in the first game state, the second symbol change display is started. It is not necessary to start a certain symbol variation effect display in response to the start of the symbol variation display other than the display.

Further, only in the first gaming state, it is not necessary to start a certain symbol variation effect display in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, and even in a gaming state other than the first gaming state, the first It is not necessary to start a certain symbol variation effect display in response to the start of the second symbol variation display.

Further, the first standby effect display may be displayed only in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed. Alternatively, the first symbol variation display may not be executed in the first game state, and may be displayed in a state other than the state in which the jackpot game is not executed. Further, the first standby effect display may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed. The first symbol variation display may not be executed in the first game state, and the jackpot game may not be displayed in the state where it is not executed.

Further, only a certain period may be started after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, or a period other than a certain period after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means. May also be started. Further, a certain period may be always started after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, and a certain period is not started after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means. There may be cases.

Further, a certain period may be started only after the big hit symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, and a certain period is started other than after the big hit symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means. May be done.

Further, a certain period may be started after only the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, or a certain period may be started even after a symbol other than the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means. May be started.

Further, a certain period may be started after the jackpot symbol is displayed only on the first symbol display means, or even after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the symbol display means other than the first symbol display means. Period may be started.

Further, when a game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period, only a big hit game may be started, or when a game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period, a game other than the big hit game may be started. .. Further, the jackpot game may always be started when the game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period, or the jackpot game may not be started when the game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period. ..

Further, the big hit game may be started only when the game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period, and the big hit game is started even in a case other than the case where the game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period. May be done.

Further, the big hit game may be started when the game ball enters only a certain gate in a certain period, or the big hit game may be started when the game ball enters something other than a certain gate in a certain period. ..

Further, the jackpot game may be started when the game ball enters a certain gate only for a certain period, or the jackpot game may be started when the game ball enters a certain gate during a period other than a certain period. Good.

Further, the first display may be one that encourages only right-handed striking, or may be one that encourages something other than right-handed striking. In addition, the first display may always encourage right-handed strikes, or may not prompt right-handed strikes.

Further, the second display may be displayed only in a certain period, or may be displayed in a period other than a certain period. In addition, the second display may be always displayed for a certain period of time, or may not be displayed for a certain period of time.

Further, in the first game state, only the first display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, or in the first game state, the second symbol display means may be displayed. After the jackpot symbol is displayed on, a display other than the first display may be displayed. Further, in the first game state, the first display may always be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and in the first game state, the second symbol display means may be displayed. The first display may not be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed in.

Further, in the first game state, the first display may be displayed only after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and in the first game state, the second symbol display means may be displayed. The first display may be displayed other than after the jackpot symbol is displayed.

Further, in the first game state, the first display may be displayed after only the jackpot symbol is displayed in the second symbol display means, or in the first game state, the second symbol display means may be displayed. The first display may be displayed after a symbol other than the jackpot symbol is displayed in.

Further, in the first game state, the first display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed only on the second symbol display means, and in the first game state, the second symbol display means may be displayed. The first display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the symbol display means other than the above.

Further, only in the first gaming state, the first display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and even in a gaming state other than the first gaming state, the first display may be displayed. The first display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means.

In addition, there may be a case where only the first display and the second display are displayed, or a state other than both the first display and the second display is displayed. May be the case. In addition, there may be a case where both the first display and the second display are not displayed.

In addition, there may be a case where only both the first display and the first standby effect display are displayed, and displays other than both the first display and the first standby effect display are also displayed. It may be in the state of being. Further, both the first display and the first standby effect display may be displayed without fail, or both the first display and the first standby effect display may not be displayed. There may be cases.

Further, the fourth display may include only a display for notifying the big hit, or may include a display other than the display for notifying the big hit. Further, the fourth display may always include a display for notifying a big hit, or may not include a display for notifying a big hit.

Further, there may be a case where only the first standby effect display is displayed in a state where the first symbol variation display is not executed and the second symbol variation display is executed, or the first In a state where the symbol variation display is not executed and the second symbol variation display is executed, a display other than the first standby effect display may be displayed. Further, the first standby effect display may always be displayed in a state where the first symbol variation display is not executed and the second symbol variation display is executed, or the first symbol variation display is executed. There may be a case where the first standby effect display is not displayed in a state where the second symbol variation display is being executed.

Further, the first standby effect display may be displayed only in the state where the first symbol variation display is not executed and the second symbol variation display is executed, or the first The first standby effect display may be displayed even in a state other than the state in which the symbol variation display is not executed and the second symbol variation display is executed.

Further, in the third case, when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, only the display of the fourth display may be started, and in the third case, the first starting winning means may be started. When the game ball enters the market, display of a display other than the fourth display may be started. Further, in the third case, when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, the display of the fourth display may be always started, and in the third case, the game ball enters the first starting winning means. Upon entering, the display of the fourth display may not start.

Further, in the third case, the display of the fourth display may be started only when the game ball enters the first start winning means, and in the third case, the first start. The display of the fourth display may be started even in cases other than the case where the game ball has entered the winning means.

Further, in the third case, when the game ball enters only the first starting winning means, the display of the fourth display may be started, and in the third case, the first starting winning means. When the game ball enters a winning means other than the above, the display of the fourth display may be started.

Further, when the game ball enters the first starting winning means only in the third case, the display of the fourth display may be started, and in cases other than the third case, the first When the game ball enters the starting winning means of, the display of the fourth display may be started.

In addition, "one of the plurality of displays is a jackpot display [for example, a display of the jackpot start effect shown in FIG. 18 (i)].
In the first gaming state, when the jackpot display is displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and then the first display is displayed (hereinafter, "first". Case [For example, as shown in FIGS. 18 (h) to 18 (j), after the big hit symbol is displayed in the special figure 2, the display of the big hit start effect is displayed, and then the passage of the big hit generation gate 252 is promoted. When the display to be displayed is displayed, etc.] ”),
In the first gaming state, when the first display is displayed without displaying the jackpot display after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means (hereinafter, "second". Case [For example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (d) to 19 (f), after the big hit symbol is displayed in the special figure 2, the passage of the big hit generation gate 252 is promoted without displaying the display of the big hit start effect. When the display to be displayed is displayed, etc.] ”),
In the first case, both the first display and the second display are displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 18J, a display that promotes the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252. Is displayed on top of the gate entry standby effect display, etc.],
In the second case, the first state is obtained [for example, as shown in FIG. 19 (f), a display promoting the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is displayed superimposed on the display of the symbol demo, etc. ],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only in the first case (in the first game state, the jackpot display is displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and then the first display is displayed). It may be present, or it may be a case other than the first case. In addition, there may always be the first case, or there may be no first case.

In addition, there is only the second case (in the first game state, the first display is displayed without displaying the jackpot display after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means). It may be a case other than the second case. In addition, there may always be a second case, or there may be no second case.

Further, in the first case, only the first display and the second display may be displayed, and in the first case, both the first display and the second display may be displayed. A display other than the above may also be displayed. Further, in the first case, both the first display and the second display may be displayed without fail, and in the first case, both the first display and the second display may be displayed. May not be displayed.

Further, in the second case, it may be in only the first state or in a state other than the first state. Further, in the second case, the first state may always be reached, or the first state may not be reached.

Further, "When the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the display is switched from the first standby effect display to the second display [for example, FIGS. 33 (a) to 33 (a). As shown in the figure (c'), when the game ball wins the first special figure start port (top) 230 while the display promoting the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is displayed during the display of the symbol demo. , The display switches from the design demo to the gate entry standby effect display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the display may be switched only from the first standby effect display to the second display, or the first in the first state. When the game ball enters the starting winning means of, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to a display other than the second display. Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display without fail, and in the first state, the first display may be switched. When the game ball enters the starting winning means, the display may not be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display.

Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the display may be switched from only the first standby effect display to the second display, or in the first state, the first display. When the game ball enters the starting winning means, the display may be switched from the display other than the first standby effect display to the second display.

Further, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display only when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, and the first in the first state. The display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display even in cases other than the case where the game ball has entered the start winning means of.

Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means only in the first state, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display, or in a state other than the first state. When the game ball enters the first starting winning means, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display.

In addition, "in the third case, when the second symbol variation display being executed is a symbol variation display in which the big hit is obtained, when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, the fourth symbol The display of the display always starts,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"The first symbol display means [for example, the first special symbol display device 212, etc.] capable of executing the first symbol variation display, and
A second symbol display means [for example, a second special symbol display device 214, etc.] capable of executing a second symbol variation display, and
A game control means that can control any one of a plurality of game states [for example, CPU 304 in the main control unit 300] and
A certain gate that a game ball can enter [for example, a jackpot generation gate 252, etc.]
A display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
It is a game table equipped with
The gate is provided at a position where the game ball can enter when hitting to the right [for example, as shown in FIG. 3, the jackpot generating gate 252 is provided on the right side of the game area 124. , It is possible to pass by hitting right, etc.],
Both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time [for example, as shown in FIG. 13A, the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212. And the symbol variation display on the second special figure display device 214 may be performed at the same time],
One of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state [for example, a normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), etc.].
One of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state [for example, a jackpot gaming state, a probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state), or an electric support state (special figure low probability). State, high probability state), etc.]
The second gaming state is a gaming state different from the first gaming state.
One of the plurality of displays is a symbol variation effect display [for example, a decorative symbol displayed in accordance with the variation display of the special figure 1 shown in FIGS. 14 (b) to 15 (x). Production display including fluctuation display (decorative design fluctuation production display), etc.]
One of the plurality of displays is the first standby effect display [for example, the display of the symbol demo shown in FIG. 18C].
The certain symbol variation effect display is a display including a display in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed.
The first standby effect display is a display including a display in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (c), in the display of the symbol demo, "decoration 5-decoration 4-". Includes the display of the mode in which the display is stopped by the combination of the out-of-order symbols of "Decoration 1"],
In the first gaming state, the certain symbol variation effect display is started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (f), in the normal gaming state, in the normal gaming state, The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol variation effect display in response to the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212],
In the first gaming state, the certain symbol variation effect display corresponding to the start of the second symbol variation display is not started [for example, as shown in FIG. 18C, in the normal gaming state. , The decorative symbol variation effect display is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to the symbol variation display on the second special symbol display device 214],
The first standby effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed.
After the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, a certain period [for example, the period during which the jackpot generation gate monitoring state shown in t83 to t85 of FIG. 16 is effective] is started.
When the game ball enters the certain gate in the certain period, the big hit game is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 16, during the period in which the big hit generation gate monitoring state shown in t83 to t85 is effective, it is shown in t84. When the game ball passes through the jackpot generation gate 252 at the timing, the jackpot game is started, etc.],
One of the plurality of displays is the first display [for example, right-handed to pass through the jackpot generating gate 252, which is shown in FIG. 33 (a). Display, etc. that promotes
One of the plurality of displays is a second display [for example, a display of a gate entry standby effect shown in FIG. 18 (j)].
One of the plurality of displays is a fifth display [for example, the menu screen shown in FIG. 33 (c)].
The first display is a display that encourages right-handed striking.
The second display is a display that may be displayed during the certain period.
The fifth display is a setting screen display.
In the first gaming state, the first display is displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (d) to 19 (f)). , After the big hit symbol is displayed on the special figure 2, the display that promotes the passage of the big hit generation gate 252 is displayed, etc.],
In some cases, both the first display and the second display may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (j), a display that promotes the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 enters the gate. It is overlaid on the standby effect display, etc.],
A state in which both the first display and the first standby effect display are displayed (hereinafter, "a big hit occurs during the display of the symbol demo as shown in the first state [for example, FIG. 22 (h))". A state in which a display promoting the passage of the gate 252 is displayed, etc.] ”) may occur.
Even in the first state, the display of the fifth display can be started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Here, the first symbol display means may be capable of executing only the first symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the first symbol variation display. Further, the first symbol display means may be one that always executes the first symbol variation display, or may not execute the first symbol variation display.

Further, the second symbol display means may be capable of executing only the second symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the second symbol variation display. Further, the second symbol display means may be one that always executes the second symbol variation display, or may not execute the second symbol variation display.

Further, the game control means may be able to control only one of the plurality of game states, or may be controllable to other than any one of the plurality of game states. .. Further, the game control means may be one that always controls one of a plurality of game states, or may not be controlled to any one of a plurality of game states.

Further, a certain gate may be such that only a game ball can enter, or a gate other than a game ball may also be able to enter. Further, a certain gate may be one in which the game ball always enters, or may be one in which the game ball may not enter.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of displays. Further, the display means may be one that always displays a plurality of displays, or may not display a plurality of displays.

Further, only a certain gate may be provided at a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right, or other than a certain gate at a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right. Things may be provided. Further, a certain gate may be provided at a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right, or a certain gate is provided at a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right. It may not be done.

Further, a certain gate may be provided only at a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right, or at a position other than a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right. A gate may be provided.

Further, a certain gate may be provided at a certain position where only the game ball can enter when hitting right, or at a certain position where something other than the game ball can enter when hitting right. A gate may be provided.

Further, a certain gate may be provided at a certain position where the game ball can enter only when hitting right, or at a certain position where the game ball can enter even when not hitting right. A gate may be provided.

Further, only the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time, or symbols other than both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time. The variable display may also be executed at the same time. In addition, both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may always be executed at the same time, or both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may not be executed at the same time. There may be.

The second gaming state may be a gaming state that is partially different from the first gaming state, or may be a gaming state that is completely different from the first gaming state.

Further, a certain symbol variation effect display may include only the display of the mode in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, or may include a display other than the display of the mode in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. There may be. In addition, a certain symbol variation effect display may always include a display of a mode in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, or may not include a display in a mode in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. It may be.

Further, the first standby effect display may include only the display in the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or may include a display other than the display in the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. May be good. In addition, the first standby effect display may always include the display of the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or may not include the display of the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. You may.

Further, in the first gaming state, only a certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be started. A display other than a certain symbol variation effect display may also be started in response to the start of. Further, in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be always started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be started. There may be a case where a certain symbol variation effect display is not started in response to the start of.

Further, in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be started only in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be started. A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to something other than the start of.

Further, in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of only the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be started. A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the symbol variation display other than the above.

Further, only in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and even in a gaming state other than the first gaming state, the first A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the symbol variation display of.

Further, in the first gaming state, it is not necessary to start only a certain symbol variation effect display in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation display It is not necessary to start the display other than a certain symbol variation effect display according to the start of the display. Further, in the first gaming state, it is not always necessary to start a certain symbol variation effect display in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the display.

Further, in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may not be started only in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation may be started. It is not necessary to start a certain symbol variation effect display in response to something other than the start of the display.

Further, in the first game state, it is not necessary to start a certain symbol change effect display in response to the start of only the second symbol change display, and in the first game state, the second symbol change display is started. It is not necessary to start a certain symbol variation effect display in response to the start of the symbol variation display other than the display.

Further, only in the first gaming state, it is not necessary to start a certain symbol variation effect display in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, and even in a gaming state other than the first gaming state, the first It is not necessary to start a certain symbol variation effect display in response to the start of the second symbol variation display.

Further, the first standby effect display may be displayed only in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed. Alternatively, the first symbol variation display may not be executed in the first game state, and may be displayed in a state other than the state in which the jackpot game is not executed. Further, the first standby effect display may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed. The first symbol variation display may not be executed in the first game state, and the jackpot game may not be displayed in the state where it is not executed.

Further, only a certain period may be started after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, or a period other than a certain period after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means. May also be started. Further, a certain period may be always started after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, and a certain period is not started after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means. There may be cases.

Further, a certain period may be started only after the big hit symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, and a certain period is started other than after the big hit symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means. May be done.

Further, a certain period may be started after only the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, or a certain period may be started even after a symbol other than the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means. May be started.

Further, a certain period may be started after the jackpot symbol is displayed only on the first symbol display means, or even after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the symbol display means other than the first symbol display means. Period may be started.

Further, when a game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period, only a big hit game may be started, or when a game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period, a game other than the big hit game may be started. .. Further, the jackpot game may always be started when the game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period, or the jackpot game may not be started when the game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period. ..

Further, the big hit game may be started only when the game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period, and the big hit game is started even in a case other than the case where the game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period. May be done.

Further, the big hit game may be started when the game ball enters only a certain gate in a certain period, or the big hit game may be started when the game ball enters something other than a certain gate in a certain period. ..

Further, the jackpot game may be started when the game ball enters a certain gate only for a certain period, or the jackpot game may be started when the game ball enters a certain gate during a period other than a certain period. Good.

Further, the first display may be one that encourages only right-handed striking, or may be one that encourages something other than right-handed striking. In addition, the first display may always encourage right-handed strikes, or may not prompt right-handed strikes.

Further, the second display may be displayed only in a certain period, or may be displayed in a period other than a certain period. In addition, the second display may be always displayed for a certain period of time, or may not be displayed for a certain period of time.

Further, the fifth display may display only the setting screen, or may display a screen other than the setting screen. Further, the fifth display may be one that always displays the setting screen, or may not display the setting screen.

Further, in the first game state, only the first display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, or in the first game state, the second symbol display means may be displayed. After the jackpot symbol is displayed on, a display other than the first display may be displayed. Further, in the first game state, the first display may always be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and in the first game state, the second symbol display means may be displayed. The first display may not be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed in.

Further, in the first game state, the first display may be displayed only after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and in the first game state, the second symbol display means may be displayed. The first display may be displayed other than after the jackpot symbol is displayed.

Further, in the first game state, the first display may be displayed after only the jackpot symbol is displayed in the second symbol display means, or in the first game state, the second symbol display means may be displayed. The first display may be displayed after a symbol other than the jackpot symbol is displayed in.

Further, in the first game state, the first display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed only on the second symbol display means, and in the first game state, the second symbol display means may be displayed. The first display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the symbol display means other than the above.

Further, only in the first gaming state, the first display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and even in a gaming state other than the first gaming state, the first display may be displayed. The first display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means.

In addition, there may be a case where only the first display and the second display are displayed, or a state other than both the first display and the second display is displayed. May be the case. In addition, there may be a case where both the first display and the second display are not displayed.

In addition, there may be a case where only both the first display and the first standby effect display are displayed, and displays other than both the first display and the first standby effect display are also displayed. It may be in the state of being. Further, both the first display and the first standby effect display may be displayed without fail, or both the first display and the first standby effect display may not be displayed. There may be cases.

Further, even in the first state, only the display of the fifth display may be started, and even in the first state, the display of the display other than the fifth display can be started. There may be. Further, even in the first state, the display of the fifth display may always be started, and even in the first state, the display of the fifth display may not be started. ..

In addition, it is provided with "operation means [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 190, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate the player.
When the operating means is operated in the first state, the display of the fifth display may be started [for example, the effect button 136 is pressed once during the display of the symbol demo shown in FIG. 22 (h). When it is operated, the display of the setting screen is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the operating means may be provided at a position where it can be operated only by the player, or may be provided at a position where it can be operated by a person other than the player. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position that can be operated by the player, or may not be provided at a position that can be operated by the player.

Further, when the operating means is operated in the first state, only the display of the fifth display may be started, or when the operating means is operated in the first state, the display of the fifth display may be started. Something other than the display may be started. Further, the display of the fifth display may always be started when the operating means is operated in the first state, and the display of the fifth display is not started when the operating means is operated in the first state. There may be cases.

Further, when the operating means is operated only in the first state, the display of the fifth display may be started, and when the operating means is operated in a state other than the first state, the fifth display may be started. The display of the display of five may be started.

In addition, "one of the plurality of displays is a jackpot display [for example, a display of the jackpot start effect shown in FIG. 18 (i)].
In the first gaming state, when the jackpot display is displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and then the first display is displayed (hereinafter, "first". Case [For example, as shown in FIGS. 18 (h) to 18 (j), after the big hit symbol is displayed in the special figure 2, the display of the big hit start effect is displayed, and then the passage of the big hit generation gate 252 is promoted. When the display to be displayed is displayed, etc.] ”),
In the first gaming state, when the first display is displayed without displaying the jackpot display after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means (hereinafter, "second". Case [For example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (d) to 19 (f), after the big hit symbol is displayed in the special figure 2, the passage of the big hit generation gate 252 is promoted without displaying the display of the big hit start effect. When the display to be displayed is displayed, etc.] ”),
In the first case, both the first display and the second display are displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 18J, a display that promotes the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252. Is displayed on top of the gate entry standby effect display, etc.],
In the second case, the first state is obtained [for example, as shown in FIG. 19 (f), a display promoting the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is displayed superimposed on the display of the symbol demo, etc. ],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only in the first case (in the first game state, the jackpot display is displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and then the first display is displayed). It may be present, or it may be a case other than the first case. In addition, there may always be the first case, or there may be no first case.

In addition, there is only the second case (in the first game state, the first display is displayed without displaying the jackpot display after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means). It may be a case other than the second case. In addition, there may always be a second case, or there may be no second case.

Further, in the first case, only the first display and the second display may be displayed, and in the first case, both the first display and the second display may be displayed. A display other than the above may also be displayed. Further, in the first case, both the first display and the second display may be displayed without fail, and in the first case, both the first display and the second display may be displayed. May not be displayed.

Further, in the second case, it may be in only the first state or in a state other than the first state. Further, in the second case, the first state may always be reached, or the first state may not be reached.

In addition, it is provided with "first starting winning means [for example, first special drawing starting port (top) 230, first special drawing starting port (bottom) 231 etc.] in which a game ball can enter.
The first starting winning means is a winning means corresponding to the first symbol display means.
When the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the display is switched from the first standby effect display to the second display [for example, FIGS. 33 (a) to 33 (a) to FIG. As shown in c'), when the game ball wins the first special figure start port (upper) 230 while the display promoting the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is displayed during the display of the symbol demo, the symbol demo The display switches to the display of the gate entry standby effect, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first starting winning means may be one in which only the game ball can enter, or one in which something other than the game ball can also enter. Further, the first starting winning means may be one in which the game ball always enters, or one in which the game ball may not enter.

Further, the first start winning means may correspond only to the first symbol display means, or may correspond to a symbol display means other than the first symbol display means. Further, the first start winning means may be one that always corresponds to the first symbol display means, or may not correspond to the first symbol display means.

Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the display may be switched only from the first standby effect display to the second display, or the first in the first state. When the game ball enters the starting winning means, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to a display other than the second display. Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display without fail, and in the first state, the first display may be switched. When the game ball enters the starting winning means, the display may not be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display.

Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the display may be switched from only the first standby effect display to the second display, or in the first state, the first display. When the game ball enters the starting winning means, the display may be switched from the display other than the first standby effect display to the second display.

Further, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display only when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, and the first in the first state. The display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display even in cases other than the case where the game ball has entered the start winning means of.

Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means only in the first state, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display, or in a state other than the first state. When the game ball enters the first starting winning means, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"The first symbol display means [for example, the first special symbol display device 212, etc.] capable of executing the first symbol variation display, and
A second symbol display means [for example, a second special symbol display device 214, etc.] capable of executing a second symbol variation display, and
A game control means that can control any one of a plurality of game states [for example, CPU 304 in the main control unit 300] and
A certain gate that a game ball can enter [for example, a jackpot generation gate 252, etc.]
A display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
It is a game table equipped with
The gate is provided at a position where the game ball can enter when hitting to the right [for example, as shown in FIG. 3, the jackpot generating gate 252 is provided on the right side of the game area 124. , It is possible to pass by hitting right, etc.],
Both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time [for example, as shown in FIG. 13A, the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212. And the symbol variation display on the second special figure display device 214 may be performed at the same time],
One of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state [for example, a normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), etc.].
One of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state [for example, a jackpot gaming state, a probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state), or an electric support state (special figure low probability). State, high probability state), etc.]
The second gaming state is a gaming state different from the first gaming state.
One of the plurality of displays is a symbol variation effect display [for example, a decorative symbol displayed in accordance with the variation display of the special figure 1 shown in FIGS. 14 (b) to 15 (x). Production display including fluctuation display (decorative design fluctuation production display), etc.]
One of the plurality of displays is the first standby effect display [for example, the display of the symbol demo shown in FIG. 18C].
One of the plurality of displays is a second standby effect display [for example, a display of an animation demo shown in FIG. 18 (d)].
The certain symbol variation effect display is a display including a display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are variablely displayed.
The first standby effect display is a display including a display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (c), in the display of the symbol demo, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Among the modes, "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" includes both the display of the stop mode of the decorative symbol and the display of the stop mode of the mini-design, which are stopped and displayed by the combination of the outliers.],
The second standby effect display is a display that does not include a display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 18D, in the display of the animation demo, the decorative symbols are stopped. Of the display modes, "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" includes only the display of the stop mode of the mini symbol that was stopped and displayed by the combination of the outlier symbols],
The display mode of the second standby effect display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first standby effect display.
In the first gaming state, the certain symbol variation effect display is started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (f), in the normal gaming state, in the normal gaming state, The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol variation effect display in response to the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212],
In the first gaming state, the certain symbol variation effect display corresponding to the start of the second symbol variation display is not started [for example, as shown in FIG. 18C, in the normal gaming state. , The decorative symbol variation effect display is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to the symbol variation display on the second special symbol display device 214],
The first standby effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed.
The second standby effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed in the first game state.
After the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, a certain period [for example, the period during which the jackpot generation gate monitoring state shown in t83 to t85 of FIG. 16 is effective] is started.
When the game ball enters the certain gate in the certain period, the big hit game is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 16, during the period in which the big hit generation gate monitoring state shown in t83 to t85 is effective, it is shown in t84. When the game ball passes through the jackpot generation gate 252 at the timing, the jackpot game is started, etc.],
One of the plurality of displays is the first display [for example, right-handed to pass through the jackpot generating gate 252, which is shown in FIG. 33 (a). Display, etc. that promotes
One of the plurality of displays is a second display [for example, a display of a gate entry standby effect shown in FIG. 18 (j)].
The first display is a display that encourages right-handed striking.
The second display is a display that may be displayed during the certain period.
In the first gaming state, the first display is displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (d) to 19 (f)). , After the big hit symbol is displayed on the special figure 2, the display that promotes the passage of the big hit generation gate 252 is displayed, etc.],
In some cases, both the first display and the second display may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (j), a display that promotes the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 enters the gate. It is overlaid on the standby effect display, etc.],
A state in which both the first display and the first standby effect display are displayed (hereinafter, "a big hit occurs during the display of the symbol demo as shown in the first state [for example, FIG. 21 (h)). A state in which a display promoting the passage of the gate 252 is displayed, etc.] ”) may occur.
A state in which both the first display and the second standby effect display are displayed (hereinafter, "a big hit during the display of the animation demo as shown in the second state [for example, FIG. 21 (g')). A state in which a display promoting the passage of the generation gate 252 is displayed, etc.] ”).
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Here, the first symbol display means may be capable of executing only the first symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the first symbol variation display. Further, the first symbol display means may be one that always executes the first symbol variation display, or may not execute the first symbol variation display.

Further, the second symbol display means may be capable of executing only the second symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the second symbol variation display. Further, the second symbol display means may be one that always executes the second symbol variation display, or may not execute the second symbol variation display.

Further, the game control means may be able to control only one of the plurality of game states, or may be controllable to other than any one of the plurality of game states. .. Further, the game control means may be one that always controls one of a plurality of game states, or may not be controlled to any one of a plurality of game states.

Further, a certain gate may be such that only a game ball can enter, or a gate other than a game ball may also be able to enter. Further, a certain gate may be one in which the game ball always enters, or may be one in which the game ball may not enter.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of displays. Further, the display means may be one that always displays a plurality of displays, or may not display a plurality of displays.

Further, only a certain gate may be provided at a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right, or other than a certain gate at a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right. Things may be provided. Further, a certain gate may be provided at a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right, or a certain gate is provided at a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right. It may not be done.

Further, a certain gate may be provided only at a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right, or at a position other than a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right. A gate may be provided.

Further, a certain gate may be provided at a certain position where only the game ball can enter when hitting right, or at a certain position where something other than the game ball can enter when hitting right. A gate may be provided.

Further, a certain gate may be provided at a certain position where the game ball can enter only when hitting right, or at a certain position where the game ball can enter even when not hitting right. A gate may be provided.

Further, only the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time, or symbols other than both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time. The variable display may also be executed at the same time. In addition, both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may always be executed at the same time, or both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may not be executed at the same time. There may be.

The second gaming state may be a gaming state that is partially different from the first gaming state, or may be a gaming state that is completely different from the first gaming state.

Further, a certain symbol variation effect display may include only the display of a mode in which a plurality of decorative symbols are variablely displayed, or a display other than the display in a mode in which a plurality of decorative symbols are variablely displayed. May also be included. Further, a certain symbol variation effect display may always include a display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are variablely displayed, or does not include a display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are variablely displayed. It may be something that may occur.

Further, the first standby effect display may include only the display of the mode in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, or may include the display other than the display of the mode in which the plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. It may be one. Further, the first standby effect display may always include the display of the mode in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, or may not include the display of the mode in which the plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. It may be something.

Further, the second standby effect display may not include only the display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, or may be a display other than the display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. It may not be included. Further, the second standby effect display may not always include the display of the mode in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, or may include the display of the mode in which the plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. It may be something.

Further, in the first gaming state, only a certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be started. A display other than a certain symbol variation effect display may also be started in response to the start of. Further, in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be always started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be started. There may be a case where a certain symbol variation effect display is not started in response to the start of.

Further, in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be started only in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be started. A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to something other than the start of.

Further, in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of only the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be started. A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the symbol variation display other than the above.

Further, only in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and even in a gaming state other than the first gaming state, the first A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the symbol variation display of.

Further, in the first gaming state, it is not necessary to start only a certain symbol variation effect display in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation display It is not necessary to start the display other than a certain symbol variation effect display according to the start of the display. Further, in the first gaming state, it is not always necessary to start a certain symbol variation effect display in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the display.

Further, in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may not be started only in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation may be started. It is not necessary to start a certain symbol variation effect display in response to something other than the start of the display.

Further, the first standby effect display may be displayed only in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed. Alternatively, the first symbol variation display may not be executed in the first game state, and may be displayed in a state other than the state in which the jackpot game is not executed. Further, the first standby effect display may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed. The first symbol variation display may not be executed in the first game state, and the jackpot game may not be displayed in the state where it is not executed.

Further, the second standby effect display may be displayed only in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed. Alternatively, the first symbol variation display may not be executed in the first game state, and may be displayed in a state other than the state in which the jackpot game is not executed. Further, the second standby effect display may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed. The first symbol variation display may not be executed in the first game state, and the jackpot game may not be displayed in the state where it is not executed.

Further, only a certain period may be started after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, or a period other than a certain period after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means. May also be started. Further, a certain period may be always started after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, and a certain period is not started after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means. There may be cases.

Further, a certain period may be started only after the big hit symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, and a certain period is started other than after the big hit symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means. May be done.

Further, a certain period may be started after only the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, or a certain period may be started even after a symbol other than the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means. May be started.

Further, a certain period may be started after the jackpot symbol is displayed only on the first symbol display means, or even after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the symbol display means other than the first symbol display means. Period may be started.

Further, when a game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period, only a big hit game may be started, or when a game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period, a game other than the big hit game may be started. .. Further, the jackpot game may always be started when the game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period, or the jackpot game may not be started when the game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period. ..

Further, the big hit game may be started only when the game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period, and the big hit game is started even in a case other than the case where the game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period. May be done.

Further, the big hit game may be started when the game ball enters only a certain gate in a certain period, or the big hit game may be started when the game ball enters something other than a certain gate in a certain period. ..

Further, the jackpot game may be started when the game ball enters a certain gate only for a certain period, or the jackpot game may be started when the game ball enters a certain gate during a period other than a certain period. Good.

Further, the first display may be one that encourages only right-handed striking, or may be one that encourages something other than right-handed striking. In addition, the first display may always encourage right-handed strikes, or may not prompt right-handed strikes.

Further, the second display may be displayed only in a certain period, or may be displayed in a period other than a certain period. In addition, the second display may be always displayed for a certain period of time, or may not be displayed for a certain period of time.

Further, in the first game state, only the first display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, or in the first game state, the second symbol display means may be displayed. After the jackpot symbol is displayed on, a display other than the first display may be displayed. Further, in the first game state, the first display may always be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and in the first game state, the second symbol display means may be displayed. The first display may not be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed in.

Further, in the first game state, the first display may be displayed only after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and in the first game state, the second symbol display means may be displayed. The first display may be displayed other than after the jackpot symbol is displayed.

Further, in the first game state, the first display may be displayed after only the jackpot symbol is displayed in the second symbol display means, or in the first game state, the second symbol display means may be displayed. The first display may be displayed after a symbol other than the jackpot symbol is displayed in.

Further, in the first game state, the first display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed only on the second symbol display means, and in the first game state, the second symbol display means may be displayed. The first display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the symbol display means other than the above.

Further, only in the first gaming state, the first display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and even in a gaming state other than the first gaming state, the first display may be displayed. The first display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means.

In addition, there may be a case where only the first display and the second display are displayed, or a state other than both the first display and the second display is displayed. May be the case. In addition, there may be a case where both the first display and the second display are not displayed.

In addition, there may be a case where only both the first display and the first standby effect display are displayed, and displays other than both the first display and the first standby effect display are also displayed. It may be in the state of being. Further, both the first display and the first standby effect display may be displayed without fail, or both the first display and the first standby effect display may not be displayed. There may be cases.

In addition, there may be a case where only both the first display and the second standby effect display are displayed, and displays other than both the first display and the second standby effect display are also displayed. It may be in the state of being. Further, both the first display and the second standby effect display may be displayed without fail, or both the first display and the second standby effect display may not be displayed. There may be cases.

In addition, "the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display after the first standby effect display is displayed [for example, FIGS. 21 (c) to 21 (see). As shown in d), the display of the design demo has been switched to the display of the animation demo, etc.],
After the second standby effect display is displayed, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display [for example, in FIGS. 21 (g) to 21 (h). As shown, the display of the animation demo has been switched to the display of the design demo, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, after the first standby effect display is displayed, the display may be switched only from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display, or the first standby effect display is displayed. The display may be later switched from the first standby effect display to a display other than the second standby effect display. Further, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display after the first standby effect display is displayed, or after the first standby effect display is displayed. The display may not switch from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display.

Further, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display only after the first standby effect display is displayed, or the first standby effect display may be displayed. The display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display other than after.

Further, after the second standby effect display is displayed, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to only the first standby effect display, or the second standby effect display is displayed. The display may later switch from the second standby effect display to a display other than the first standby effect display. Further, after the second standby effect display is displayed, the display may always switch from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display, or the second standby effect display is displayed. The display may not be switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display later.

Further, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display only after the second standby effect display is displayed, or the second standby effect display may be displayed. The display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display other than after.

In addition, "one of the plurality of displays is a jackpot display [for example, a display of the jackpot start effect shown in FIG. 18 (i)].
In the first gaming state, when the jackpot display is displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and then the first display is displayed (hereinafter, "first". Case [For example, as shown in FIGS. 18 (h) to 18 (j), after the big hit symbol is displayed in the special figure 2, the display of the big hit start effect is displayed, and then the passage of the big hit generation gate 252 is promoted. When the display to be displayed is displayed, etc.] ”),
In the first gaming state, when the first display is displayed without displaying the jackpot display after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means (hereinafter, "second". Case [For example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (d) to 19 (f), after the big hit symbol is displayed in the special figure 2, the passage of the big hit generation gate 252 is promoted without displaying the display of the big hit start effect. When the display to be displayed is displayed, etc.] ”),
In the first case, both the first display and the second display are displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 18J, a display that promotes the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252. Is displayed on top of the gate entry standby effect display, etc.],
In the second case, the first state or the second state is reached [for example, as shown in FIG. 21 (g') and FIG. 21 (f'), the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is promoted. The display is overlaid on the design demo display and the animation demo display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only in the first case (in the first game state, the jackpot display is displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and then the first display is displayed). It may be present, or it may be a case other than the first case. In addition, there may always be the first case, or there may be no first case.

In addition, there is only the second case (in the first game state, the first display is displayed without displaying the jackpot display after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means). It may be a case other than the second case. In addition, there may always be a second case, or there may be no second case.

Further, in the first case, only the first display and the second display may be displayed, and in the first case, both the first display and the second display may be displayed. A display other than the above may also be displayed. Further, in the first case, both the first display and the second display may be displayed without fail, and in the first case, both the first display and the second display may be displayed. May not be displayed.

Further, in the second case, it may be in only the first state or the second state, or may be in a state other than the first state or the second state. Further, in the second case, the first state or the second state may always be reached, or the first state or the second state may not be reached.

In addition, it is provided with "first starting winning means [for example, first special drawing starting port (top) 230, first special drawing starting port (bottom) 231 etc.] in which a game ball can enter.
The first starting winning means is a winning means corresponding to the first symbol display means.
When the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the display is switched from the first standby effect display to the second display [for example, FIGS. 33 (a) to 33 (a) to FIG. As shown in c'), when the game ball wins the first special figure start port (upper) 230 while the display promoting the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is displayed during the display of the symbol demo, the symbol demo The display switches to the display of the gate entry standby effect, etc.],
When the game ball enters the first start winning means in the second state, the display is switched from the second standby effect display to the second display [for example, FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (a) to FIG. As shown in c'), when a game ball wins a prize at the first special figure start port (top) 230 while the display promoting the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is displayed during the display of the animation demo, the animation demo The display switches to the gate entry standby effect display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first starting winning means may be one in which only the game ball can enter, or one in which something other than the game ball can also enter. Further, the first starting winning means may be one in which the game ball always enters, or one in which the game ball may not enter.

Further, the first start winning means may correspond only to the first symbol display means, or may correspond to a symbol display means other than the first symbol display means. Further, the first start winning means may be one that always corresponds to the first symbol display means, or may not correspond to the first symbol display means.

Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the display may be switched only from the first standby effect display to the second display, or the first in the first state. When the game ball enters the starting winning means, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to a display other than the second display. Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display without fail, and in the first state, the first display may be switched. When the game ball enters the starting winning means, the display may not be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display.

Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the display may be switched from only the first standby effect display to the second display, or in the first state, the first display. When the game ball enters the starting winning means, the display may be switched from the display other than the first standby effect display to the second display.

Further, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display only when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, and the first in the first state. The display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display even in cases other than the case where the game ball has entered the start winning means of.

Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means only in the first state, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display, or in a state other than the first state. When the game ball enters the first starting winning means, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display.

Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the second state, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the second display only, or in the second state, the first display. When the game ball enters the starting winning means, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to a display other than the second display. Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the second state, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the second display without fail, and in the second state, the first display may be switched. When the game ball enters the starting winning means, the display may not be switched from the second standby effect display to the second display.

Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the second state, the display may be switched from only the second standby effect display to the second display, or in the second state, the first display. When the game ball enters the starting winning means, the display may be switched from the display other than the second standby effect display to the second display.

Further, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the second display only when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the second state, and the first in the second state. The display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the second display even in cases other than the case where the game ball has entered the start winning means of.

Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means only in the second state, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the second display, or in a state other than the second state. Also, when the game ball enters the first start winning means, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the second display.

Further, "when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the second standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state. , The second standby effect display is switched to the certain symbol variation effect display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 29 (d) to 29 (f), the animation demo during the change of the special figure 2 in the normal gaming state. If a game ball wins a prize at the first special figure start port (above) 230 during the display of, the decorative symbol variation effect display will start from the animation demo, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the second standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state, when the game ball enters the first start winning means, the second The standby effect display may be switched only to a certain symbol variation effect display, or in a state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the second standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state, the first When the game ball enters the start winning means of the above, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to a display other than a certain symbol variation effect display. In addition, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the second standby effect display is displayed in the first game state, the second standby You may always switch from the effect display to a certain symbol variation effect display, or in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the second standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state, the first When the game ball enters the starting winning means, it may not be possible to switch from the second standby effect display to a certain symbol variation effect display.

In addition, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the second standby effect display is displayed in the first game state, the second standby It is possible to switch from only the effect display to a certain symbol variation effect display, or in a state where the second symbol variation display is being executed during the display of the second standby effect display in the first game state, the first When the game ball enters the starting winning means, the display other than the second standby effect display may be switched to a certain symbol variation effect display.

In addition, only when the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the second standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state, the second The standby effect display may be switched to a certain symbol variation effect display, or in a state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the second standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state, the first The second standby effect display may be switched to a certain symbol variation effect display even when the game ball has not entered the start winning means of.

In addition, when the game ball enters the first start winning means only in the state where the second symbol variation display is executed while the second standby effect display is displayed in the first game state, the second The standby effect display may be switched to a certain symbol variation effect display, or even in a state other than the state in which the second symbol variation display is being executed while the second standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state. , When the game ball enters the first start winning means, the second standby effect display may be switched to a certain symbol variation effect display.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"The first symbol display means [for example, the first special symbol display device 212, etc.] capable of executing the first symbol variation display, and
A second symbol display means [for example, a second special symbol display device 214, etc.] capable of executing a second symbol variation display, and
A game control means that can control any one of a plurality of game states [for example, CPU 304 in the main control unit 300] and
A certain gate that a game ball can enter [for example, a jackpot generation gate 252, etc.]
A display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
It is a game table equipped with
The gate is provided at a position where the game ball can enter when hitting to the right [for example, as shown in FIG. 3, the jackpot generating gate 252 is provided on the right side of the game area 124. , It is possible to pass by hitting right, etc.],
Both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time [for example, as shown in FIG. 13A, the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212. And the symbol variation display on the second special figure display device 214 may be performed at the same time],
One of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state [for example, a normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), etc.].
One of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state [for example, a jackpot gaming state, a probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state), or an electric support state (special figure low probability). State, high probability state), etc.]
The second gaming state is a gaming state different from the first gaming state.
One of the plurality of displays is a symbol variation effect display [for example, a decorative symbol displayed in accordance with the variation display of the special figure 1 shown in FIGS. 14 (b) to 15 (x). Production display including fluctuation display (decorative design fluctuation production display), etc.]
One of the plurality of displays is the first standby effect display [for example, the display of the symbol demo shown in FIG. 18C].
One of the plurality of displays is a second standby effect display [for example, a display of an animation demo shown in FIG. 18 (d)].
The certain symbol variation effect display is a display including a display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are variablely displayed.
The first standby effect display is a display including a display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (c), in the display of the symbol demo, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Among the modes, "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" includes both the display of the stop mode of the decorative symbol and the display of the stop mode of the mini-design, which are stopped and displayed by the combination of the outliers.],
The second standby effect display is a display that does not include a display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 18D, in the display of the animation demo, the decorative symbols are stopped. Of the display modes, "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" includes only the display of the stop mode of the mini symbol that was stopped and displayed by the combination of the outlier symbols],
The display mode of the second standby effect display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first standby effect display.
In the first gaming state, the certain symbol variation effect display is started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (f), in the normal gaming state, in the normal gaming state, The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol variation effect display in response to the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212],
In the first gaming state, the certain symbol variation effect display corresponding to the start of the second symbol variation display is not started [for example, as shown in FIG. 18C, in the normal gaming state. , The decorative symbol variation effect display is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to the symbol variation display on the second special symbol display device 214],
The first standby effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed.
The second standby effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed in the first game state.
After the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, a certain period [for example, a period during which the jackpot generation gate monitoring state shown in t83 to t85 of FIG. 16 is effective is started, and the like is started.
When the game ball enters the certain gate in the certain period, the big hit game is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 16, during the period in which the big hit generation gate monitoring state shown in t83 to t85 is effective, it is shown in t84. When the game ball passes through the jackpot generation gate 252 at the timing, the jackpot game is started, etc.],
One of the plurality of displays is the first display [for example, right-handed to pass through the jackpot generating gate 252, which is shown in FIG. 33 (a). Display, etc. that promotes
One of the plurality of displays is a second display [for example, a display of a gate entry standby effect shown in FIG. 18 (j)].
The first display is a display that encourages right-handed striking.
The second display is a display that may be displayed during the certain period.
In the first gaming state, the first display is displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (d) to 19 (f)). , After the big hit symbol is displayed on the special figure 2, the display that promotes the passage of the big hit generation gate 252 is displayed, etc.],
In some cases, both the first display and the second display may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (j), a display that promotes the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 enters the gate. It is overlaid on the standby effect display, etc.],
A state in which both the first display and the first standby effect display are displayed (hereinafter, "a big hit occurs during the display of the symbol demo as shown in the first state [for example, FIG. 21 (h)). A state in which a display promoting the passage of the gate 252 is displayed, etc.] ”) may occur.
A state in which both the first display and the second standby effect display are displayed (hereinafter, "a big hit during the display of the animation demo as shown in the second state [for example, FIG. 21 (g')). A state in which a display promoting the passage of the generation gate 252 is displayed, etc.] ”).
The first state may be changed to the second state [for example, as shown in FIGS. 21 (h') to 21 (i'), the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 during the display of the symbol demo is performed. From the state where the display to promote is displayed, the display to promote the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 may be displayed while the animation demo is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Here, the first symbol display means may be capable of executing only the first symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the first symbol variation display. Further, the first symbol display means may be one that always executes the first symbol variation display, or may not execute the first symbol variation display.

Further, the second symbol display means may be capable of executing only the second symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the second symbol variation display. Further, the second symbol display means may be one that always executes the second symbol variation display, or may not execute the second symbol variation display.

Further, the game control means may be able to control only one of the plurality of game states, or may be controllable to other than any one of the plurality of game states. .. Further, the game control means may be one that always controls one of a plurality of game states, or may not be controlled to any one of a plurality of game states.

Further, a certain gate may be such that only a game ball can enter, or a gate other than a game ball may also be able to enter. Further, a certain gate may be one in which the game ball always enters, or may be one in which the game ball may not enter.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of displays. Further, the display means may be one that always displays a plurality of displays, or may not display a plurality of displays.

Further, only a certain gate may be provided at a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right, or other than a certain gate at a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right. Things may be provided. Further, a certain gate may be provided at a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right, or a certain gate is provided at a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right. It may not be done.

Further, a certain gate may be provided only at a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right, or at a position other than a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right. A gate may be provided.

Further, a certain gate may be provided at a certain position where only the game ball can enter when hitting right, or at a certain position where something other than the game ball can enter when hitting right. A gate may be provided.

Further, a certain gate may be provided at a certain position where the game ball can enter only when hitting right, or at a certain position where the game ball can enter even when not hitting right. A gate may be provided.

Further, only the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time, or symbols other than both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time. The variable display may also be executed at the same time. In addition, both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may always be executed at the same time, or both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may not be executed at the same time. There may be.

The second gaming state may be a gaming state that is partially different from the first gaming state, or may be a gaming state that is completely different from the first gaming state.

Further, a certain symbol variation effect display may include only the display of a mode in which a plurality of decorative symbols are variablely displayed, or a display other than the display in a mode in which a plurality of decorative symbols are variablely displayed. May also be included. Further, a certain symbol variation effect display may always include a display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are variablely displayed, or does not include a display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are variablely displayed. It may be something that may occur.

Further, the first standby effect display may include only the display of the mode in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, or may include the display other than the display of the mode in which the plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. It may be one. Further, the first standby effect display may always include the display of the mode in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, or may not include the display of the mode in which the plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. It may be something.

Further, the second standby effect display may not include only the display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, or may be a display other than the display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. It may not be included. Further, the second standby effect display may not always include the display of the mode in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, or may include the display of the mode in which the plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. It may be something.

Further, in the first gaming state, only a certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be started. A display other than a certain symbol variation effect display may also be started in response to the start of. Further, in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be always started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be started. There may be a case where a certain symbol variation effect display is not started in response to the start of.

Further, in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be started only in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be started. A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to something other than the start of.

Further, in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of only the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be started. A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the symbol variation display other than the above.

Further, only in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and even in a gaming state other than the first gaming state, the first A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the symbol variation display of.

Further, in the first gaming state, it is not necessary to start only a certain symbol variation effect display in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation display It is not necessary to start the display other than a certain symbol variation effect display according to the start of the display. Further, in the first gaming state, it is not always necessary to start a certain symbol variation effect display in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the display.

Further, in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may not be started only in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation may be started. It is not necessary to start a certain symbol variation effect display in response to something other than the start of the display.

Further, it is not necessary to start a certain symbol variation effect display only in response to the start of the second symbol variation display only in the first gaming state, and even in a gaming state other than the first gaming state. A certain symbol variation effect display may not be started in response to something other than the start of the second symbol variation display.

Further, the first standby effect display may be displayed only in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed. Alternatively, the first symbol variation display may not be executed in the first game state, and may be displayed in a state other than the state in which the jackpot game is not executed. Further, the first standby effect display may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed. The first symbol variation display may not be executed in the first game state, and the jackpot game may not be displayed in the state where it is not executed.

Further, the second standby effect display may be displayed only in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed. Alternatively, the first symbol variation display may not be executed in the first game state, and may be displayed in a state other than the state in which the jackpot game is not executed. Further, the second standby effect display may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed. The first symbol variation display may not be executed in the first game state, and the jackpot game may not be displayed in the state where it is not executed.

Further, only a certain period may be started after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, or a period other than a certain period after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means. May also be started. Further, a certain period may be always started after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, and a certain period is not started after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means. There may be cases.

Further, a certain period may be started only after the big hit symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, and a certain period is started other than after the big hit symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means. May be done.

Further, a certain period may be started after only the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, or a certain period may be started even after a symbol other than the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means. May be started.

Further, a certain period may be started after the jackpot symbol is displayed only on the first symbol display means, or even after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the symbol display means other than the first symbol display means. Period may be started.

Further, when a game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period, only a big hit game may be started, or when a game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period, a game other than the big hit game may be started. .. Further, the jackpot game may always be started when the game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period, or the jackpot game may not be started when the game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period. ..

Further, the big hit game may be started only when the game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period, and the big hit game is started even in a case other than the case where the game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period. May be done.

Further, the big hit game may be started when the game ball enters only a certain gate in a certain period, or the big hit game may be started when the game ball enters something other than a certain gate in a certain period. ..

Further, the jackpot game may be started when the game ball enters a certain gate only for a certain period, or the jackpot game may be started when the game ball enters a certain gate during a period other than a certain period. Good.

Further, the first display may be one that encourages only right-handed striking, or may be one that encourages something other than right-handed striking. In addition, the first display may always encourage right-handed strikes, or may not prompt right-handed strikes.

Further, the second display may be displayed only in a certain period, or may be displayed in a period other than a certain period. In addition, the second display may be always displayed for a certain period of time, or may not be displayed for a certain period of time.

Further, in the first game state, only the first display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, or in the first game state, the second symbol display means may be displayed. After the jackpot symbol is displayed on, a display other than the first display may be displayed. Further, in the first game state, the first display may always be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and in the first game state, the second symbol display means may be displayed. The first display may not be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed in.

Further, in the first game state, the first display may be displayed only after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and in the first game state, the second symbol display means may be displayed. The first display may be displayed other than after the jackpot symbol is displayed.

Further, in the first game state, the first display may be displayed after only the jackpot symbol is displayed in the second symbol display means, or in the first game state, the second symbol display means may be displayed. The first display may be displayed after a symbol other than the jackpot symbol is displayed in.

Further, in the first game state, the first display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed only on the second symbol display means, and in the first game state, the second symbol display means may be displayed. The first display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the symbol display means other than the above.

Further, only in the first gaming state, the first display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and even in a gaming state other than the first gaming state, the first display may be displayed. The first display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means.

In addition, there may be a case where only the first display and the second display are displayed, or a state other than both the first display and the second display is displayed. May be the case. In addition, there may be a case where both the first display and the second display are not displayed.

In addition, there may be a case where only both the first display and the first standby effect display are displayed, and displays other than both the first display and the first standby effect display are also displayed. It may be in the state of being. Further, both the first display and the first standby effect display may be displayed without fail, or both the first display and the first standby effect display may not be displayed. There may be cases.

In addition, there may be a case where only both the first display and the second standby effect display are displayed, and displays other than both the first display and the second standby effect display are also displayed. It may be in the state of being. Further, both the first display and the second standby effect display may be displayed without fail, or both the first display and the second standby effect display may not be displayed. There may be cases.

Further, there may be a case where only the second state is changed from the first state, or there may be a case where the state is other than the first state to the second state. Further, the first state may be changed to the second state, and the first state may not be changed to the second state.

In addition, "the second state may change to the first state [for example, as shown in FIGS. 21 (g') to 21 (h'), the jackpot generation gate 252 is displayed during the display of the animation demo. From the state where the display promoting the passage of is displayed, the display promoting the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 may be displayed during the display of the symbol demo, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, there may be a case where only the first state is changed from the second state, or a state other than the first state may be changed from the second state. Further, the second state may be changed to the first state, or the second state may not be changed to the first state.

In addition, "one of the plurality of displays is a jackpot display [for example, a display of the jackpot start effect shown in FIG. 18 (i)].
In the first gaming state, when the jackpot display is displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and then the first display is displayed (hereinafter, "first". Case [For example, as shown in FIGS. 18 (h) to 18 (j), after the big hit symbol is displayed in the special figure 2, the display of the big hit start effect is displayed, and then the passage of the big hit generation gate 252 is promoted. When the display to be displayed is displayed, etc.] ”),
In the first gaming state, when the first display is displayed without displaying the jackpot display after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means (hereinafter, "second". Case [For example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (d) to 19 (f), after the big hit symbol is displayed in the special figure 2, the passage of the big hit generation gate 252 is promoted without displaying the display of the big hit start effect. When the display to be displayed is displayed, etc.] ”),
In the first case, both the first display and the second display are displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 18J, a display that promotes the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252. Is displayed on top of the gate entry standby effect display, etc.],
In the second case, the first state or the second state is reached [for example, as shown in FIG. 21 (g') and FIG. 21 (f'), the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is promoted. The display is overlaid on the design demo display and the animation demo display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only in the first case (in the first game state, the jackpot display is displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and then the first display is displayed). It may be present, or it may be a case other than the first case. In addition, there may always be the first case, or there may be no first case.

In addition, there is only the second case (in the first game state, the first display is displayed without displaying the jackpot display after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means). It may be a case other than the second case. In addition, there may always be a second case, or there may be no second case.

Further, in the first case, only the first display and the second display may be displayed, and in the first case, both the first display and the second display may be displayed. A display other than the above may also be displayed. Further, in the first case, both the first display and the second display may be displayed without fail, and in the first case, both the first display and the second display may be displayed. May not be displayed.

Further, in the second case, it may be in only the first state or the second state, or may be in a state other than the first state or the second state. Further, in the second case, the first state or the second state may always be reached, or the first state or the second state may not be reached.

In addition, it is provided with "first starting winning means [for example, first special drawing starting port (top) 230, first special drawing starting port (bottom) 231 etc.] in which a game ball can enter.
The first starting winning means is a winning means corresponding to the first symbol display means.
When the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the display is switched from the first standby effect display to the second display [for example, FIGS. 33 (a) to 33 (a) to FIG. As shown in c'), when the game ball wins the first special figure start port (upper) 230 while the display promoting the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is displayed during the display of the symbol demo, the symbol demo The display switches to the display of the gate entry standby effect, etc.],
When the game ball enters the first start winning means in the second state, the display is switched from the second standby effect display to the second display [for example, FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (a) to FIG. As shown in c'), when a game ball wins a prize at the first special figure start port (top) 230 while the display promoting the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is displayed during the display of the animation demo, the animation demo The display switches to the gate entry standby effect display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first starting winning means may be one in which only the game ball can enter, or one in which something other than the game ball can also enter. Further, the first starting winning means may be one in which the game ball always enters, or one in which the game ball may not enter.

Further, the first start winning means may correspond only to the first symbol display means, or may correspond to a symbol display means other than the first symbol display means. Further, the first start winning means may be one that always corresponds to the first symbol display means, or may not correspond to the first symbol display means.

Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the display may be switched only from the first standby effect display to the second display, or the first in the first state. When the game ball enters the starting winning means, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to a display other than the second display. Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display without fail, and in the first state, the first display may be switched. When the game ball enters the starting winning means, the display may not be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display.

Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the display may be switched from only the first standby effect display to the second display, or in the first state, the first display. When the game ball enters the starting winning means, the display may be switched from the display other than the first standby effect display to the second display.

Further, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display only when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, and the first in the first state. The display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display even in cases other than the case where the game ball has entered the start winning means of.

Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means only in the first state, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display, or in a state other than the first state. When the game ball enters the first starting winning means, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display.

Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the second state, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the second display only, or in the second state, the first display. When the game ball enters the starting winning means, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to a display other than the second display. Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the second state, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the second display without fail, and in the second state, the first display may be switched. When the game ball enters the starting winning means, the display may not be switched from the second standby effect display to the second display.

Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the second state, the display may be switched from only the second standby effect display to the second display, or in the second state, the first display. When the game ball enters the starting winning means, the display may be switched from the display other than the second standby effect display to the second display.

Further, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the second display only when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the second state, and the first in the second state. The display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the second display even in cases other than the case where the game ball has entered the start winning means of.

Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means only in the second state, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the second display, or in a state other than the second state. Also, when the game ball enters the first start winning means, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the second display.

Further, "when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the second standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state. , The second standby effect display is switched to the certain symbol variation effect display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 29 (d) to 29 (f), the animation demo during the change of the special figure 2 in the normal gaming state. If a game ball wins a prize at the first special figure start port (above) 230 during the display of, the decorative symbol variation effect display will start from the animation demo, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the second standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state, when the game ball enters the first start winning means, the second The standby effect display may be switched only to a certain symbol variation effect display, or in a state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the second standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state, the first When the game ball enters the start winning means of the above, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to a display other than a certain symbol variation effect display. In addition, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the second standby effect display is displayed in the first game state, the second standby You may always switch from the effect display to a certain symbol variation effect display, or in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the second standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state, the first When the game ball enters the starting winning means, it may not be possible to switch from the second standby effect display to a certain symbol variation effect display.

In addition, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the second standby effect display is displayed in the first game state, the second standby It is possible to switch from only the effect display to a certain symbol variation effect display, or in a state where the second symbol variation display is being executed during the display of the second standby effect display in the first game state, the first When the game ball enters the starting winning means, the display other than the second standby effect display may be switched to a certain symbol variation effect display.

In addition, only when the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the second standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state, the second The standby effect display may be switched to a certain symbol variation effect display, or in a state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the second standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state, the first The second standby effect display may be switched to a certain symbol variation effect display even when the game ball has not entered the start winning means of.

In addition, when the game ball enters the first start winning means only in the state where the second symbol variation display is executed while the second standby effect display is displayed in the first game state, the second The standby effect display may be switched to a certain symbol variation effect display, or even in a state other than the state in which the second symbol variation display is being executed while the second standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state. , When the game ball enters the first start winning means, the second standby effect display may be switched to a certain symbol variation effect display.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"The first symbol display means [for example, the first special symbol display device 212, etc.] capable of executing the first symbol variation display, and
A second symbol display means [for example, a second special symbol display device 214, etc.] capable of executing a second symbol variation display, and
A game control means that can control any one of a plurality of game states [for example, CPU 304 in the main control unit 300] and
A certain gate that a game ball can enter [for example, a jackpot generation gate 252, etc.]
A display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
It is a game table equipped with
The gate is provided at a position where the game ball can enter when hitting to the right [for example, as shown in FIG. 3, the jackpot generating gate 252 is provided on the right side of the game area 124. , It is possible to pass by hitting right, etc.],
Both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time [for example, as shown in FIG. 13A, the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212. And the symbol variation display on the second special figure display device 214 may be performed at the same time],
One of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state [for example, a normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), etc.].
One of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state [for example, a jackpot gaming state, a probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state), or an electric support state (special figure low probability). State, high probability state), etc.]
The second gaming state is a gaming state different from the first gaming state.
One of the plurality of displays is a symbol variation effect display [for example, a decorative symbol displayed in accordance with the variation display of the special figure 1 shown in FIGS. 14 (b) to 15 (x). Production display including fluctuation display (decorative design fluctuation production display), etc.]
One of the plurality of displays is the first standby effect display [for example, the display of the symbol demo shown in FIG. 18C].
One of the plurality of displays is a second standby effect display [for example, a display of an animation demo shown in FIG. 18 (d)].
The certain symbol variation effect display is a display including a display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are variablely displayed.
The first standby effect display is a display including a display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (c), in the display of the symbol demo, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Among the modes, "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" includes both the display of the stop mode of the decorative symbol and the display of the stop mode of the mini-design, which are stopped and displayed by the combination of the outliers.],
The second standby effect display is a display that does not include a display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 18D, in the display of the animation demo, the decorative symbols are stopped. Of the display modes, "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" includes only the display of the stop mode of the mini symbol that was stopped and displayed by the combination of the outlier symbols],
The display mode of the second standby effect display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first standby effect display.
In the first gaming state, the certain symbol variation effect display is started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (f), in the normal gaming state, in the normal gaming state, The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol variation effect display in response to the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212],
In the first gaming state, the certain symbol variation effect display corresponding to the start of the second symbol variation display is not started [for example, as shown in FIG. 18C, in the normal gaming state. , The decorative symbol variation effect display is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to the symbol variation display on the second special symbol display device 214],
The first standby effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed.
The second standby effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed in the first game state.
After the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, a certain period [for example, the period during which the jackpot generation gate monitoring state shown in t83 to t85 of FIG. 16 is effective] is started.
When the game ball enters the certain gate in the certain period, the big hit game is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 16, during the period in which the big hit generation gate monitoring state shown in t83 to t85 is effective, it is shown in t84. When the game ball passes through the jackpot generation gate 252 at the timing, the jackpot game is started, etc.],
One of the plurality of displays is the first display [for example, right-handed to pass through the jackpot generating gate 252, which is shown in FIG. 33 (a). Display, etc. that promotes
One of the plurality of displays is a second display, for example, a display of a gate entry standby effect shown in FIG. 18 (j)].
The first display is a display that encourages right-handed striking.
The second display is a display that may be displayed during the certain period.
In the first gaming state, the first display is displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (d) to 19 (f)). , After the big hit symbol is displayed on the special figure 2, the display that promotes the passage of the big hit generation gate 252 is displayed, etc.],
In some cases, both the first display and the second display may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (j), a display that promotes the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 enters the gate. It is overlaid on the standby effect display, etc.],
A state in which both the first display and the first standby effect display are displayed (hereinafter, "a big hit occurs during the display of the symbol demo as shown in the first state [for example, FIG. 21 (h)). A state in which a display promoting the passage of the gate 252 is displayed, etc.] ”) may occur.
A state in which both the first display and the second standby effect display are displayed (hereinafter, "a big hit during the display of the animation demo as shown in the second state [for example, FIG. 21 (g')). A state in which a display promoting the passage of the generation gate 252 is displayed, etc.] ”).
When the power is cut off and restored in the second state, the first state may be obtained instead of the second state [for example, as shown in FIGS. 35 (2a) to (2c), an animation demo. If the power is cut off and the power is restored while the display that promotes the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is displayed, a symbol demo is displayed along with the display that promotes the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Here, the first symbol display means may be capable of executing only the first symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the first symbol variation display. Further, the first symbol display means may be one that always executes the first symbol variation display, or may not execute the first symbol variation display.

Further, the second symbol display means may be capable of executing only the second symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the second symbol variation display. Further, the second symbol display means may be one that always executes the second symbol variation display, or may not execute the second symbol variation display.

Further, the game control means may be able to control only one of the plurality of game states, or may be controllable to other than any one of the plurality of game states. .. Further, the game control means may be one that always controls one of a plurality of game states, or may not be controlled to any one of a plurality of game states.

Further, a certain gate may be such that only a game ball can enter, or a gate other than a game ball may also be able to enter. Further, a certain gate may be one in which the game ball always enters, or may be one in which the game ball may not enter.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of displays. Further, the display means may be one that always displays a plurality of displays, or may not display a plurality of displays.

Further, only a certain gate may be provided at a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right, or other than a certain gate at a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right. Things may be provided. Further, a certain gate may be provided at a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right, or a certain gate is provided at a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right. It may not be done.

Further, a certain gate may be provided only at a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right, or at a position other than a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right. A gate may be provided.

Further, a certain gate may be provided at a certain position where only the game ball can enter when hitting right, or at a certain position where something other than the game ball can enter when hitting right. A gate may be provided.

Further, a certain gate may be provided at a certain position where the game ball can enter only when hitting right, or at a certain position where the game ball can enter even when not hitting right. A gate may be provided.

Further, only the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time, or symbols other than both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time. The variable display may also be executed at the same time. In addition, both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may always be executed at the same time, or both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may not be executed at the same time. There may be.

The second gaming state may be a gaming state that is partially different from the first gaming state, or may be a gaming state that is completely different from the first gaming state.

Further, a certain symbol variation effect display may include only the display of a mode in which a plurality of decorative symbols are variablely displayed, or a display other than the display in a mode in which a plurality of decorative symbols are variablely displayed. May also be included. Further, a certain symbol variation effect display may always include a display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are variablely displayed, or does not include a display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are variablely displayed. It may be something that may occur.

Further, the first standby effect display may include only the display of the mode in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, or may include the display other than the display of the mode in which the plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. It may be one. Further, the first standby effect display may always include the display of the mode in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, or may not include the display of the mode in which the plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. It may be something.

Further, the second standby effect display may not include only the display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, or may be a display other than the display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. It may not be included. Further, the second standby effect display may not always include the display of the mode in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, or may include the display of the mode in which the plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. It may be something.

Further, in the first gaming state, only a certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be started. A display other than a certain symbol variation effect display may also be started in response to the start of. Further, in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be always started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be started. There may be a case where a certain symbol variation effect display is not started in response to the start of.

Further, in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be started only in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be started. A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to something other than the start of.

Further, in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of only the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be started. A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the symbol variation display other than the above.

Further, only in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and even in a gaming state other than the first gaming state, the first A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the symbol variation display of.

Further, in the first gaming state, it is not necessary to start only a certain symbol variation effect display in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation display It is not necessary to start the display other than a certain symbol variation effect display according to the start of the display. Further, in the first gaming state, it is not always necessary to start a certain symbol variation effect display in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the display.

Further, in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may not be started only in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation may be started. It is not necessary to start a certain symbol variation effect display in response to something other than the start of the display.

Further, the first standby effect display may be displayed only in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed. Alternatively, the first symbol variation display may not be executed in the first game state, and may be displayed in a state other than the state in which the jackpot game is not executed. Further, the first standby effect display may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed. The first symbol variation display may not be executed in the first game state, and the jackpot game may not be displayed in the state where it is not executed.

Further, the second standby effect display may be displayed only in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed. Alternatively, the first symbol variation display may not be executed in the first game state, and may be displayed in a state other than the state in which the jackpot game is not executed. Further, the second standby effect display may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed. The first symbol variation display may not be executed in the first game state, and the jackpot game may not be displayed in the state where it is not executed.

Further, only a certain period may be started after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, or a period other than a certain period after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means. May also be started. Further, a certain period may be always started after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, and a certain period is not started after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means. There may be cases.

Further, a certain period may be started only after the big hit symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, and a certain period is started other than after the big hit symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means. May be done.

Further, a certain period may be started after only the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, or a certain period may be started even after a symbol other than the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means. May be started.

Further, a certain period may be started after the jackpot symbol is displayed only on the first symbol display means, or even after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the symbol display means other than the first symbol display means. Period may be started.

Further, when a game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period, only a big hit game may be started, or when a game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period, a game other than the big hit game may be started. .. Further, the jackpot game may always be started when the game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period, or the jackpot game may not be started when the game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period. ..

Further, the big hit game may be started only when the game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period, and the big hit game is started even in a case other than the case where the game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period. May be done.

Further, the big hit game may be started when the game ball enters only a certain gate in a certain period, or the big hit game may be started when the game ball enters something other than a certain gate in a certain period. ..

Further, the jackpot game may be started when the game ball enters a certain gate only for a certain period, or the jackpot game may be started when the game ball enters a certain gate during a period other than a certain period. Good.

Further, the first display may be one that encourages only right-handed striking, or may be one that encourages something other than right-handed striking. In addition, the first display may always encourage right-handed strikes, or may not prompt right-handed strikes.

Further, the second display may be displayed only in a certain period, or may be displayed in a period other than a certain period. In addition, the second display may be always displayed for a certain period of time, or may not be displayed for a certain period of time.

Further, in the first game state, only the first display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, or in the first game state, the second symbol display means may be displayed. After the jackpot symbol is displayed on, a display other than the first display may be displayed. Further, in the first game state, the first display may always be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and in the first game state, the second symbol display means may be displayed. The first display may not be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed in.

Further, in the first game state, the first display may be displayed only after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and in the first game state, the second symbol display means may be displayed. The first display may be displayed other than after the jackpot symbol is displayed.

Further, in the first game state, the first display may be displayed after only the jackpot symbol is displayed in the second symbol display means, or in the first game state, the second symbol display means may be displayed. The first display may be displayed after a symbol other than the jackpot symbol is displayed in.

Further, in the first game state, the first display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed only on the second symbol display means, and in the first game state, the second symbol display means may be displayed. The first display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the symbol display means other than the above.

Further, only in the first gaming state, the first display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and even in a gaming state other than the first gaming state, the first display may be displayed. The first display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means.

In addition, there may be a case where only the first display and the second display are displayed, or a state other than both the first display and the second display is displayed. May be the case. In addition, there may be a case where both the first display and the second display are not displayed.

In addition, there may be a case where only both the first display and the first standby effect display are displayed, and displays other than both the first display and the first standby effect display are also displayed. It may be in the state of being. Further, both the first display and the first standby effect display may be displayed without fail, or both the first display and the first standby effect display may not be displayed. There may be cases.

In addition, there may be a case where only both the first display and the second standby effect display are displayed, and displays other than both the first display and the second standby effect display are also displayed. It may be in the state of being. Further, both the first display and the second standby effect display may be displayed without fail, or both the first display and the second standby effect display may not be displayed. There may be cases.

Further, if the power is cut off and restored in the second state, only the first state may be obtained instead of the second state, and if the power is cut off and restored in the second state, the power is restored in the second state. It may be in a state other than the first state. Further, if the power is cut off and restored in the second state, it may always be in the first state instead of the second state, and if the power is cut off and restored in the second state, it is not the second state but the first state. It may not be in the state of.

Further, if the power is cut off and restored only in the second state, it may be in the first state instead of the second state, and if the power is cut off and restored in a state other than the second state, the second state may be obtained. It may be the first state instead of the state of.

In addition, "the first state may be changed to the second state [for example, as shown in FIGS. 21 (h') to 21 (i'), the jackpot generation gate 252 is displayed during the display of the symbol demo. From the state where the display that promotes the passage of the jackpot is displayed, the display that promotes the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 may be displayed during the display of the animation demo],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, there may be a case where only the first state is changed to the second state, or there is a case where the state is changed from the first state to a state other than the second state. Further, the first state may be changed to the second state, and the first state may not be changed to the second state.

In addition, "the second state may change to the first state [for example, as shown in FIGS. 21 (g') to 21 (h'), the jackpot generation gate 252 is displayed during the display of the animation demo. From the state where the display promoting the passage of is displayed, the display promoting the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 may be displayed during the display of the symbol demo, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, there may be a case where only the first state is changed from the second state, or a state other than the first state may be changed from the second state. Further, the second state may be changed to the first state, and the second state may not be changed to the first state.

In addition, "one of the plurality of displays is a return display [for example, a return display shown in FIG. 35 (2b-1)].
When the power is cut off and restored in the second state, the first state may be reached instead of the second state after the restoration indication is displayed [for example, FIG. 35 (2a), FIG. As shown in (2b), Fig. (2b-1), and Fig. (2c), when the power is cut off and restored while the display promoting the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is displayed during the display of the animation demo. , After the return display is displayed, a symbol demo is displayed along with a display that promotes the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252],
A game table characterized by that.

Here, if the power is cut off and restored in the second state, there may be a case where only the first state is displayed instead of the second state after the resetting display is displayed, or the power is turned on in the second state. When the power is cut off, the state may be changed to a state other than the first state instead of the second state after the restoration indicating is displayed. In addition, if the power is cut off and restored in the second state, it may always be in the first state instead of the second state after the display during recovery is displayed, or if the power is cut off and restored in the second state. , It may not be the first state instead of the second state after the returning display is displayed.

In addition, only when the power is cut off and restored in the second state, the first state may be reached instead of the second state after the restoration display is displayed, or in the second state. In cases other than the case where the power is cut off and restored, the state may be changed to the first state instead of the second state after the display during recovery is displayed.

In addition, "one of the plurality of displays is a jackpot display [for example, a display of the jackpot start effect shown in FIG. 18 (i)].
In the first gaming state, when the jackpot display is displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and then the first display is displayed (hereinafter, "first". Case [For example, as shown in FIGS. 18 (h) to 18 (j), after the big hit symbol is displayed in the special figure 2, the display of the big hit start effect is displayed, and then the passage of the big hit generation gate 252 is promoted. When the display to be displayed is displayed, etc.] ”),
In the first gaming state, when the first display is displayed without displaying the jackpot display after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means (hereinafter, "second". Case [For example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (d) to 19 (f), after the big hit symbol is displayed in the special figure 2, the passage of the big hit generation gate 252 is promoted without displaying the display of the big hit start effect. When the display to be displayed is displayed, etc.] ”),
In the first case, both the first display and the second display are displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 18J, a display that promotes the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252. Is displayed on top of the gate entry standby effect display, etc.],
In the second case, the first state or the second state is reached [for example, as shown in FIG. 21 (g') and FIG. 21 (f'), the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is promoted. The display is overlaid on the design demo display and the animation demo display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only in the first case (in the first game state, the jackpot display is displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and then the first display is displayed). It may be present, or it may be a case other than the first case. In addition, there may always be the first case, or there may be no first case.

In addition, there is only the second case (in the first game state, the first display is displayed without displaying the jackpot display after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means). It may be a case other than the second case. In addition, there may always be a second case, or there may be no second case.

Further, in the first case, only the first display and the second display may be displayed, and in the first case, both the first display and the second display may be displayed. A display other than the above may also be displayed. Further, in the first case, both the first display and the second display may be displayed without fail, and in the first case, both the first display and the second display may be displayed. May not be displayed.

Further, in the second case, it may be in only the first state or the second state, or may be in a state other than the first state or the second state. Further, in the second case, the first state or the second state may always be reached, or the first state or the second state may not be reached.

In addition, it is provided with "first starting winning means [for example, first special drawing starting port (top) 230, first special drawing starting port (bottom) 231 etc.] in which a game ball can enter.
The first starting winning means is a winning means corresponding to the first symbol display means.
When the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the display is switched from the first standby effect display to the second display [for example, FIGS. 33 (a) to 33 (a) to FIG. As shown in c'), when the game ball wins the first special figure start port (upper) 230 while the display promoting the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is displayed during the display of the symbol demo, the symbol demo The display switches to the display of the gate entry standby effect, etc.],
When the game ball enters the first start winning means in the second state, the display is switched from the second standby effect display to the second display [for example, FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (a) to FIG. As shown in c'), when a game ball wins a prize at the first special figure start port (top) 230 while the display promoting the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is displayed during the display of the animation demo, the animation demo The display switches to the gate entry standby effect display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first starting winning means may be one in which only the game ball can enter, or one in which something other than the game ball can also enter. Further, the first starting winning means may be one in which the game ball always enters, or one in which the game ball may not enter.

Further, the first start winning means may correspond only to the first symbol display means, or may correspond to a symbol display means other than the first symbol display means. Further, the first start winning means may be one that always corresponds to the first symbol display means, or may not correspond to the first symbol display means.

Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the display may be switched only from the first standby effect display to the second display, or the first in the first state. When the game ball enters the starting winning means, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to a display other than the second display. Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display without fail, and in the first state, the first display may be switched. When the game ball enters the starting winning means, the display may not be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display.

Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the display may be switched from only the first standby effect display to the second display, or in the first state, the first display. When the game ball enters the starting winning means, the display may be switched from the display other than the first standby effect display to the second display.

Further, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display only when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, and the first in the first state. The display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display even in cases other than the case where the game ball has entered the start winning means of.

Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means only in the first state, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display, or in a state other than the first state. When the game ball enters the first starting winning means, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display.

Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the second state, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the second display only, or in the second state, the first display. When the game ball enters the starting winning means, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to a display other than the second display. Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the second state, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the second display without fail, and in the second state, the first display may be switched. When the game ball enters the starting winning means, the display may not be switched from the second standby effect display to the second display.

Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the second state, the display may be switched from only the second standby effect display to the second display, or in the second state, the first display. When the game ball enters the starting winning means, the display may be switched from the display other than the second standby effect display to the second display.

Further, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the second display only when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the second state, and the first in the second state. The display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the second display even in cases other than the case where the game ball has entered the start winning means of.

Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means only in the second state, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the second display, or in a state other than the second state. Also, when the game ball enters the first start winning means, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the second display.

Further, "when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the second standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state. , The second standby effect display is switched to the certain symbol variation effect display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 29 (d) to 29 (f), the animation demo during the change of the special figure 2 in the normal gaming state. If a game ball wins a prize at the first special figure start port (above) 230 during the display of, the decorative symbol variation effect display will start from the animation demo, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the second standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state, when the game ball enters the first start winning means, the second The standby effect display may be switched only to a certain symbol variation effect display, or in a state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the second standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state, the first When the game ball enters the start winning means of the above, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to a display other than a certain symbol variation effect display. In addition, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the second standby effect display is displayed in the first game state, the second standby You may always switch from the effect display to a certain symbol variation effect display, or in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the second standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state, the first When the game ball enters the starting winning means, it may not be possible to switch from the second standby effect display to a certain symbol variation effect display.

In addition, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the second standby effect display is displayed in the first game state, the second standby It is possible to switch from only the effect display to a certain symbol variation effect display, or in a state where the second symbol variation display is being executed during the display of the second standby effect display in the first game state, the first When the game ball enters the starting winning means, the display other than the second standby effect display may be switched to a certain symbol variation effect display.

In addition, only when the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the second standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state, the second The standby effect display may be switched to a certain symbol variation effect display, or in a state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the second standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state, the first The second standby effect display may be switched to a certain symbol variation effect display even when the game ball has not entered the start winning means of.

In addition, when the game ball enters the first start winning means only in the state where the second symbol variation display is executed while the second standby effect display is displayed in the first game state, the second The standby effect display may be switched to a certain symbol variation effect display, or even in a state other than the state in which the second symbol variation display is being executed while the second standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state. , When the game ball enters the first start winning means, the second standby effect display may be switched to a certain symbol variation effect display.

The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 8.
The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that.

In addition, in the above description,
"The first symbol display means [for example, the first special symbol display device 212, etc.] capable of executing the first symbol variation display, and
A second symbol display means capable of executing a second symbol variation display [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, etc.]
[For example, the second special figure display device 214, etc.]
When,
A game control means that can control any one of a plurality of game states [for example, CPU 304 in the main control unit 300] and
A certain gate that a game ball can enter [for example, a jackpot generation gate 252, etc.]
A display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
It is a game table equipped with
The gate is provided at a position where the game ball can enter when hitting to the right [for example, as shown in FIG. 3, the jackpot generating gate 252 is provided on the right side of the game area 124. , It is possible to pass by hitting right, etc.],
Both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time [for example, as shown in FIG. 13A, the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212. And the symbol variation display on the second special figure display device 214 may be performed at the same time],
One of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state [for example, a normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), etc.].
One of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state [for example, a jackpot gaming state, a probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state), or an electric support state (special figure low probability). State, high probability state), etc.]
The second gaming state is a gaming state different from the first gaming state.
One of the plurality of displays is a symbol variation effect display [for example, a decorative symbol displayed in accordance with the variation display of the special figure 1 shown in FIGS. 14 (b) to 15 (x). Production display including fluctuation display (decorative design fluctuation production display), etc.]
One of the plurality of displays is the first standby effect display [for example, the display of the symbol demo shown in FIG. 18C].
The certain symbol variation effect display is a display including a display in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed.
The first standby effect display is a display including a display in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (c), in the display of the symbol demo, "decoration 5-decoration 4-". Includes the display of the mode in which the display is stopped by the combination of the out-of-order symbols of "Decoration 1"],
In the first gaming state, the certain symbol variation effect display is started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (f), in the normal gaming state, in the normal gaming state, The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol variation effect display in response to the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212],
In the first gaming state, the certain symbol variation effect display corresponding to the start of the second symbol variation display is not started [for example, as shown in FIG. 18C, in the normal gaming state. , The decorative symbol variation effect display is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to the symbol variation display on the second special symbol display device 214],
The first standby effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed.
After the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, a certain period [for example, the period during which the jackpot generation gate monitoring state shown in t83 to t85 of FIG. 16 is effective] is started.
When the game ball enters the certain gate in the certain period, the big hit game is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 16, during the period in which the big hit generation gate monitoring state shown in t83 to t85 is effective, it is shown in t84. When the game ball passes through the jackpot generation gate 252 at the timing, the jackpot game is started, etc.],
One of the plurality of displays is the first display [for example, right-handed to pass through the jackpot generating gate 252, which is shown in FIG. 33 (a). Display, etc. that promotes
One of the plurality of displays is a second display [for example, a display of a gate entry standby effect shown in FIG. 18 (j)].
The first display is a display that encourages right-handed striking.
The second display is a display that may be displayed during the certain period.
In the first gaming state, the first display is displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (d) to 19 (f)). , After the big hit symbol is displayed on the special figure 2, the display that promotes the passage of the big hit generation gate 252 is displayed, etc.],
In some cases, both the first display and the second display may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (j), a display that promotes the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 enters the gate. It is overlaid on the standby effect display, etc.],
A state in which both the first display and the first standby effect display are displayed (hereinafter, "a big hit occurs during the display of the symbol demo as shown in the first state [for example, FIG. 33A). A state in which a display promoting the passage of the gate 252 is displayed, etc.] ”) may occur.
It is possible to shift to the power saving mode [for example, the power saving mode shown in FIG. 37 (1c)].
Even in the first state, the mode may shift to the power saving mode [for example, as shown in FIGS. 37 (2a) to 37 (2c), the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 during the display of the symbol demo is displayed. The mode may shift to power saving mode while the promotion display is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Here, the first symbol display means may be capable of executing only the first symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the first symbol variation display. Further, the first symbol display means may be one that always executes the first symbol variation display, or may not execute the first symbol variation display.

Further, the second symbol display means may be capable of executing only the second symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the second symbol variation display. Further, the second symbol display means may be one that always executes the second symbol variation display, or may not execute the second symbol variation display.

Further, the game control means may be able to control only one of the plurality of game states, or may be controllable to other than any one of the plurality of game states. .. Further, the game control means may be one that always controls one of a plurality of game states, or may not be controlled to any one of a plurality of game states.

Further, a certain gate may be such that only a game ball can enter, or a gate other than a game ball may also be able to enter. Further, a certain gate may be one in which the game ball always enters, or may be one in which the game ball may not enter.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of displays. Further, the display means may be one that always displays a plurality of displays, or may not display a plurality of displays.

Further, only a certain gate may be provided at a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right, or other than a certain gate at a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right. Things may be provided. Further, a certain gate may be provided at a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right, or a certain gate is provided at a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right. It may not be done.

Further, a certain gate may be provided only at a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right, or at a position other than a certain position where the game ball can enter when hitting right. A gate may be provided.

Further, a certain gate may be provided at a certain position where only the game ball can enter when hitting right, or at a certain position where something other than the game ball can enter when hitting right. A gate may be provided.

Further, a certain gate may be provided at a certain position where the game ball can enter only when hitting right, or at a certain position where the game ball can enter even when not hitting right. A gate may be provided.

Further, only the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time, or symbols other than both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time. The variable display may also be executed at the same time. In addition, both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may always be executed at the same time, or both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may not be executed at the same time. There may be.

The second gaming state may be a gaming state that is partially different from the first gaming state, or may be a gaming state that is completely different from the first gaming state.

Further, a certain symbol variation effect display may include only the display of the mode in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, or may include a display other than the display of the mode in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. There may be. In addition, a certain symbol variation effect display may always include a display of a mode in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, or may not include a display in a mode in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. It may be.

Further, the first standby effect display may include only the display in the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or may include a display other than the display in the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. May be good. In addition, the first standby effect display may always include the display of the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or may not include the display of the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. You may.

Further, in the first gaming state, only a certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be started. A display other than a certain symbol variation effect display may also be started in response to the start of. Further, in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be always started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be started. There may be a case where a certain symbol variation effect display is not started in response to the start of.

Further, in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be started only in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be started. A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to something other than the start of.

Further, in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of only the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be started. A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the symbol variation display other than the above.

Further, only in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and even in a gaming state other than the first gaming state, the first A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the symbol variation display of.

Further, in the first gaming state, it is not necessary to start only a certain symbol variation effect display in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation display It is not necessary to start the display other than a certain symbol variation effect display according to the start of the display. Further, in the first gaming state, it is not always necessary to start a certain symbol variation effect display in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the display.

Further, in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may not be started only in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation may be started. It is not necessary to start a certain symbol variation effect display in response to something other than the start of the display.

Further, in the first game state, it is not necessary to start a certain symbol change effect display in response to the start of only the second symbol change display, and in the first game state, the second symbol change display is started. It is not necessary to start a certain symbol variation effect display in response to the start of the symbol variation display other than the display.

Further, only in the first gaming state, it is not necessary to start a certain symbol variation effect display in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, and even in a gaming state other than the first gaming state, the first It is not necessary to start a certain symbol variation effect display in response to the start of the second symbol variation display.

Further, the first standby effect display may be displayed only in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed. Alternatively, the first symbol variation display may not be executed in the first game state, and may be displayed in a state other than the state in which the jackpot game is not executed. Further, the first standby effect display may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed. The first symbol variation display may not be executed in the first game state, and the jackpot game may not be displayed in the state where it is not executed.

Further, only a certain period may be started after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, or a period other than a certain period after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means. May also be started. Further, a certain period may be always started after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, and a certain period is not started after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means. There may be cases.

Further, a certain period may be started only after the big hit symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, and a certain period is started other than after the big hit symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means. May be done.

Further, a certain period may be started after only the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, or a certain period may be started even after a symbol other than the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means. May be started.

Further, a certain period may be started after the jackpot symbol is displayed only on the first symbol display means, or even after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the symbol display means other than the first symbol display means. Period may be started.

Further, when a game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period, only a big hit game may be started, or when a game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period, a game other than the big hit game may be started. .. Further, the jackpot game may always be started when the game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period, or the jackpot game may not be started when the game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period. ..

Further, the big hit game may be started only when the game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period, and the big hit game is started even in a case other than the case where the game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period. May be done.

Further, the big hit game may be started when the game ball enters only a certain gate in a certain period, or the big hit game may be started when the game ball enters something other than a certain gate in a certain period. ..

Further, the jackpot game may be started when the game ball enters a certain gate only for a certain period, or the jackpot game may be started when the game ball enters a certain gate during a period other than a certain period. Good.

Further, the first display may be one that encourages only right-handed striking, or may be one that encourages something other than right-handed striking. In addition, the first display may always encourage right-handed strikes, or may not prompt right-handed strikes.

Further, the second display may be displayed only in a certain period, or may be displayed in a period other than a certain period. In addition, the second display may be always displayed for a certain period of time, or may not be displayed for a certain period of time.

Further, in the first game state, only the first display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, or in the first game state, the second symbol display means may be displayed. After the jackpot symbol is displayed on, a display other than the first display may be displayed. Further, in the first game state, the first display may always be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and in the first game state, the second symbol display means may be displayed. The first display may not be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed in.

Further, in the first game state, the first display may be displayed only after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and in the first game state, the second symbol display means may be displayed. The first display may be displayed other than after the jackpot symbol is displayed.

Further, in the first game state, the first display may be displayed after only the jackpot symbol is displayed in the second symbol display means, or in the first game state, the second symbol display means may be displayed. The first display may be displayed after a symbol other than the jackpot symbol is displayed in.

Further, in the first game state, the first display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed only on the second symbol display means, and in the first game state, the second symbol display means may be displayed. The first display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the symbol display means other than the above.

Further, only in the first gaming state, the first display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and even in a gaming state other than the first gaming state, the first display may be displayed. The first display may be displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means.

In addition, there may be a case where only the first display and the second display are displayed, or a state other than both the first display and the second display is displayed. May be the case. In addition, there may be a case where both the first display and the second display are not displayed.

In addition, there may be a case where only both the first display and the first standby effect display are displayed, and displays other than both the first display and the first standby effect display are also displayed. It may be in the state of being. Further, both the first display and the first standby effect display may be displayed without fail, or both the first display and the first standby effect display may not be displayed. There may be cases.

Further, it may be possible to shift only to the power saving mode, or it may be possible to shift to a mode other than the power saving mode. In addition, the mode may always shift to the power saving mode, or the mode may not shift to the power saving mode.

Further, even in the first state, the mode may shift only to the power saving mode, or even in the first state, the mode may shift to a mode other than the power saving mode. Further, even in the first state, the mode may always shift to the power saving mode, and even in the first state, the mode may not shift to the power saving mode.

Further, the power saving mode may be shifted only in the first state, or the power saving mode may be shifted even in a state other than the first state.

Further, "one of the plurality of displays is a power saving mode display [for example, a display of" ECO mode "notifying that the power saving mode is shown in FIG. 37 (1c)"].
The power saving mode display is a display for notifying that the power saving mode is set.
A state in which both the first display and the power saving mode display are displayed (hereinafter, "third state [for example, as shown in FIG. 37 (2c), display of a display notifying that the power saving mode is in effect". A display that promotes the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is displayed inside] ”).
When the power saving mode is entered in the first state, the third state is reached [for example, as shown in FIGS. 37 (2a) to 37 (2c), the jackpot generation gate 252 passes during the display of the symbol demo. If the mode is changed to the power saving mode while the display promoting the power saving mode is displayed, the display promoting the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is displayed while the display notifying the power saving mode is displayed.] ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display of the power saving mode may be for notifying only that the power saving mode is being set, or may be for notifying other than the power saving mode. Further, the display of the power saving mode may always notify that the power saving mode is in effect, or may not notify the power saving mode.

In addition, there may be a case where both the first display and the power saving mode display are displayed, or the state other than the state where both the first display and the power saving mode display are displayed. There may be cases. In addition, both the first display and the power saving mode display may always be displayed, or both the first display and the power saving mode display may not be displayed. ..

In addition, there may be a case where only the first display and the power saving mode display are displayed, or a state other than both the first display and the power saving mode display is displayed. There may be cases.

In addition, "one of the plurality of displays is a jackpot display [for example, a display of the jackpot start effect shown in FIG. 18 (i)].
In the first gaming state, when the jackpot display is displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and then the first display is displayed (hereinafter, "first". Case [For example, as shown in FIGS. 18 (h) to 18 (j), after the big hit symbol is displayed in the special figure 2, the display of the big hit start effect is displayed, and then the passage of the big hit generation gate 252 is promoted. When the display to be displayed is displayed, etc.] ”),
In the first gaming state, when the first display is displayed without displaying the jackpot display after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means (hereinafter, "second". Case [For example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (d) to 19 (f), after the big hit symbol is displayed in the special figure 2, the passage of the big hit generation gate 252 is promoted without displaying the display of the big hit start effect. When the display to be displayed is displayed, etc.] ”),
In the first case, both the first display and the second display are displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 18J, a display that promotes the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252. Is displayed on top of the gate entry standby effect display, etc.],
In the second case, the first state or the third state is obtained.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only in the first case (in the first game state, the jackpot display is displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and then the first display is displayed). It may be present, or it may be a case other than the first case. In addition, there may always be the first case, or there may be no first case.

In addition, there is only the second case (in the first game state, the first display is displayed without displaying the jackpot display after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means). It may be a case other than the second case. In addition, there may always be a second case, or there may be no second case.

Further, in the first case, only the first display and the second display may be displayed, and in the first case, both the first display and the second display may be displayed. A display other than the above may also be displayed. Further, in the first case, both the first display and the second display may be displayed without fail, and in the first case, both the first display and the second display may be displayed. May not be displayed.

Further, in the second case, it may be in only the first state or the third state, or may be in a state other than the first state or the third state. Further, in the second case, the first state or the third state may always be reached, or the first state or the third state may not be reached.

In addition, it is provided with "first starting winning means [for example, first special drawing starting port (top) 230, first special drawing starting port (bottom) 231 etc.] in which a game ball can enter.
The first starting winning means is a winning means corresponding to the first symbol display means.
When the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the display is switched from the first standby effect display to the second display [for example, FIGS. 33 (a) to 33 (a) to FIG. As shown in c'), when the game ball wins the first special figure start port (upper) 230 while the display promoting the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 is displayed during the display of the symbol demo, the symbol demo The display switches to the display of the gate entry standby effect, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first starting winning means may be one in which only the game ball can enter, or one in which something other than the game ball can also enter. Further, the first starting winning means may be one in which the game ball always enters, or one in which the game ball may not enter.

Further, the first start winning means may correspond only to the first symbol display means, or may correspond to a symbol display means other than the first symbol display means. Further, the first start winning means may be one that always corresponds to the first symbol display means, or may not correspond to the first symbol display means.

Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the display may be switched only from the first standby effect display to the second display, or the first in the first state. When the game ball enters the starting winning means, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to a display other than the second display. Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display without fail, and in the first state, the first display may be switched. When the game ball enters the starting winning means, the display may not be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display.

Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the display may be switched from only the first standby effect display to the second display, or in the first state, the first display. When the game ball enters the starting winning means, the display may be switched from the display other than the first standby effect display to the second display.

Further, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display only when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, and the first in the first state. The display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display even in cases other than the case where the game ball has entered the start winning means of.

Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means only in the first state, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display, or in a state other than the first state. When the game ball enters the first starting winning means, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second display.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"The first symbol display means [for example, the first special symbol display device 212, etc.] capable of executing the first symbol variation display, and
A second symbol display means [for example, a second special symbol display device 214, etc.] capable of executing a second symbol variation display, and
A game control means that can control any one of a plurality of game states [for example, CPU 304 in the main control unit 300] and
The first starting winning means [for example, the first special drawing starting port (top) 230, the first special drawing starting port (bottom) 231 and the like] that the game ball can enter,
A display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
It is a game table equipped with
The first starting winning means is a winning means corresponding to the first symbol variation display.
Both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time [for example, as shown in FIG. 13A, the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212. And the symbol variation display on the second special figure display device 214 may be performed at the same time],
The execution of the small hit game can be started after the small hit symbol [for example, "special figure f" or "special figure g"] is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display [for example, the second special figure g]. When "special figure f" or "special figure g" is stopped and displayed on the figure display device 214 and a small hit occurs, a small hit game in which the second variable winning opening 235a opens and closes is executed, etc.],
One of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state [for example, a normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), etc.].
One of the plurality of displays is a symbol variation effect display [for example, a decorative symbol displayed in accordance with the variation display of the special figure 1 shown in FIGS. 14 (b) to 15 (x). Production display including fluctuation display (decorative design fluctuation production display), etc.]
One of the plurality of displays is a standby effect display [for example, a display of a symbol demo shown in FIG. 18 (c), a display of an animation demo shown in FIG. 18 (d), etc.].
The certain symbol variation effect display is a display including a display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are variablely displayed.
In the first gaming state, the certain symbol variation effect display is started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (f), in the normal gaming state, in the normal gaming state, The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol variation effect display in response to the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212],
In the first gaming state, the certain symbol variation effect display corresponding to the start of the second symbol variation display is not started [for example, as shown in FIG. 18C, in the normal gaming state. , The decorative symbol variation effect display is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to the symbol variation display on the second special symbol display device 214],
The certain standby effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed.
The certain standby effect display may be displayed even during the execution of the small hit game [for example, as shown in FIGS. 28 (h) to 28 (i), a symbol demonstration or a symbol demonstration may be displayed during the small hit game. Anime demos are running, etc.],
In the first game state, even when the game ball enters the first start winning means while the small hit game is being executed while the certain standby effect display is displayed, the certain standby The effect display is continuously displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 28 (f) to (i) and 31 (e) to (g), the special figure 2 in the design demo or the animation demo is displayed. Even if the game ball wins a prize at the first special figure start port (top) 230 during the small hit game, the design demo and animation demo continue, etc.],
It is possible to execute a certain light emission effect [for example, the light emission effect during the design demonstration shown in FIG. 38 (c), the light emission effect during the animation demo shown in FIG. 38 (d), etc.].
The certain light emitting effect is a light emitting effect of a light emitting mode corresponding to the certain standby effect display.
The certain light emitting effect may be executed while the certain standby effect display is displayed.
In the first game state, even when the game ball enters the first start winning means while the small hit game is being executed during the execution of the certain light emission effect, the certain light emission effect Is continuously executed [For example, as shown in FIGS. 38 (f) to (h), the first special figure start port (top) 230 during the small hit game according to special figure 2 during the symbol demonstration. Even if the game ball wins a prize, the light emission effect during the design demonstration is continued, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the light emission effect, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the light emission effect.

Here, the first symbol display means may be capable of executing only the first symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the first symbol variation display. Further, the first symbol display means may be one that always executes the first symbol variation display, or may not execute the first symbol variation display.

Further, the second symbol display means may be capable of executing only the second symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the second symbol variation display. Further, the second symbol display means may be one that always executes the second symbol variation display, or may not execute the second symbol variation display.

Further, the game control means may be able to control only one of the plurality of game states, or may be controllable to other than any one of the plurality of game states. .. Further, the game control means may be one that always controls one of a plurality of game states, or may not be controlled to any one of a plurality of game states.

Further, the first starting winning means may be one in which only the game ball can enter, or one in which something other than the game ball can also enter. Further, the first starting winning means may be one in which the game ball always enters, or one in which the game ball may not enter.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of displays. Further, the display means may be one that always displays a plurality of displays, or may not display a plurality of displays.

Further, the first start winning means may correspond only to the first symbol display means, or may correspond to a symbol display means other than the first symbol display means. Further, the first start winning means may be one that always corresponds to the first symbol display means, or may not correspond to the first symbol display means.

Further, only the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time, or symbols other than both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time. The variable display may also be executed at the same time. In addition, both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may always be executed at the same time, or both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may not be executed at the same time. There may be.

Further, it may be possible to start only the execution of the small hit game after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display, or the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display. After that, it may be possible to start execution of something other than the execution of the small hit game. Further, the execution of the small hit game may be always started after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display, or after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display. The execution of the small hit game may not be started.

Further, the execution of the small hit game may be started only after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display, or the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display. It may be possible to start the execution of the small hit game even after it has been played.

Further, a certain symbol variation effect display may include only the display of a mode in which a plurality of decorative symbols are variablely displayed, or a display other than the display in a mode in which a plurality of decorative symbols are variablely displayed. May also be included. Further, a certain symbol variation effect display may always include a display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are variablely displayed, or does not include a display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are variablely displayed. It may be something that may occur.

Further, in the first gaming state, only a certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be started. A display other than a certain symbol variation effect display may also be started in response to the start of. Further, in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be always started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be started. There may be a case where a certain symbol variation effect display is not started in response to the start of.

Further, in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be started only in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be started. A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to something other than the start of.

Further, in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of only the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be started. A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the symbol variation display other than the above.

Further, only in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and even in a gaming state other than the first gaming state, the first A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the symbol variation display of.

Further, in the first gaming state, it is not necessary to start only a certain symbol variation effect display in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation display It is not necessary to start the display other than a certain symbol variation effect display according to the start of the display. Further, in the first gaming state, it is not always necessary to start a certain symbol variation effect display in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the display.

Further, in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may not be started only in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation may be started. It is not necessary to start a certain symbol variation effect display in response to something other than the start of the display.

Further, only in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, and even in a gaming state other than the first gaming state, the second symbol variation effect display may be started. A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the symbol variation display of.

Further, a certain standby effect display may be displayed only in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed. However, the first symbol variation display may not be executed in the first game state, and may be displayed even in a state other than the state in which the jackpot game is not executed. Further, a certain standby effect display may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed. The first symbol variation display may not be executed in one game state, and the jackpot game may not be displayed in a state where it is not executed.

Further, only a certain standby effect display may be displayed even during the execution of the small hit game, and a display other than the certain standby effect display is also displayed even during the execution of the small hit game. There may be cases. Further, a certain standby effect display may always be displayed even during the execution of the small hit game, or a certain standby effect display may not be displayed even during the execution of the small hit game.

In addition, a certain standby effect display may be displayed only during the execution of the small hit game, or a certain standby effect display may be displayed even when the small hit game is not being executed. You may.

Further, in the first game state, even if a game ball enters the first start winning means while a small hit game is being executed while a certain standby effect display is being displayed, only a certain standby effect display is displayed. May be continuously displayed, or in the first game state, the game ball has entered the first start winning means while the small hit game is being executed while a certain standby effect display is being displayed. In that case, a display other than a certain standby effect display may be continuously displayed. Further, in the first game state, even if the game ball enters the first start winning means while the small hit game is being executed while the display of the standby effect display is displayed, the standby effect display is displayed. It may always be displayed continuously, or in the first game state, the game ball has entered the first start winning means while the small hit game is being executed while a certain standby effect display is being displayed. Even in this case, a certain standby effect display may not be continuously displayed.

Further, in the first game state, a certain standby effect display is performed only when a game ball enters the first start winning means while a small hit game is being executed while a certain standby effect display is being displayed. May be continuously displayed, or in the first game state, the game ball has entered the first start winning means while the small hit game is being executed while a certain standby effect display is being displayed. Even in cases other than the case, a certain standby effect display may be continuously displayed.

Further, in the first game state, even if the game ball enters only the first start winning means while the small hit game is being executed while the display of the standby effect display is displayed, the standby effect display is displayed. May be continuously displayed, or in the first gaming state, in a state where the small hit game is being executed while a certain standby effect display is being displayed, the winning means other than the first starting winning means may also be displayed. Even when the game ball enters, a certain standby effect display may be continuously displayed.

Further, in the first game state, only when the small hit game is being executed while the display of a certain standby effect display is being performed, even if the game ball enters the first start winning means, a certain standby effect display is displayed. May be continuously displayed, or in the first game state, the game ball is used as the first start winning means in a state other than the state in which the small hit game is being executed while the display of a certain standby effect display is displayed. Even when the player enters, a certain standby effect display may be continuously displayed.

Further, in the first game state, even if the game ball enters the first start winning means while only the small hit game is being executed while the display of the standby effect display is displayed, the standby effect display is displayed. May be continuously displayed, or in the first game state, when a game other than the small hit game is being executed while a certain standby effect display is being displayed, the game ball is used as the first start winning means. Even when the player enters, a certain standby effect display may be continuously displayed.

Further, in the first game state, even when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the state where the small hit game is executed only while the display of a certain standby effect display is displayed, a certain standby effect display is displayed. May be continuously displayed, or in the first game state, a game ball is used as the first start winning means in a state where the small hit game is being executed while a display other than a certain standby effect display is displayed. Even when the player enters, a certain standby effect display may be continuously displayed.

Further, only in the first game state, even if the game ball enters the first start winning means while the small hit game is being executed while the display of the standby effect display is displayed, the standby effect display is displayed. May be continuously displayed, or in a game state other than the first game state, in a state where a small hit game is being executed while a certain standby effect display is being displayed, the game is used as the first start winning means. Even when the ball enters, a certain standby effect display may be continuously displayed.

Further, it may be possible to execute only a certain light emitting effect, or it may be possible to execute an effect other than a certain light emitting effect. Further, a certain light emitting effect may be always executed, or a certain light emitting effect may not be executed.

Further, a certain light emitting effect may be a light emitting mode corresponding only to a certain standby effect display, or may be a light emitting effect corresponding to a display other than a certain standby effect display. Further, a certain light emitting effect may be a light emitting mode that always corresponds to a certain standby effect display, or may be a light emitting mode that may not correspond to a certain standby effect display.

Further, in the first game state, even if the game ball enters the first start winning means while the small hit game is being executed during the execution of a certain light emission effect, only a certain light emission effect continues. In the first game state, even when the game ball enters the first start winning means while the small hit game is being executed during the execution of a certain light emission effect. An effect other than a certain light emission effect may be continuously executed. Further, in the first game state, even if the game ball enters the first start winning means while the small hit game is being executed during the execution of a certain light emission effect, the certain light emission effect is always continued. In the first game state, even when the game ball enters the first start winning means while the small hit game is being executed during the execution of a certain light emission effect. There may be cases where a certain light emission effect is not continuously executed.

Further, in the first game state, a certain light emission effect is continued only when the game ball enters the first start winning means while the small hit game is being executed during the execution of a certain light emission effect. In the first game state, a small hit game is being executed during the execution of a certain light emission effect, except when the game ball enters the first start winning means. Even in that case, a certain light emitting effect may be continuously executed.

Further, in the first game state, even if the game ball enters only the first start winning means while the small hit game is being executed during the execution of a certain light emission effect, the certain light emission effect continues. In the first game state, the game ball enters a winning means other than the first starting winning means while the small hit game is being executed during the execution of a certain light emission effect. Even if this is done, a certain light emission effect may be continuously executed.

Further, in the first game state, only when the small hit game is executed during the execution of a certain light emission effect, even if the game ball enters the first start winning means, the certain light emission effect continues. In the first game state, the game ball has entered the first start winning means in a state other than the state in which the small hit game is being executed during the execution of a certain light emission effect. Even in that case, a certain light emitting effect may be continuously executed.

Further, in the first game state, even if the game ball enters the first start winning means while only the small hit game is being executed during the execution of a certain light emission effect, the certain light emission effect continues. In the first game state, a game ball has entered the first start winning means while a game other than the small hit game is being executed during the execution of a certain light emission effect. Even in that case, a certain light emitting effect may be continuously executed.

Further, in the first game state, even if the game ball enters the first start winning means in the state where the small hit game is executed only during the execution of a certain light emission effect, the certain light emission effect continues. In the first game state, even when the game ball enters the first start winning means in a state where the small hit game is executed except during the execution of a certain light emission effect. , A certain light emission effect may be continuously executed.

Further, only in the first game state, even if the game ball enters the first start winning means while the small hit game is being executed during the execution of a certain light emission effect, the certain light emission effect continues. In a game state other than the first game state, the game ball enters the first start winning means while the small hit game is being executed during the execution of a certain light emission effect. Even if this is done, a certain light emission effect may be continuously executed.

Further, "the certain standby effect display is shown in the first standby effect display [for example, the display of the symbol demo shown in FIG. 18 (c)] and the second standby effect display [for example, FIG. 18 (d)). It is a display that includes at least [animation demo display, etc.]
The first standby effect display is a display including a display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (c), in the display of the symbol demo, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Among the modes, "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" includes both the display of the stop mode of the decorative symbol and the display of the stop mode of the mini-design, which are stopped and displayed by the combination of the outliers.],
The second standby effect display is a display that does not include a display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 18D, in the display of the animation demo, the decorative symbols are stopped. Of the display modes, "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" includes only the display of the stop mode of the mini symbol that was stopped and displayed by the combination of the outlier symbols],
The display mode of the second standby effect display is different from the display mode of the first standby effect display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, a certain standby effect display may be configured to include only the first standby effect display and the second standby effect display, or the first standby effect display and the second standby effect display. It may be configured to include at least a display other than the display. Further, a certain standby effect display may be configured to always include a first standby effect display and a second standby effect display, or a first standby effect display and a second standby effect display. It may be configured without including.

It should be noted that a certain standby effect display may be configured to include at least only the first standby effect display of the first standby effect display and the second standby effect display, or the first standby effect display may be included. It may be configured to include at least only the second standby effect display of the standby effect display and the second standby effect display, or both the first standby effect display and the second standby effect display. It may be configured to include at least.

Further, the first standby effect display may include only the display of the mode in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, or may include the display other than the display of the mode in which the plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. It may be one. Further, the first standby effect display may always include the display of the mode in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, or may not include the display of the mode in which the plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. It may be something.

Further, the second standby effect display may not include only the display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, or may be a display other than the display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. It may not be included. Further, the second standby effect display may not always include the display of the mode in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, or may include the display of the mode in which the plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. It may be something.

In addition, "the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display after the first standby effect display is displayed [for example, FIGS. 21 (c) to 21 (see). As shown in d), the display of the design demo has been switched to the display of the animation demo, etc.],
After the second standby effect display is displayed, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display [for example, in FIGS. 21 (g) to 21 (h). As shown, the display of the animation demo has been switched to the display of the design demo, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, after the first standby effect display is displayed, the display may be switched only from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display, or the first standby effect display may be displayed. After that, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to a display other than the second standby effect display. Further, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display after the first standby effect display is displayed, or after the first standby effect display is displayed. The display may not switch from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display.

Further, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display only after the first standby effect display is displayed, or the first standby effect display may be displayed. The display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display other than after.

Further, after the second standby effect display is displayed, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to only the first standby effect display, or the second standby effect display is displayed. The display may later switch from the second standby effect display to a display other than the first standby effect display. Further, after the second standby effect display is displayed, the display may always switch from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display, or the second standby effect display is displayed. The display may not be switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display later.

Further, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display only after the second standby effect display is displayed, or the second standby effect display may be displayed. The display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display other than after.

Further, "when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the certain standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state," The certain standby effect display is switched to the certain symbol variation effect display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 29 (d) to 29 (f), the display of the animation demo during the change of the special figure 2 in the normal gaming state When a game ball wins a prize in the first special figure start port (above) 230, the decorative pattern variation effect display starts from the animation demo, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the display of a certain standby effect display is being performed in the first game state, when the game ball enters the first start winning means, a certain standby effect is displayed. The display may be switched only to a certain symbol variation effect display, or the first start winning prize may be obtained in a state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while a certain standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state. When the game ball enters the means, the display may be switched from a certain standby effect display to a display other than a certain symbol variation effect display. In addition, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the second standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state, a certain standby effect is produced. You may always switch from the display to a certain symbol variation effect display, or in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed during the display of a certain standby effect display in the first game state, the first start winning prize. When a game ball enters the means, it may not be possible to switch from a certain standby effect display to a certain symbol variation effect display.

In addition, when a game ball enters the first start winning means in a state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while a certain standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state, a certain standby effect display is displayed. It is possible to switch from only to a certain symbol variation effect display, or in a state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while a certain standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state, the first start winning means. When the game ball enters the market, the display other than the standby effect display may be switched to the symbol variation effect display.

In addition, in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the display of a certain standby effect display is being performed in the first game state, a certain standby is performed only when the game ball enters the first start winning means. The effect display may be switched to a certain symbol variation effect display, or the first start prize may be obtained in a state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while a certain standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state. Even when the game ball enters the means, the display may be switched from a certain standby effect display to a certain symbol variation effect display.

In addition, when the game ball enters the first start winning means only in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the display of the standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state, a certain standby effect is displayed. The display may be switched to a certain symbol variation effect display, and even in a state other than the state in which the second symbol variation display is being executed during the display of a certain standby effect display in the first game state, the first When a game ball enters the starting winning means of, a certain standby effect display may be switched to a certain symbol variation effect display.

In addition, "one of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state [for example, a jackpot gaming state, a probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state), or an electric support state (special figure). Figure low probability state, normal figure high probability state), etc.]
The second gaming state is a gaming state different from the first gaming state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The second gaming state may be a gaming state that is partially different from the first gaming state, or may be a gaming state that is completely different from the first gaming state.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"The first symbol display means [for example, the first special symbol display device 212, etc.] capable of executing the first symbol variation display, and
A second symbol display means [for example, a second special symbol display device 214, etc.] capable of executing a second symbol variation display, and
A game control means that can control any one of a plurality of game states [for example, CPU 304 in the main control unit 300] and
The first starting winning means [for example, the first special drawing starting port (top) 230, the first special drawing starting port (bottom) 231 and the like] that the game ball can enter,
A display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
It is a game table equipped with
The first starting winning means is a winning means corresponding to the first symbol variation display.
Both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time [for example, as shown in FIG. 13A, the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212. And the symbol variation display on the second special figure display device 214 may be performed at the same time],
The execution of the small hit game can be started after the small hit symbol [for example, "special figure f" or "special figure g"] is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display [for example, the second special figure g]. When "special figure f" or "special figure g" is stopped and displayed on the figure display device 214 and a small hit occurs, a small hit game in which the second variable winning opening 235a opens and closes is executed, etc.],
One of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state [for example, a normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), etc.].
One of the plurality of displays is a symbol variation effect display [for example, a decorative symbol displayed in accordance with the variation display of the special figure 1 shown in FIGS. 14 (b) to 15 (x). Production display including fluctuation display (decorative design fluctuation production display), etc.]
One of the plurality of displays is a standby effect display [for example, a display of a symbol demo shown in FIG. 18 (c), a display of an animation demo shown in FIG. 18 (d), etc.].
The certain symbol variation effect display is a display including a display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are variablely displayed.
In the first gaming state, the symbol variation effect display is started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (f), in the normal gaming state, the first symbol variation display is started. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol variation effect display in response to the symbol variation display on the special symbol display device 212],
In the first gaming state, the symbol variation effect display corresponding to the start of the second symbol variation display is not started [for example, as shown in FIG. 18C, in the normal gaming state, the first is 2 The decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the decorative symbol variation effect display in response to the symbol variation display on the special symbol display device 214],
The certain standby effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed.
The certain standby effect display may be displayed even during the execution of the small hit game [for example, as shown in FIGS. 28 (h) to 28 (i), a symbol demonstration or a symbol demonstration may be displayed during the small hit game. Anime demos are running, etc.],
In the state where the certain standby effect display is displayed, the BGM may be turned off [for example, as shown in FIGS. 38 (a) to 38 (e), the decorative symbol variation effect display ends. After shifting to the design demo, BGM will be turned off after a predetermined time has passed],
In the first game state, the game ball has entered the first start winning means in the state in which the small hit game is being executed while the certain standby effect display is being displayed and the BGM is off. Even in such a case, the certain standby effect display is continuously displayed, and the BGM off state is also continued [for example, as shown in FIGS. 38 (a) to 38 (h), a symbol demonstration or a symbol demonstration in a normal gaming state When the small hit game related to Special Figure 2 is being executed while the animation demo is displayed and the BGM is off, the game ball wins at the first special figure start port (top) 230. The design demo or animation demo will continue, and the BGM off state will continue, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the production.

Here, the first symbol display means may be capable of executing only the first symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the first symbol variation display. Further, the first symbol display means may be one that always executes the first symbol variation display, or may not execute the first symbol variation display.

Further, the second symbol display means may be capable of executing only the second symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the second symbol variation display. Further, the second symbol display means may be one that always executes the second symbol variation display, or may not execute the second symbol variation display.

Further, the game control means may be able to control only one of the plurality of game states, or may be controllable to other than any one of the plurality of game states. .. Further, the game control means may be one that always controls one of a plurality of game states, or may not be controlled to any one of a plurality of game states.

Further, the first starting winning means may be one in which only the game ball can enter, or one in which something other than the game ball can also enter. Further, the first starting winning means may be one in which the game ball always enters, or one in which the game ball may not enter.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of displays. Further, the display means may be one that always displays a plurality of displays, or may not display a plurality of displays.

Further, the first start winning means may correspond only to the first symbol display means, or may correspond to a symbol display means other than the first symbol display means. Further, the first start winning means may be one that always corresponds to the first symbol display means, or may not correspond to the first symbol display means.

Further, only the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time, or symbols other than both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time. The variable display may also be executed at the same time. In addition, both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may always be executed at the same time, or both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may not be executed at the same time. There may be.

Further, it may be possible to start only the execution of the small hit game after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display, or the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display. After that, it may be possible to start execution of something other than the execution of the small hit game. Further, the execution of the small hit game may be always started after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display, or after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display. The execution of the small hit game may not be started.

Further, the execution of the small hit game may be started only after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display, or the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display. It may be possible to start the execution of the small hit game even after it has been played.

Further, a certain symbol variation effect display may include only the display of a mode in which a plurality of decorative symbols are variablely displayed, or a display other than the display in a mode in which a plurality of decorative symbols are variablely displayed. May also be included. Further, a certain symbol variation effect display may always include a display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are variablely displayed, or does not include a display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are variablely displayed. It may be something that may occur.

Further, in the first gaming state, only a certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be started. A display other than a certain symbol variation effect display may also be started in response to the start of. Further, in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be always started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be started. There may be a case where a certain symbol variation effect display is not started in response to the start of.

Further, in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be started only in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be started. A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to something other than the start of.

Further, in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of only the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be started. A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the symbol variation display other than the above.

Further, only in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and even in a gaming state other than the first gaming state, the first A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the symbol variation display of.

Further, in the first gaming state, it is not necessary to start only a certain symbol variation effect display in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation display It is not necessary to start the display other than a certain symbol variation effect display according to the start of the display. Further, in the first gaming state, it is not always necessary to start a certain symbol variation effect display in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the display.

Further, in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may not be started only in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation may be started. It is not necessary to start a certain symbol variation effect display in response to something other than the start of the display.

Further, only in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, and even in a gaming state other than the first gaming state, the second symbol variation effect display may be started. A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the symbol variation display of.

Further, a certain standby effect display may be displayed only in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed. However, the first symbol variation display may not be executed in the first game state, and may be displayed even in a state other than the state in which the jackpot game is not executed. Further, a certain standby effect display may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed. The first symbol variation display may not be executed in one game state, and the jackpot game may not be displayed in a state where it is not executed.

Further, only a certain standby effect display may be displayed even during the execution of the small hit game, and a display other than the certain standby effect display is also displayed even during the execution of the small hit game. There may be cases. Further, a certain standby effect display may always be displayed even during the execution of the small hit game, or a certain standby effect display may not be displayed even during the execution of the small hit game.

In addition, a certain standby effect display may be displayed only during the execution of the small hit game, or a certain standby effect display may be displayed even when the small hit game is not being executed. You may.

Further, in a state where a certain standby effect display is displayed, only the BGM off state may be displayed, or in a state where a certain standby effect display is displayed, a state other than the BGM off state may be obtained. It may be. Further, the BGM may always be in the BGM off state when a certain standby effect display is displayed, or the BGM may not be in the BGM off state when a certain standby effect display is displayed. ..

Further, in the first game state, even when the small hit game is being executed while a certain standby effect display is being displayed and the BGM is off and the game ball enters the first start winning means. A certain standby effect display may be continuously displayed, and only the BGM off state may be continued, or in the first game state, a small hit game is being executed while a certain standby effect display is being displayed. Therefore, even when the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the BGM off state, a certain standby effect display may be continuously displayed, and a state other than the BGM off state may be continued. Further, in the first game state, even when the small hit game is being executed while a certain standby effect display is being displayed and the BGM is off and the game ball enters the first start winning means. A certain standby effect display may be continuously displayed, and the BGM off state may always be continued, or in the first game state, a small hit game is being executed while a certain standby effect display is being displayed. Therefore, even when the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the BGM off state, a certain standby effect display may be continuously displayed, and the BGM off state may not be continued.

Further, in the first game state, even when the small hit game is being executed while a certain standby effect display is being displayed and the BGM is off and the game ball enters the first start winning means. Only a certain standby effect display may be continuously displayed, and the BGM off state may also be continued. In the first game state, a small hit game is being executed while a certain standby effect display is being displayed. Therefore, even when the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the BGM off state, a display other than a certain standby effect display may be continuously displayed, and the BGM off state may be continued.

Further, in the first game state, even when the small hit game is being executed while a certain standby effect display is being displayed and the BGM is off and the game ball enters only the first start winning means. , A certain standby effect display may be continuously displayed, and the BGM off state may be continued, or in the first game state, a small hit game is being executed while a certain standby effect display is displayed. Therefore, even when the game ball enters the winning means other than the first starting winning means in the BGM off state, a certain standby effect display may be continuously displayed, and the BGM off state may also be continued.

Further, in the first game state, even when the game ball enters the first start winning means only in the state where the small hit game is being executed while the display of a certain standby effect display is displayed and the BGM is off. , A certain standby effect display may be continuously displayed, and the BGM off state may be continued, or in the first game state, a small hit game is being executed while a certain standby effect display is displayed. Even in a state other than the BGM off state, even when the game ball enters the first start winning means, a certain standby effect display may be continuously displayed, and the BGM off state may also be continued.

Further, in the first game state, even when the small hit game is being executed while only a certain standby effect display is displayed and the BGM is off and the game ball enters the first start winning means. , A certain standby effect display may be continuously displayed, and the BGM off state may be continued, or in the first game state, the small hit game is executed even while the display other than the certain standby effect display is displayed. Even when the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the state of being in the BGM off state, a certain standby effect display may be continuously displayed, and the BGM off state may also be continued.

Further, only in the first game state, even when the small hit game is being executed while a certain standby effect display is being displayed and the game ball enters the first start winning means in the BGM off state. , A certain standby effect display may be continuously displayed, and the BGM off state may be continued, or even in a game state other than the first game state, a small hit game is executed while a certain standby effect display is displayed. Even when the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the BGM off state, a certain standby effect display may be continuously displayed, and the BGM off state may also be continued.

Further, "the certain standby effect display is shown in the first standby effect display [for example, the display of the symbol demo shown in FIG. 18 (c)] and the second standby effect display [for example, FIG. 18 (d)). It is a display that includes at least [animation demo display, etc.]
The first standby effect display is a display including a display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (c), in the display of the symbol demo, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Among the modes, "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" includes both the display of the stop mode of the decorative symbol and the display of the stop mode of the mini-design, which are stopped and displayed by the combination of the outliers.],
The second standby effect display is a display that does not include a display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 18D, in the display of the animation demo, the decorative symbols are stopped. Of the display modes, "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" includes only the display of the stop mode of the mini symbol that was stopped and displayed by the combination of the outlier symbols],
The display mode of the second standby effect display is different from the display mode of the first standby effect display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, a certain standby effect display may be configured to include only the first standby effect display and the second standby effect display, or the first standby effect display and the second standby effect display. It may be configured to include at least a display other than the display. Further, a certain standby effect display may be configured to always include a first standby effect display and a second standby effect display, or a first standby effect display and a second standby effect display. It may be configured without including.

It should be noted that a certain standby effect display may be configured to include at least only the first standby effect display of the first standby effect display and the second standby effect display, or the first standby effect display may be included. It may be configured to include at least only the second standby effect display of the standby effect display and the second standby effect display, or both the first standby effect display and the second standby effect display. It may be configured to include at least.

Further, the first standby effect display may include only the display of the mode in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, or may include the display other than the display of the mode in which the plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. It may be one. Further, the first standby effect display may always include the display of the mode in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, or may not include the display of the mode in which the plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. It may be something.

Further, the second standby effect display may not include only the display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, or may be a display other than the display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. It may not be included. Further, the second standby effect display may not always include the display of the mode in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, or may include the display of the mode in which the plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. It may be something.

In addition, "the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display after the first standby effect display is displayed [for example, FIGS. 21 (c) to 21 (see). As shown in d), the display of the design demo has been switched to the display of the animation demo, etc.],
After the second standby effect display is displayed, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display [for example, in FIGS. 21 (g) to 21 (h). As shown, the display of the animation demo has been switched to the display of the design demo, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, after the first standby effect display is displayed, the display may be switched only from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display, or the first standby effect display may be displayed. After that, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to a display other than the second standby effect display. Further, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display after the first standby effect display is displayed, or after the first standby effect display is displayed. The display may not switch from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display.

Further, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display only after the first standby effect display is displayed, or the first standby effect display may be displayed. The display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display other than after.

Further, after the second standby effect display is displayed, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to only the first standby effect display, or the second standby effect display is displayed. The display may later switch from the second standby effect display to a display other than the first standby effect display. Further, after the second standby effect display is displayed, the display may always switch from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display, or the second standby effect display is displayed. The display may not be switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display later.

Further, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display only after the second standby effect display is displayed, or the second standby effect display may be displayed. The display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display other than after.

Further, "when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the certain standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state," The certain standby effect display is switched to the certain symbol variation effect display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 29 (d) to 29 (f), the display of the animation demo during the change of the special figure 2 in the normal gaming state When a game ball wins a prize in the first special figure start port (above) 230, the decorative pattern variation effect display starts from the animation demo, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the display of a certain standby effect display is being performed in the first game state, when the game ball enters the first start winning means, a certain standby effect is displayed. The display may be switched only to a certain symbol variation effect display, or the first start winning prize may be obtained in a state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while a certain standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state. When the game ball enters the means, the display may be switched from a certain standby effect display to a display other than a certain symbol variation effect display. In addition, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the second standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state, a certain standby effect is produced. You may always switch from the display to a certain symbol variation effect display, or in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed during the display of a certain standby effect display in the first game state, the first start winning prize. When a game ball enters the means, it may not be possible to switch from a certain standby effect display to a certain symbol variation effect display.

In addition, when a game ball enters the first start winning means in a state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while a certain standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state, a certain standby effect display is displayed. It is possible to switch from only to a certain symbol variation effect display, or in a state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while a certain standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state, the first start winning means. When the game ball enters the market, the display other than the standby effect display may be switched to the symbol variation effect display.

In addition, in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the display of a certain standby effect display is being performed in the first game state, a certain standby is performed only when the game ball enters the first start winning means. The effect display may be switched to a certain symbol variation effect display, or the first start prize may be obtained in a state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while a certain standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state. Even when the game ball enters the means, the display may be switched from a certain standby effect display to a certain symbol variation effect display.

In addition, when the game ball enters the first start winning means only in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the display of the standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state, a certain standby effect is displayed. The display may be switched to a certain symbol variation effect display, and even in a state other than the state in which the second symbol variation display is being executed during the display of a certain standby effect display in the first game state, the first When a game ball enters the starting winning means of, a certain standby effect display may be switched to a certain symbol variation effect display.

Further, "The BGM on state may continue even after the display is switched from the certain symbol variation effect display to the certain standby effect display [for example, in FIGS. 38 (a) to 38 (c). As shown, even after the decorative symbol variation effect display related to the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is completed and the symbol demo is started, the BGM is continuously output for a predetermined time, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, there may be a case where only the BGM on state continues even after the display is switched from a certain symbol variation effect display to a certain standby effect display, or a certain standby effect from a certain symbol variation effect display. Even after the display is switched to the display, a state other than the BGM on state may continue. Further, the BGM on state may always continue even after the display is switched from a certain symbol variation effect display to a certain standby effect display, or the display is switched from a certain symbol variation effect display to a certain standby effect display. After that, the BGM on state may not continue.

In addition, the BGM on state may continue only after the display is switched from a certain symbol variation effect display to a certain standby effect display, or a certain standby effect display from a certain symbol variation effect display. The BGM on state may continue even after the display is switched to.

In addition, "one of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state [for example, a jackpot gaming state, a probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state), or an electric support state (special figure). Figure low probability state, normal figure high probability state), etc.]
The second gaming state is a gaming state different from the first gaming state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The second gaming state may be a gaming state that is partially different from the first gaming state, or may be a gaming state that is completely different from the first gaming state.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"The first symbol display means [for example, the first special symbol display device 212, etc.] capable of executing the first symbol variation display, and
A second symbol display means [for example, a second special symbol display device 214, etc.] capable of executing a second symbol variation display, and
A game control means that can control any one of a plurality of game states [for example, CPU 304 in the main control unit 300] and
The first starting winning means [for example, the first special drawing starting port (top) 230, the first special drawing starting port (bottom) 231 and the like] that the game ball can enter,
A display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
It is a game table equipped with
The first starting winning means is a winning means corresponding to the first symbol variation display.
Both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time [for example, as shown in FIG. 13A, the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212. And the symbol variation display on the second special figure display device 214 may be performed at the same time],
The execution of the small hit game can be started after the small hit symbol [for example, "special figure f" or "special figure g"] is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display [for example, "special figure g". "f", "special figure g", etc.]
[For example, a small hit game in which the second variable winning opening 235a opens and closes when "special figure f" or "special figure g" is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214 and a small hit is executed is executed. etc]
,
One of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state [for example, a normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), etc.].
One of the plurality of displays is a symbol variation effect display [for example, a decorative symbol displayed in accordance with the variation display of the special figure 1 shown in FIGS. 14 (b) to 15 (x). Production display including fluctuation display (decorative design fluctuation production display), etc.]
One of the plurality of displays is a standby effect display [for example, a display of a symbol demo shown in FIG. 18 (c), a display of an animation demo shown in FIG. 18 (d), etc.].
The certain symbol variation effect display is a display including a display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are variablely displayed.
In the first gaming state, the symbol variation effect display is started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (f), in the normal gaming state, the first symbol variation display is started. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol variation effect display in response to the symbol variation display on the special symbol display device 212],
In the first gaming state, the symbol variation effect display corresponding to the start of the second symbol variation display is not started [for example, as shown in FIG. 18C, in the normal gaming state, the first is 2 The decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the decorative symbol variation effect display in response to the symbol variation display on the special symbol display device 214],
The certain standby effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed.
The certain standby effect display may be displayed even during the execution of the small hit game [for example, as shown in FIGS. 28 (h) to 28 (i), a symbol demonstration or a symbol demonstration may be displayed during the small hit game. Anime demos are running, etc.],
In the first game state, when the game ball enters the first start winning means while the small hit game is being executed while the certain standby effect display is displayed (hereinafter, "first". ”), The certain standby effect display is continuously displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 28 (f) to (i) and 31 (e) to (g). , Even if the game ball wins the first special figure start port (above) 230 during the small hit game related to special figure 2 during the symbol demo or animation demo, the symbol demo or animation demo continues, etc.],
The display means is a means capable of notifying the number of pending starts of the first symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "first pending number") by the number of hold icons [for example, FIG. As shown in 14 (a), the number of pending symbol variation displays in Special Figure 1 is notified by the number of reserved icons h11 and h12],
One of the plurality of displays is an increase animation [for example, an increase animation shown in FIGS. 14 (f) to 14 (h)].
One of the plurality of displays is a moving animation [for example, a moving animation shown in FIGS. 14 (b) to 14 (e)].
The increase animation is an animation in which the number of hold icons increases when the first hold number increases.
The moving animation is an animation in which the holding icon moves in order to change the display position of the holding icon.
When the first hold number increases during the execution of the first symbol variation display, the increased animation is displayed from the beginning to the end without being interrupted [for example, FIGS. 14 (f) to 14 (f) to FIG. As shown in (h), if the number of reserved special figures 1 increases during the symbol variation display of special figure 1, the increase animation is displayed from the beginning to the end, etc.],
If the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied during the display of the hold icon, the moving animation is terminated halfway from the beginning to the end after the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 14 (b) to 14 (e), when the symbol variation display of special figure 1 starts while the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, the movement animation starts from the beginning to the end. Is displayed, etc.],
In the first game state, when the game ball enters the first start winning means while the certain standby effect display is displayed, at least the increased animation of the increased animation and the moving animation. Although a part is omitted, in the first case, both the increased animation and the moving animation are displayed from the beginning to the end without being interrupted [for example, FIGS. 39 (1a) to FIG. As shown in (1e), if a game ball wins the first special figure start port (top) 230 during the execution of the symbol demo or the animation demo, the increase animation is omitted and the hold icon h11 is displayed, and then the movement is performed. Animation is performed and a movement animation is performed to move to the variable icon display area 280. As shown in FIGS. 39 (2a) to 39 (2 g), the first is during the small hit game of Special Figure 2 in the normal game state. 1 When a game ball wins at the special figure start port (top) 230, the increase animation is displayed from the beginning to the end and the hold icon h11 is displayed, then the movement animation is performed and the hold icon changes to the change icon h0. Is displayed to move to the variable icon display area 280],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Here, the first symbol display means may be capable of executing only the first symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the first symbol variation display. Further, the first symbol display means may be one that always executes the first symbol variation display, or may not execute the first symbol variation display.

Further, the second symbol display means may be capable of executing only the second symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the second symbol variation display. Further, the second symbol display means may be one that always executes the second symbol variation display, or may not execute the second symbol variation display.

Further, the game control means may be able to control only one of the plurality of game states, or may be controllable to other than any one of the plurality of game states. .. Further, the game control means may be one that always controls one of a plurality of game states, or may not be controlled to any one of a plurality of game states.

Further, the first starting winning means may be one in which only the game ball can enter, or one in which something other than the game ball can also enter. Further, the first starting winning means may be one in which the game ball always enters, or one in which the game ball may not enter.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of displays. Further, the display means may be one that always displays a plurality of displays, or may not display a plurality of displays.

Further, the first start winning means may correspond only to the first symbol display means, or may correspond to a symbol display means other than the first symbol display means. Further, the first start winning means may be one that always corresponds to the first symbol display means, or may not correspond to the first symbol display means.

Further, only the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time, or symbols other than both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time. The variable display may also be executed at the same time. In addition, both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may always be executed at the same time, or both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may not be executed at the same time. There may be.

Further, it may be possible to start only the execution of the small hit game after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display, or the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display. After that, it may be possible to start execution of something other than the execution of the small hit game. Further, the execution of the small hit game may be always started after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display, or after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display. The execution of the small hit game may not be started.

Further, the execution of the small hit game may be started only after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display, or the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display. It may be possible to start the execution of the small hit game even after it has been played.

Further, a certain symbol variation effect display may include only the display of a mode in which a plurality of decorative symbols are variablely displayed, or a display other than the display in a mode in which a plurality of decorative symbols are variablely displayed. May also be included. Further, a certain symbol variation effect display may always include a display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are variablely displayed, or does not include a display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are variablely displayed. It may be something that may occur.

Further, in the first gaming state, only a certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be started. A display other than a certain symbol variation effect display may also be started in response to the start of. Further, in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be always started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be started. There may be a case where a certain symbol variation effect display is not started in response to the start of.

Further, in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be started only in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be started. A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to something other than the start of.

Further, in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of only the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be started. A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the symbol variation display other than the above.

Further, only in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and even in a gaming state other than the first gaming state, the first A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the symbol variation display of.

Further, in the first gaming state, it is not necessary to start only a certain symbol variation effect display in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation display It is not necessary to start the display other than a certain symbol variation effect display according to the start of the display. Further, in the first gaming state, it is not always necessary to start a certain symbol variation effect display in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the display.

Further, in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may not be started only in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation may be started. It is not necessary to start a certain symbol variation effect display in response to something other than the start of the display.

Further, only in the first gaming state, a certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, and even in a gaming state other than the first gaming state, the second symbol variation effect display may be started. A certain symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the symbol variation display of.

Further, a certain standby effect display may be displayed only in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed. However, the first symbol variation display may not be executed in the first game state, and may be displayed even in a state other than the state in which the jackpot game is not executed. Further, a certain standby effect display may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed. The first symbol variation display may not be executed in one game state, and the jackpot game may not be displayed in a state where it is not executed.

Further, only a certain standby effect display may be displayed even during the execution of the small hit game, and a display other than the certain standby effect display is also displayed even during the execution of the small hit game. There may be cases. Further, a certain standby effect display may always be displayed even during the execution of the small hit game, or a certain standby effect display may not be displayed even during the execution of the small hit game.

In addition, a certain standby effect display may be displayed only during the execution of the small hit game, or a certain standby effect display may be displayed even when the small hit game is not being executed. You may.

Further, in the first game state, even if a game ball enters the first start winning means while a small hit game is being executed while a certain standby effect display is being displayed, only a certain standby effect display is displayed. May be continuously displayed, or in the first game state, the game ball has entered the first start winning means while the small hit game is being executed while a certain standby effect display is being displayed. In that case, a display other than a certain standby effect display may be continuously displayed. Further, in the first game state, even if the game ball enters the first start winning means while the small hit game is being executed while the display of the standby effect display is displayed, the standby effect display is displayed. It may always be displayed continuously, or in the first game state, the game ball has entered the first start winning means while the small hit game is being executed while a certain standby effect display is being displayed. Even in this case, a certain standby effect display may not be continuously displayed.

Further, in the first game state, a certain standby effect display is performed only when a game ball enters the first start winning means while a small hit game is being executed while a certain standby effect display is being displayed. May be continuously displayed, or in the first game state, the game ball has entered the first start winning means while the small hit game is being executed while a certain standby effect display is being displayed. Even in cases other than the case, a certain standby effect display may be continuously displayed.

Further, in the first game state, even if the game ball enters only the first start winning means while the small hit game is being executed while the display of the standby effect display is displayed, the standby effect display is displayed. May be continuously displayed, or in the first gaming state, in a state where the small hit game is being executed while a certain standby effect display is being displayed, the winning means other than the first starting winning means may also be displayed. Even when the game ball enters, a certain standby effect display may be continuously displayed.

Further, in the first game state, only when the small hit game is being executed while the display of a certain standby effect display is being performed, even if the game ball enters the first start winning means, a certain standby effect display is displayed. May be continuously displayed, or in the first game state, the game ball is used as the first start winning means in a state other than the state in which the small hit game is being executed while the display of a certain standby effect display is displayed. Even when the player enters, a certain standby effect display may be continuously displayed.

Further, in the first game state, even if the game ball enters the first start winning means while only the small hit game is being executed while the display of the standby effect display is displayed, the standby effect display is displayed. May be continuously displayed, or in the first game state, when a game other than the small hit game is being executed while a certain standby effect display is being displayed, the game ball is used as the first start winning means. Even when the player enters, a certain standby effect display may be continuously displayed.

Further, in the first game state, even when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the state where the small hit game is executed only while the display of a certain standby effect display is displayed, a certain standby effect display is displayed. May be continuously displayed, or in the first game state, a game ball is used as the first start winning means in a state where the small hit game is being executed while a display other than a certain standby effect display is displayed. Even when the player enters, a certain standby effect display may be continuously displayed.

Further, only in the first game state, even if the game ball enters the first start winning means while the small hit game is being executed while the display of the standby effect display is displayed, the standby effect display is displayed. May be continuously displayed, or in a game state other than the first game state, in a state where a small hit game is being executed while a certain standby effect display is being displayed, the game is used as the first start winning means. Even when the ball enters, a certain standby effect display may be continuously displayed.

Further, the display means may be capable of notifying the first number of holds only by the number of hold icons, or may be able to notify the first number of holds by means other than the number of hold icons. You may. Further, the display means may always notify the first hold number by the number of hold icons, or may not leave the first hold number by the number of hold icons. May be good.

Further, the display means may be able to notify only the first number of holds by the number of hold icons, and the number of holds other than the first number of holds may also be notified by the number of hold icons. It may be.

Further, if the number of the first hold increases during the execution of the first symbol variation display, only the increased animation may be displayed from the beginning to the end without being interrupted in the middle, or the first symbol variation display may be displayed. If the first hold number increases during the execution of, animations other than the increased animation may be displayed from the beginning to the end without being interrupted. In addition, if the first hold number increases during the execution of the first symbol variation display, the increased animation may always be displayed from the beginning to the end without being interrupted in the middle, or the first symbol variation display may be displayed. If the number of first holds increases during the execution of, the increased animation may not be displayed from the beginning to the end without being interrupted.

Further, only when the number of the first hold increases during the execution of the first symbol variation display, the increased animation may be displayed without being interrupted from the beginning to the end, or the first symbol variation display may be displayed. The increased animation may be displayed from the beginning to the end without being interrupted, except when the first hold number is increased during the execution of.

In addition, if the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied while the hold icon is being displayed, only the moving animation is terminated halfway from the beginning to the end after the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied. It may be displayed without being displayed, and if the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied while the hold icon is being displayed, the animation other than the moving animation is performed after the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied. May be displayed from the beginning to the end without being interrupted. In addition, if the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied while the hold icon is being displayed, the moving animation is always cut off from the beginning to the end after the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied. It may be displayed without any problem, and if the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied while the hold icon is displayed, the moving animation is started from the beginning after the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied. It may not be displayed without being cut off in the middle until the end.

In addition, if the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied while the hold icon is being displayed, the moving animation is terminated halfway from the beginning to the end only after the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied. It may be displayed without being displayed, and if the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied while the hold icon is being displayed, the moving animation is the first even after the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied. It may be displayed from to the end without being cut off in the middle.

Also, only when the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied while the hold icon is displayed, the moving animation is cut off halfway from the beginning to the end after the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied. In addition to the case where the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied while the hold icon is being displayed, the moving animation is displayed after the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied. It may be displayed from the beginning to the end without being interrupted.

Further, in the first game state, when the game ball enters the first start winning means while a certain standby effect display is displayed, at least a part of the increase animation among the increase animation and the moving animation is omitted. However, in the first case, only both the increasing animation and the moving animation may be displayed from the beginning to the end without being interrupted in the middle, or in the first gaming state, a certain standby effect display is displayed. If a game ball enters the first starting winning means, at least a part of the increasing animation and the moving animation is omitted, but in the first case, the increasing animation and the moving animation Animations other than both of the above may be displayed from the beginning to the end without being interrupted. Further, in the first game state, when the game ball enters the first start winning means while a certain standby effect display is displayed, at least a part of the increase animation among the increase animation and the moving animation is omitted. However, in the first case, both the increase animation and the moving animation may be displayed from the beginning to the end without being interrupted in the middle, and in the first game state, a certain standby effect display is displayed. If the game ball enters the first start winning means during the display, at least a part of the increase animation of the increase animation and the movement animation is omitted, but in the first case, the increase animation and the movement Both animations may not be displayed from the beginning to the end without being interrupted.

Further, in the first game state, when the game ball enters the first start winning means while a certain standby effect display is displayed, at least a part of the increase animation among the increase animation and the moving animation is omitted. However, only in the first case, both the increase animation and the moving animation may be displayed from the beginning to the end without being interrupted in the middle, and in the first game state, a certain standby effect display is displayed. If a game ball enters the first starting prize means, at least a part of the increased animation and the moving animation is omitted, but in cases other than the first case, the increased animation is also omitted. And the moving animation may both be displayed from the beginning to the end without being interrupted.

Further, in the first game state, when the game ball enters the first start winning means while a certain standby effect display is displayed, only a part of the increase animation among the increase animation and the moving animation is displayed. Although omitted, in the first case, both the increase animation and the moving animation may be displayed from the beginning to the end without being interrupted in the middle, and in the first gaming state, a certain standby effect display is displayed. If a game ball enters the first start winning means during display, animations other than at least a part of the increase animation among the increase animation and the moving animation are omitted, but in the first case, the increase Both the animation and the moving animation may be displayed from the beginning to the end without being interrupted.

Also, in the first gaming state, at least a part of the increasing animation and the moving animation is omitted only when the game ball enters the first starting winning means while displaying a certain standby effect display. However, in the first case, both the increase animation and the moving animation may be displayed from the beginning to the end without being interrupted in the middle, and in the first game state, a certain standby effect display is displayed. In cases other than the case where the game ball enters the first starting winning means, at least a part of the increasing animation and the moving animation is omitted, but in the first case, the increasing animation And the moving animation may both be displayed from the beginning to the end without being interrupted.

Further, only in the first game state, when the game ball enters the first start winning means while displaying a certain standby effect display, at least a part of the increase animation among the increase animation and the moving animation is displayed. Although omitted, in the first case, both the increase animation and the moving animation may be displayed from the beginning to the end without being interrupted in the middle, or in a game state other than the first game state, or If a game ball enters the first starting winning means while the standby effect display is displayed, at least a part of the increasing animation and the moving animation is omitted, but in the first case, , Both the augmented animation and the moving animation may be displayed from the beginning to the end without being interrupted.

In the first game state, if the game ball enters the first start winning means while a certain standby effect display is displayed, only a part of the increase animation among the increase animation and the moving animation is omitted. However, in the first case, both the increase animation and the moving animation may be displayed from the beginning to the end without being interrupted in the middle, and in the first game state, a certain standby effect display is displayed. If the game ball enters the first starting prize means, all of the increasing animation and the moving animation are omitted, but in the first case, both the increasing animation and the moving animation are omitted. It may be displayed from the beginning to the end without being interrupted.

Further, "the moving animation is an animation including an animation in which the hold icon moves to a variable icon display area [for example, variable icon display area 280 or the like] as a variable icon [for example, variable icon h0 or the like].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the moving animation may include only an animation in which the hold icon moves to the variable icon display area as a variable icon, or an animation other than an animation in which the hold icon moves to the variable icon display area as a variable icon. It may include. Further, the moving animation may always include an animation in which the hold icon moves to the variable icon display area as a variable icon, or may not include an animation in which the hold icon moves to the variable icon display area as a variable icon. It may be one.

Further, the moving animation may include an animation in which the hold icon moves only to the variable icon display area as a variable icon, or an animation in which the hold icon moves to a display area other than the variable icon display area as a variable icon. May be included.

Further, "The variation icon is an icon displayed corresponding to the first symbol variation display being executed by the first symbol display means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, the variation icon may be displayed only corresponding to the first symbol variation display being executed by the first symbol display means, or the first symbol being executed by the first symbol display means. It may be displayed in correspondence with other than the symbol variation display of. Further, the variation icon may be displayed in correspondence with the first symbol variation display being executed by the first symbol display means, or the first symbol being executed by the first symbol display means. It may not be displayed corresponding to the symbol variation display of.

Further, "the certain standby effect display is shown in the first standby effect display [for example, the display of the symbol demo shown in FIG. 18 (c)] and the second standby effect display [for example, FIG. 18 (d)). It is a display that includes at least [animation demo display, etc.]
The first standby effect display is a display including a display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (c), in the display of the symbol demo, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Among the modes, "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" includes both the display of the stop mode of the decorative symbol and the display of the stop mode of the mini-design, which are stopped and displayed by the combination of the outliers.],
The second standby effect display is a display that does not include a display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 18D, in the display of the animation demo, the decorative symbols are stopped. Of the display modes, "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" includes only the display of the stop mode of the mini symbol that was stopped and displayed by the combination of the outlier symbols],
The display mode of the second standby effect display is different from the display mode of the first standby effect display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, a certain standby effect display may be configured to include only the first standby effect display and the second standby effect display, or the first standby effect display and the second standby effect display. It may be configured to include at least a display other than the display. Further, a certain standby effect display may be configured to always include a first standby effect display and a second standby effect display, or a first standby effect display and a second standby effect display. It may be configured without including.

It should be noted that a certain standby effect display may be configured to include at least only the first standby effect display of the first standby effect display and the second standby effect display, or the first standby effect display may be included. It may be configured to include at least only the second standby effect display of the standby effect display and the second standby effect display, or both the first standby effect display and the second standby effect display. It may be configured to include at least.

Further, the first standby effect display may include only the display of the mode in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, or may include the display other than the display of the mode in which the plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. It may be one. Further, the first standby effect display may always include the display of the mode in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, or may not include the display of the mode in which the plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. It may be something.

Further, the second standby effect display may not include only the display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, or may be a display other than the display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. It may not be included. Further, the second standby effect display may not always include the display of the mode in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, or may include the display of the mode in which the plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. It may be something.

In addition, "the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display after the first standby effect display is displayed [for example, FIGS. 21 (c) to 21 (see). As shown in d), the display of the design demo has been switched to the display of the animation demo, etc.],
After the second standby effect display is displayed, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display [for example, in FIGS. 21 (g) to 21 (h). As shown, the display of the animation demo has been switched to the display of the design demo, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, after the first standby effect display is displayed, the display may be switched only from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display, or the first standby effect display may be displayed. After that, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to a display other than the second standby effect display. Further, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display after the first standby effect display is displayed, or after the first standby effect display is displayed. The display may not switch from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display.

Further, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display only after the first standby effect display is displayed, or the first standby effect display may be displayed. The display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display other than after.

Further, after the second standby effect display is displayed, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to only the first standby effect display, or the second standby effect display is displayed. The display may later switch from the second standby effect display to a display other than the first standby effect display. Further, after the second standby effect display is displayed, the display may always switch from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display, or the second standby effect display is displayed. The display may not be switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display later.

Further, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display only after the second standby effect display is displayed, or the second standby effect display may be displayed. The display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display other than after.

Further, "when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the certain standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state," The certain standby effect display is switched to the certain symbol variation effect display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 29 (d) to 29 (f), the display of the animation demo during the change of the special figure 2 in the normal gaming state When a game ball wins a prize in the first special figure start port (above) 230, the decorative pattern variation effect display starts from the animation demo, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the display of a certain standby effect display is being performed in the first game state, when the game ball enters the first start winning means, a certain standby effect is displayed. The display may be switched only to a certain symbol variation effect display, or the first start winning prize may be obtained in a state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while a certain standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state. When the game ball enters the means, the display may be switched from a certain standby effect display to a display other than a certain symbol variation effect display. In addition, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the second standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state, a certain standby effect is produced. You may always switch from the display to a certain symbol variation effect display, or in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed during the display of a certain standby effect display in the first game state, the first start winning prize. When a game ball enters the means, it may not be possible to switch from a certain standby effect display to a certain symbol variation effect display.

In addition, when a game ball enters the first start winning means in a state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while a certain standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state, a certain standby effect display is displayed. It is possible to switch from only to a certain symbol variation effect display, or in a state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while a certain standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state, the first start winning means. When the game ball enters the market, the display other than the standby effect display may be switched to the symbol variation effect display.

In addition, in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the display of a certain standby effect display is being performed in the first game state, a certain standby is performed only when the game ball enters the first start winning means. The effect display may be switched to a certain symbol variation effect display, or the first start prize may be obtained in a state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while a certain standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state. Even when the game ball enters the means, the display may be switched from a certain standby effect display to a certain symbol variation effect display.

In addition, when the game ball enters the first start winning means only in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed while the display of the standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state, a certain standby effect is displayed. The display may be switched to a certain symbol variation effect display, and even in a state other than the state in which the second symbol variation display is being executed during the display of a certain standby effect display in the first game state, the first When a game ball enters the starting winning means of, a certain standby effect display may be switched to a certain symbol variation effect display.

In addition, "one of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state [for example, a jackpot gaming state, a probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state), or an electric support state (special figure). Figure low probability state, normal figure high probability state), etc.]
The second gaming state is a gaming state different from the first gaming state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The second gaming state may be a gaming state that is partially different from the first gaming state, or may be a gaming state that is completely different from the first gaming state.

Further, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.
In addition, in the above description,
"The first symbol display means [for example, the first special symbol display device 212, etc.] capable of executing the first symbol variation display, and
A second symbol display means [for example, a second special symbol display device 214, etc.] capable of executing a second symbol variation display, and
A game control means that can control any one of a plurality of game states [for example, CPU 304 in the main control unit 300] and
The first starting winning means [for example, the first special drawing starting port (top) 230, the first special drawing starting port (bottom) 231 and the like], which the game ball can enter,
A certain gate that a game ball can enter [for example, a jackpot generation gate 252, etc.]
A display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
Light emitting means capable of emitting light with a plurality of types of light emitting patterns [for example, a game board lamp 442 and a game underframe lamp 452 shown in FIG. 5] and
It is a game table equipped with
The gate is provided at a position where the game ball can enter when hitting to the right [for example, as shown in FIG. 3, the jackpot generating gate 252 is provided on the right side of the game area 124. , It is possible to pass by hitting right, etc.],
The first starting winning means is a winning means corresponding to the first symbol display means.
Both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time [for example, as shown in FIG. 13A, the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212. And the symbol variation display on the second special figure display device 214 may be performed at the same time],
One of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state [for example, a normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), etc.].
One of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state [for example, a jackpot gaming state, a probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state), or an electric support state (special figure low probability). State, high probability state), etc.]
The second gaming state is a gaming state different from the first gaming state.
One of the plurality of displays is a symbol variation effect display [for example, a decorative symbol displayed in accordance with the variation display of the special figure 1 shown in FIGS. 14 (b) to 15 (x). Production display including fluctuation display (decorative design fluctuation production display), etc.]
One of the plurality of displays is the first standby effect display [for example, the display of the symbol demo shown in FIG. 18C].
One of the plurality of displays is a second standby effect display [for example, a display of an animation demo shown in FIG. 18 (d)].
One of the plurality of displays is a setting screen display [for example, the menu screen shown in FIG. 33 (c)].
The certain symbol variation effect display is a display including a display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are variablely displayed.
The first standby effect display is a display including a display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (c), in the display of the symbol demo, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Among the modes, "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" includes both the display of the stop mode of the decorative symbol and the display of the stop mode of the mini-design, which are stopped and displayed by the combination of the outliers.],
The second standby effect display is a display that does not include a display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 18D, in the display of the animation demo, the decorative symbols are stopped. Of the display modes, "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" includes only the display of the stop mode of the mini symbol that was stopped and displayed by the combination of the outlier symbols],
The display mode of the second standby effect display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first standby effect display.
In the first gaming state, the certain symbol variation effect display is started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (f), in the normal gaming state, in the normal gaming state, The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol variation effect display in response to the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212],
In the first gaming state, the certain symbol variation effect display corresponding to the start of the second symbol variation display is not started [for example, as shown in FIG. 18C, in the normal gaming state. , The decorative symbol variation effect display is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to the symbol variation display on the second special symbol display device 214],
The first standby effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed.
The second standby effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed in the first game state.
After the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, a certain period [for example, the period during which the jackpot generation gate monitoring state shown in t83 to t85 of FIG. 16 is effective] is started.
When the game ball enters the certain gate in the certain period, the big hit game is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 16, during the period in which the big hit generation gate monitoring state shown in t83 to t85 is effective, it is shown in t84. When the game ball passes through the jackpot generation gate 252 at the timing, the jackpot game is started, etc.],
One of the plurality of displays is the first display [for example, right-handed to pass through the jackpot generating gate 252, which is shown in FIG. 33 (a). Display, etc. that promotes
One of the plurality of displays is a second display [for example, a display of a gate entry standby effect shown in FIG. 18 (j)].
One of the plurality of displays is a fourth display [for example, a display including the character display of "preparing for a big hit !!" shown in FIG. 18 (g)].
The first display is a display that encourages right-handed striking.
The second display is a display that may be displayed during the certain period.
In the first gaming state, the first display is displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (d) to 19 (f)). , After the big hit symbol is displayed on the special figure 2, the display that promotes the passage of the big hit generation gate 252 is displayed, etc.],
In some cases, both the first display and the second display may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (j), a display that promotes the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 enters the gate. It is overlaid on the standby effect display, etc.],
A state in which both the first display and the first standby effect display are displayed (hereinafter, "a big hit occurs during the display of the symbol demo as shown in the first state [for example, FIG. 21 (h))". A state in which a display promoting the passage of the gate 252 is displayed, etc.] ”) may occur.
A state in which both the first display and the second standby effect display are displayed (hereinafter, "a big hit during the display of the animation demo as shown in the second state [for example, FIG. 21 (g')). A state in which a display promoting the passage of the generation gate 252 is displayed, etc.] ”).
The first state may change to the second state [for example, as shown in FIGS. 21 (h') to 21 (i'), passing through the jackpot generation gate 252 during the display of the symbol demo. From the state where the display to promote is displayed, the display to promote the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252 may be displayed while the animation demo is displayed],
The fourth display is an effect display including a display for notifying a big hit.
When the first standby effect display is displayed in a state where the first symbol variation display is not executed and the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter, referred to as "third case"). () [For example, as shown in FIG. 18C, the symbol variation display is not performed on the first special symbol display device 212, and the symbol variation display is performed on the second special symbol display device 214. The design demo may be displayed in the state],
In the third case, when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, the display of the fourth display may be started.
Even in the first state, the display of the certain setting screen display can be started.
One of the plurality of types of light emission patterns is the first light emission pattern [for example, the lamp provided at the first special figure start port (top) 230 shown in FIG. 36 (c) emits white light. The default light emission mode, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of light emission patterns is a second light emission pattern [for example, the lamp provided at the first special figure start port (top) 230 shown in FIG. 36 (e) emits red light. Light emission mode of pre-reading notice, etc.]
When the game ball enters the first start winning means, light emission may be started in the first light emission pattern [for example, as shown in FIGS. 36 (b) to 36 (c), the first 1 When a game ball wins in the special figure start port (top) 230, the lamp provided in the first special figure start port (top) 230 may emit light in the default light emitting mode],
When the game ball enters the first start winning means, light emission may be started in the second light emission pattern [for example, as shown in FIGS. 36 (d) to 36 (e), the first 1 When a game ball wins in the special figure start port (top) 230, the lamp provided in the first special figure start port (top) 230 may emit light in the light emission mode of the look-ahead notice],
The first light emission pattern is the default light emission pattern and
The second light emission pattern is a light emission pattern that may be started as a look-ahead notice.
When the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, light emission may be started in the first light emission pattern.
Even if the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the light emission does not start in the second light emission pattern.
There is no first symbol variation display whose start is suspended, there is no second symbol variation display whose start is suspended, and both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display are executed. In the state where the first standby effect display is displayed, the light emission may be started in the second light emission pattern.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

The following will be added, including what has been explained so far.

(Appendix 1)
The first symbol display means capable of executing the first symbol variation display,
A second symbol display means capable of executing a second symbol variation display,
A game control means that can control any one of a plurality of game states,
A certain gate where a game ball can enter,
Display means that can display multiple displays and
It is a game table equipped with
In some cases, both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display are being executed at the same time.
One of the plurality of gaming states is the first gaming state.
One of the plurality of gaming states is the second gaming state.
The second gaming state is a gaming state different from the first gaming state.
One of the plurality of displays is a symbol variation effect display.
The symbol variation effect display is a display including a variation display of a decorative symbol.
In the first gaming state, the symbol variation effect display is started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display.
In the first gaming state, the symbol variation effect display corresponding to the start of the second symbol variation display is not started.
A certain period of time is started after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means.
Even after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the certain period is started.
When the game ball enters the gate during the certain period, the big hit game is started.
One of the plurality of displays is a gate entry promotion display.
The display of one of the plurality of displays is the first standby effect display.
One of the plurality of displays is a gate entry standby state display.
The gate entry promotion display is a display that prompts the game ball to enter the certain gate.
The first standby effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed.
The first standby effect display is a display including a display in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.
The gate entry waiting state display is a display that may be displayed during the certain period.
In the first gaming state, after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the gate entry promotion display is displayed.
In some cases, both the gate entry promotion display and the gate entry standby status display are displayed.
In some cases, both the gate entry promotion display and the first standby effect display are displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 2)
The game console described in Appendix 1.
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a jackpot display.
In the first gaming state, when the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the jackpot display is displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display is displayed (hereinafter, "first". There is a case ".)
In the first gaming state, when the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means and then the gate entry promotion display is displayed without displaying the jackpot display (hereinafter, "second". There is a case ".)
In the first case, both the gate entry promotion display and the gate entry standby state display are displayed.
In the second case, both the gate entry promotion display and the first standby effect display are displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 3)
The first symbol display means capable of executing the first symbol variation display,
A second symbol display means capable of executing a second symbol variation display,
A game control means that can control any one of a plurality of game states,
The first starting prize means that the game ball can enter,
Display means that can display multiple displays and
It is a game table equipped with
When the game ball enters the first start winning means, the execution of the first symbol variation display can be started.
In some cases, both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display are being executed at the same time.
The execution of the small hit game can be started after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display.
One of the plurality of gaming states is the first gaming state.
One of the plurality of displays is a symbol variation effect display.
The symbol variation effect display is a display including a variation display of a decorative symbol.
In the first gaming state, the symbol variation effect display is started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display.
In the first gaming state, the symbol variation effect display corresponding to the start of the second symbol variation display is not started.
The display of one of the plurality of displays is the second standby effect display.
The second standby effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed in the first game state.
The second standby effect display is a display that does not include a display in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.
The second standby effect display may be displayed even during the execution of the small hit game.
In the first game state, even when the game ball enters the first start winning means while the small hit game is being executed while the second standby effect display is displayed, the second Standby effect display is continuously displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

In the above description, the first symbol display means corresponds to the first special symbol display device 212, the second symbol display means corresponds to the second special symbol display device 214, and the first gaming state is the special figure. In the explanation, the second game state corresponds to the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state corresponding to the low probability normal figure low probability state, but the first symbol display means is set to the second special figure display device 214. The second symbol display means is the first special figure display device 212, the first gaming state is the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state, and the second game state is the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. You may let it. Further, although the second gaming state has been described in correspondence with the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state, the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state may be used. That is, in the above-described embodiment, in the high-probability state of the normal figure, it becomes easy to win a prize in the first special figure start port (bottom) 231 and the game property of digesting the special figure 1 as the center is described as an example. However, in the high probability state of the normal figure, it becomes easy to win a prize in the second special figure start port, and it is also possible to adopt it for a game having a game property that can be digested centering on the special figure 2.

FIG. 40 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

In the enclosed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 40, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 into the gaming area 902 is discharged from the gaming area 902 and can be supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in 1 are not provided.

It should be noted that the above-described display means 903 may be further provided on the upper plate 126 of the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, and further, the display means 903 is provided with a touch panel. You may. That is, the touch panel provided on the display means 903 can function as an operating means. Then, the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 may be executed by one touch operation, the continuous stroke operation, or the long press operation by the touch panel, or when the long press auto continuous press function is in the effective state, the touch panel. May be configured to perform a pseudo-continuous hitting operation on the touch panel while the touch panel is continuously touched. Further, it may be configured so as not to enable the long press auto continuous striking function. Further, in some productions, the long press auto continuous striking function may be enabled. In other words, the long-press auto-striking function may be activated on the touch panel, may not be activated, may be configured so that there are many effects to be activated, or may be configured to be less. .. Further, there are a plurality of effects by the continuous hitting operation on the touch panel, and when the touch panel is used, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be configured so as not to be effective in many cases, or may be configured to be few. ..

As described above, the pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 40 is used by enclosing a ball and circulating the enclosed ball in the pachinko machine. The enclosed ball is used as a launching ball and the ball is discharged. May be executed by credit.

Next, a slot machine (rotary barrel game machine) as a game table applicable to the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 41. Here, FIG. 41 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 41 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 41), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged are stored on the outer peripheral surface of the slot machine 1000. It is configured to rotate internally. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 1010 to 1012. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 1010 to 1012 functions as a display means for variably displaying a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each reel 1010 to 1012, a reel backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 1013 is arranged. It is desirable that the reel backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. Inside the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 1010 to 1012, and the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. It is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the spaces. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 1014. The valid winning line is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and if two medals are bet, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If 3 medals are valid and 3 medals are bet, 5 lines with the addition of the right-down winning line and the upper-right winning line will be valid as the winning line. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to five, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, and the right. Five lines, the down winning line and the upper right winning line, may be valid as winning lines. Hereinafter, a valid winning line may be referred to as a valid line.

The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in the internal lottery described later, or that the bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game can be re-played (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for directing.

The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In this embodiment, a maximum of three medals are inserted each time the medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, two medals are inserted when the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, and 3 when the medal insertion button 1032 is pressed. It is designed to be inserted. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a predetermined number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by pressing the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, or the actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion port 1041, and the insertion means that both are included. Is. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 1025, the game information display 1026, and the payout number display 1027 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion port 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of the operating means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with each reel 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reel subject to the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop reel, the reel subject to the second stop operation is referred to as a second stop reel, and the reel subject to the third stop operation is referred to as a third stop reel. A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 1034 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000. The medal payout outlet 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

On the right side of the medal insertion button 1032, a chance button 1100 is provided as an example of the operating means. The chance button 1100 can be operated in relation to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012, or can be operated in relation to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 can take a plurality of states like the pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment, and the state may be changed during the operation valid period of the chance button 1100.

The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is, for example, an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting game history information of an individual player), and is composed of a plurality of buttons. In this embodiment, the information display button 1046 corresponds to an operating means.

A title panel 1062 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided at the lower part of the stop button unit 1036, and the title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. A medal payout outlet 1055 and a medal tray 1061 are provided at the lower part of the title panel 1062.

The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. The side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 1060 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided on the upper part of the effect device 1060. The effect device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 composed of two right shutters 1063a and a left shutter 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) arranged behind the shutter 1063. When the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (game). It has a structure that appears on the person's side).

In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various production images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, and a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the periphery of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the periphery of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

The game console according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 42 (a), "a bill is inserted into the bill insertion slot 2002, a lottery is executed based on the bet 2004 and start 2006 operations, and the lottery result is displayed on the lottery result display device 2008. However, at the time of winning, the number of privilege coins is added to the number of remaining credits, and when cashout 2009 is selected, the receipt issuing machine 2010 issues a receipt with a code corresponding to the number of remaining credits. It may be.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3B, a mobile phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and as shown in FIG. 3C, electronic data that realizes the present invention. The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data, and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data according to the present invention.

More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in the figure (b) has an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game through the mobile phone line, and data related to the acquired game (book). It includes a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 6C has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and data related to the acquired game (the present invention). It is provided with a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the above, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. In the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG. 6D, an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and data related to the acquired game ( It includes a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the present invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6E, it may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. In some cases, electronic data realizing the present invention may be downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG. 6D via an Internet line.

Further, the present invention can be applied to execute a game even in a game program in which the operation of an actual machine such as a pachinko machine is simulated for a home-use game machine. In that case, as the recording medium for recording the game program, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used.

Further, the present invention has given an example of a pachinko machine and a slot machine as a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to an arrange ball game machine, a rock game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. In addition, even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modified example, the various examples, the appendices, etc. described above, the constituent requirement may be referred to as another embodiment or the embodiment. It may be applied to a modified example, various examples, an appendix, and the like. That is, unless there is a factor that hinders the application, the constituent requirements included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modification, the various examples, the appendix, etc. Even if it is applied to examples, various examples, appendices, etc., it holds as one cohesive technical idea.

100 Pachinko machine 120 Speaker 136 Effect button 208 Decorative symbol display device 210 Ordinary symbol display device 212 1st special symbol display device 214 2nd special symbol display device 226a General winning opening 230 1st special symbol start port (top)
231 First special figure start port (bottom)
232 2nd special figure Start port 234a 1st variable winning port 235a 2nd variable winning port 240 Out port 300 Main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
400 1st sub-control unit 404 CPU
406 ROM
408 RAM
500 2nd sub control unit 504 CPU
506 ROM
508 Memory SWout Out sphere detection sensor

Claims (1)

The first symbol display means capable of executing the first symbol variation display,
A second symbol display means capable of executing a second symbol variation display,
A game control means that can control any one of a plurality of game states,
The first starting prize means that the game ball can enter,
A certain gate where a game ball can enter,
Display means that can display multiple displays and
A light emitting means capable of emitting light with multiple types of light emitting patterns,
It is a game table equipped with
The gate is provided at a position where the game ball can enter when hitting to the right.
The first starting winning means is a winning means corresponding to the first symbol display means.
In some cases, both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display are being executed at the same time.
One of the plurality of gaming states is the first gaming state.
One of the plurality of gaming states is the second gaming state.
The second gaming state is a gaming state different from the first gaming state.
One of the plurality of displays is a symbol variation effect display.
The display of one of the plurality of displays is the first standby effect display.
The display of one of the plurality of displays is the second standby effect display.
One of the plurality of displays is a setting screen display.
The certain symbol variation effect display is a display including a display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are variablely displayed.
The first standby effect display is a display including a display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.
The second standby effect display is a display that does not include a display in which a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.
The display mode of the second standby effect display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first standby effect display.
In the first gaming state, the certain symbol variation effect display is started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display.
In the first gaming state, the certain symbol variation effect display corresponding to the start of the second symbol variation display is not started.
The first standby effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the jackpot game is not executed.
The second standby effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state in which the first symbol variation display is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed in the first game state.
A certain period of time is started after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means.
When the game ball enters the gate during the certain period, the big hit game is started.
The display of one of the plurality of displays is the first display.
The display of one of the plurality of displays is the second display.
The display of one of the plurality of displays is the fourth display.
The first display is a display that encourages right-handed striking.
The second display is a display that may be displayed during the certain period.
In the first gaming state, the first display is displayed after the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means.
In some cases, both the first display and the second display may be displayed.
In some cases, both the first display and the first standby effect display are displayed (hereinafter, referred to as "first state").
In some cases, both the first display and the second standby effect display are displayed (hereinafter, referred to as "second state").
Ri If there from the first state becomes the second state,
The fourth display is an effect display including a display for notifying a big hit.
When the first standby effect display is displayed in a state where the first symbol variation display is not executed and the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter, referred to as "third case"). .) There is
In the third case, when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, the display of the fourth display may be started.
Even in the first state, the display of the certain setting screen display can be started.
The light emitting pattern of one of the plurality of types of light emitting patterns is the first light emitting pattern.
The light emission pattern of one of the plurality of types of light emission patterns is the second light emission pattern.
When a game ball enters the first start winning means, light emission may be started in the first light emission pattern.
When a game ball enters the first start winning means, light emission may be started in the second light emission pattern.
The first light emission pattern is the default light emission pattern and
The second light emission pattern is a light emission pattern that may be started as a look-ahead notice.
When the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, light emission may be started in the first light emission pattern.
Even if the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the light emission does not start in the second light emission pattern.
There is no first symbol variation display whose start is suspended, there is no second symbol variation display whose start is suspended, and both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display are executed. In the state where the first standby effect display is displayed, the light emission may be started in the second light emission pattern.
A game table characterized by that.